213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-12-31 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-12-31 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-09-01 2024-09-30 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-05-01 2024-05-31 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-09-01 2023-09-30 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-05-01 2023-05-31 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2022-12-31 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember 213800CXIBLC2TMIGI76 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember iso4217:GBP iso4217:GBP xbrli:shares
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
Helping more consumers and
businesses
fulfil their ambitions
Strategic Report
Group at a glance
1
Our strategy
1
Our business model
2
Our strategic progress
3
Chair’s statement
4
Chief Executive’s statement
6
Financial review
12
Business review
Consumer Finance
18
Business Finance
22
Savings
26
Market review
28
Principal risks and uncertainties
30
Viability and going concern
40
Managing our business responsibly
Engaging with our stakeholders
42
Environmental, Social and Governance strategy
45
Climate-related financial disclosures
54
Non-financial and sustainability
information statement
66
Corporate Governance
Governance at a glance
68
Chair’s introduction
70
Board leadership
71
Governance framework
74
Corporate Governance report
75
Nomination Committee report
80
Audit Committee report
83
Risk Committee report
90
Directors’ Remuneration Report
94
Directors’ report
112
Directors’ responsibility statement
119
Independent Auditor’s report to the members
of Secure Trust Bank PLC
120
Financial Statements
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
130
Consolidated and Company statement
of financial position
131
Consolidated and Company statement
of changes in equity
132
Consolidated statement of cash flows
133
Company statement of cash flows
134
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
135
Five-year summary (unaudited)
175
Appendix to the Annual Report (unaudited)
176
Other Information
Glossary
179
Corporate contacts and advisers
181
securetrustbank.com
We are an award-winning UK
specialist lender, providing savings
accounts and lending services
to over 1.4 million customers.
The Group has been helping
consumers and businesses fulfil
their ambitions for over 70 years.
Pages 1 to 67 form the Strategic Report. It includes our
market review, strategy, financial review and a business review
for each of the lines of business. Pages 112 to 118 form the
Directors’ report.
All key performance indicators are presented on a continuing
basis, unless otherwise stated.
Adjusted profit before tax refers to Profit before income tax
from continuing operations before exceptional items.
Further information on exceptional items are included on page
14, and discontinued operations are included in Note 10 to the
Financial Statements.
Adjusted profit before tax
£39.1m
2023: £42.6 million
Common Equity Tier 1 ratio
12.3%
2023: 12.7%
Customer lending
£3.6bn
2023: £3.3 billion
Statutory profit before tax
£29.2m
2023: £36.1 million
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
About us
In this report
Our vision
To be the most trusted
specialist lender in the UK
Our purpose
To help more consumers
and businesses fulfil
their ambitions
Our strategic priorities
Our strengths
Group at a glance
Our strategy
Specialist
Diverse
Expert
Ambitious
Our values
Stakeholders
Simplify
Focus on core business units and use
technology to deliver efficiency and
better operational processes
Enhance customer
experience
Improve the customer journey to
increase retention and attract new
customers to gain market share
Leverage networks
Take advantage of our strong
partnerships with introducers
to drive growth
Enabled by
technology
Take advantage of recent investments
within our technology platforms to
automate processes and streamline
and enhance customer experience for
our business partners via integration
and for our end customers through
self-service
Customers
Business
partners
Shareholders
and investors
Regulators
Employees
Communities
and society
Customer
Focused
Risk Aware
Future
Orientated
Teamwork
Ownership
Performance
Driven
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
01
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
What we do
How we do it
2024 in numbers
Business Finance
Real Estate Finance
We lend money against residential
properties to professional
landlords and property developers.
Commercial Finance
We provide asset based
lending solutions.
Refer to page 22
Consumer Finance
Retail Finance
We provide finance options
at the point of purchase.
Vehicle Finance
We provide financing for
consumers and dealerships.
Refer to page 18
Wholesale funding
and investors
We utilise our balance sheet to
raise secured wholesale funds.
We raise and retain capital
to support the growth of our
balance sheet.
Refer to page 16
Savings
We offer a full range of customer
savings products including
Access Accounts, Fixed Term
Bonds and ISAs.
Refer to page 26
We pay interest to
our customers
We earn
interest income
We pay interest to
investors and dividends
to shareholders
We earn interest
and fee income
Our strengths
Strategic priorities
Net lending
Funding
Specialist
Expert
Diverse
Ambitious
Customer service
Risk management
Governance
Value creation
Simplify
Enhanced customer
experience
Leverage networks
Customers
Shareholders
and investors
Employees
Business partners
Regulators
Communities
and society
£3.6bn
Vehicle Finance
15.5%
Retail Finance
37.6%
Real Estate Finance
37.2%
9.7%
Commercial Finance
£3.7bn
Wholesale funding
9.7%
Savings
87.8%
Tier 2 debt
2.5%
Enabled
by technology
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
02
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Group at a glance
Our business model
Simplify
Initial Project Fusion
target achieved, with
£5 million annualised
cost savings¹
Organisational
redesign completed
with IT and Operations
consolidated
under a single
management structure
New Project Fusion
target announced at
half year on track to
achieve an
additional
£3 million annualised
cost savings
1
in 2025
Delivered over
50%
reduction
in Scope
1 and Scope 2 CO
2
target for
emissions
one year early
(since 2021)
Delivering our cost
savings target improves
our
cost income ratio
and return on equity
Leverage
networks
Extended contracts
with key furniture and
jewellery retailers in
Retail Finance
Extensive distribution
relationships
across
consumer businesses
Repeat business
and
client retention
within
Business Finance
from
established
relationships
Market share gains
of
new business in both
Retail Finance and
Vehicle Finance
Driving growth in
net lending and net
interest margin
as
our balance sheet
mix moves towards
consumer lending
Enabled by
technology
Vehicle Finance
rate for risk
platform launched,
facilitating applicants
to be matched to
our products
Use of
AI tools
and automated
data gathering
in
complaints handling
Savings app
enhancements,
with
more transactional
activity and
over 30%
of customers registered
Platforms proven
to be
scalable
and flexible with
increased partner
API integrations
A digital-first
approach supports
cost-efficiencies and
growth capacity
Enhance
customer
experience
Digital-first approach
for Savings, delivering
an
enhanced online
application process
Over 87% self-
service adoption
in
Retail Finance, and
app rollout to allow
customer self-servicing
Automated
savings bond
maturity process
implemented
Customer
Feefo score
of
4.7 stars
and
4.6
stars
for
Trustpilot
Delivering
cost-
efficiency and
balance sheet
growth
by retaining
satisfied customers
1.
£5.0 million cost savings relative to operating expenses for the 12 months ended December 2021. The additional £3.0 million savings will be relative to annualised operating expenses for the six months ended 30 June 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
03
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Group at a glance
Our strategic progress
Focused on
strategic progress
We have delivered a resilient performance in
2024, in a challenging operating environment with
elevated inflation, continued high interest rates,
a new UK government and slowing economic
growth, causing uncertainty across the markets
in which we operate. In addition, like many other
firms across the sector, we faced significant legal
and regulatory headwinds, which have created
further uncertainty and disruption.
Despite these challenges, we have continued to
focus on delivering for our customers, which has
driven continued lending growth across both our
Consumer and Business Finance segments. During
the year, we have taken decisions to refocus our
Vehicle Finance business, invest in our collections
capability and simplify our organisational design,
further reducing complexity and costs.
First impressions
I joined Secure Trust Bank because I believe in the underlying
strength of the business and the strategic growth opportunities
available. Since my appointment as Chair in May 2024, I have
engaged with many people across the business and visited our
key offices, which has served to reinforce my initial views. I have
been particularly impressed by the commitment shown by our
people, who are dedicated to delivering for our customers
and helping them to fulfil their ambitions. This focus on our
customers and achieving good outcomes for them, will drive
our future success.
I have welcomed the opportunity to meet with many of our
major shareholders and hear their views, on the business and
the markets in which we operate. This engagement has been
very valuable as I have transitioned into the Chair role.
In-line with feedback from shareholders, we have enhanced
our segmental reporting, providing greater granularity on
the performance of each business unit, further information
on which can be found in Note 3 to the Financial Statements
from page 137.
Business performance
Adjusted
1
profit before tax for the year ended 31 December
2024 was £39.1 million (2023: £42.6 million) and statutory
profit before tax was £29.2 million (2023: £36.1 million).
Excluding impairment charges, which were impacted by
the FCA’s Borrowers in Financial Difficulty (‘BiFD’) review as
explained in the following section, adjusted
1
profit before
tax pre-impairments increased 18.0% to £100.9 million
(2023: £85.5 million).
Adjusted
1
return on average equity has decreased to 8.0%
from 9.6% in 2023; improving the bank’s return on equity
across the business units is a key area of focus for the Board
and management.
We have taken several decisions during the year to accelerate
the growth in our return on equity, particularly within our
Vehicle Finance business, where we have refined our strategy
to focus on higher returning segments of the market and made
further investments to improve our collections processes.
Across the Group we have implemented centralised operating
and governance models, which have reduced complexity,
improved the consistency of service to clients, delivered cost
efficiencies and resulted in a more agile organisation.
Legal and regulatory developments
The FCA’s BiFD review and subsequent engagement with the
regulator meant the Group paused collections processes in
our Vehicle Finance business during the second half of 2023.
During the year, we have invested in our collections capabilities,
to enhance the outcomes for our customers and improve our
processes. The reduced collections activity into 2024 resulted
in a material increase in our impairment charges in 2024, which
impacted our profitability for the year. Collections activity
returned to normalised levels during H2 24 and we are
considering options to manage the level of defaulted stock.
Separately, in January 2024 the FCA launched a review of
the historic use of discretionary commission arrangements
(‘DCAs’) in the motor finance market. DCAs were prohibited
by the FCA in 2021, although the Group ceased these types
of arrangements well before in June 2017.
“We will continue to focus on
building business momentum,
the effective deployment of
capital and increasing our
return on equity.”
Jim Brown
Chair
1.
Adjusted metrics exclude exceptional items of £9.9 million (2023: £6.5 million). Details can be found in Note 8 to the Financial Statements.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
04
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Chair’s statement
The Court of Appeal’s October 2024 judgment on three motor
commission cases led to lending pauses and uncertainty across
the motor finance market and is the subject of a Supreme Court
appeal. There are important differences in the fact patterns in
those cases and our lending model. We also believe that key
aspects of the judgment, if upheld, go beyond the regulatory
requirements applied by the FCA, and generally understood
by market participants, at the time. Further information can be
found in Note 29 to the Financial Statements on page 162.
Immediately before the Court of Appeal’s judgment, the
Company’s share price had increased by 18% for the year
to October. After this judgment and with the continuing
uncertainty in the sector, our share price fell by 48% to £3.62
as at 31 December 2024, significantly below the Group’s
tangible book value of £18.64.
Capital management and dividend
As at 31 December 2024 the Group’s Common Equity Tier
1 ratio was 12.3% (2023:12.7%). The optimal deployment of
our capital and the returns it generates will be a key area of
focus during 2025, as we balance maintaining a healthy capital
surplus with investing for growth and returns to shareholders.
With effect from the 2024 AGM we implemented a new
progressive dividend policy, which means dividends will be
no less than that of the previous year. Under the policy the
Board will consider the Group’s capital requirements, liquidity
and market expectations in determining the specific amount.
In-line with that policy the Board proposes a final dividend
of 22.5 pence per share (2023: 16.2 pence per share), which if
approved by shareholders at the Company’s 2025 AGM, will be
paid on 22 May 2025 to those shareholders on the register on
25 April 2025.
Governance
There have been a number of changes to the Board during
the year. Victoria Stewart, a Non-Executive Director and
Chair of the Remuneration Committee, stood down from the
Board on 31 December 2024, after entering her ninth year as
a Director. I would like to thank Victoria for her stewardship
of the Remuneration Committee and her wider contribution
to the development of the Group throughout her tenure.
In October, we welcomed Julie Hopes to the Board, who
succeeded Victoria as Chair of the Remuneration Committee
with effect from 31 December 2024. Julie has strong experience
of Chairing Remuneration Committees, particularly within
Financial Services, and brings a strategic mindset, experience
of business transformation and a strong focus on consumers.
In October, we also appointed Victoria Mitchell, an
existing Non-Executive Director to our Risk Committee.
Victoria previously served as the Chief Risk Officer of Capital
One (Europe) plc and her experience further strengthens and
broadens the experience of the Risk Committee.
Outlook
We have a strong, diversified business and see significant
growth opportunities in sectors in which we operate.
We believe our customer focus positions us well to capitalise
on these opportunities and increase our return on equity.
As highlighted, there remains significant legal and regulatory
uncertainty across the motor finance sector and the wider
macroeconomic environment. Supporting the management
team to address the potential implications of the Supreme
Court’s decision is a priority for the Board.
Throughout this, we will continue to focus on building
momentum across our business units, the effective deployment
of our capital and increasing our return on equity.
I would like to sincerely thank our customers for their
continued trust and our colleagues for their hard work
throughout the year; they have demonstrated their
resilience and have remained dedicated to delivering
for our customers, shareholders and other stakeholders.
Jim Brown
Chair
12 March 2025
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
05
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Chair’s statement
As the year
progressed,
momentum
seen across core
performance metrics
There were a number of challenges that presented
themselves during the year, and so, I was pleased
that while navigating those, we were also able to
deliver improvements, particularly in the second
half of the year across lending growth, net interest
margin and adjusted
1
cost income ratio. This has
been achieved with a Common Equity Tier 1 (‘CET
1’) ratio of 12.3%. Full-year adjusted1 profit before
tax pre impairments increased by 18.0% to £100.9
million (2023: £85.5 million). Statutory profit before
tax was £29.2 million (2023: £36.1 million).
Progress against our medium-term targets has been
encouraging. We achieved an 8.8% growth in net lending
(2024: £3.6 billion; 2023: £3.3 billion), moving us closer to our
£4.0 billion target and stabilised our net interest margin at
5.4% (2023: 5.4%), just below our target of greater than 5.5%,
despite incurring higher funding costs. Project Fusion, our
cost optimisation programme, prudent cost management and
continued income growth contributed to an improvement
in our adjusted
1
cost income ratio to 50.9% (2023: 54.0%), a
reduction of 310 basis points. Statutory cost income ratio was
55.8% (2023: 57.5%). This is excellent progress towards our
target of 44% to 46%. Continued growth in net lending and
net interest margin and effective cost management will drive
us towards delivering our target return on average equity
(‘ROAE’) of 14% to 16%.
Although the year saw a reduction in the Bank of England
Base Rate, we have operated in a highly competitive interest
rate environment for Savings accounts. We continue to offer
competitive rates to depositors, attracting significant levels of
new funding (£1.6 billion), as well as retaining matured funds
(£0.9 billion). Our deposits are entirely from retail customers
and more than 95% of deposits are fully covered by the FSCS.
We have achieved this, despite the challenges we have faced
in 2024, with a high interest rate environment and uncertainty
around timing of interest rate cuts, slowing economic growth
and political changes. This has impacted demand for credit,
particularly in Business Finance. We continued to manage
credit exposures in a disciplined way and remained agile
in managing our balance sheet.
Cost of risk increased from 1.4% to 1.8% and was impacted
by the secondary impact of the pause in our collection
processes in Vehicle Finance during the second half of
2023, which resulted in an elevated stock of defaulted loans
(see section on Regulatory and legal interventions), which
increased impairment charges for the year. As a consequence,
the cost of risk for Vehicle Finance increased from 3.4% in 2023
to 7.7%. Unfortunately, the initiatives we hoped would restore
performance of the Vehicle Finance portfolio towards a normal
level for year-end, were not possible to fully execute due to the
market environment. We continue to pursue strategic options
to manage down the stock of historic defaulted balances.
Retail Finance cost of risk improved to 1.0% (2023: 1.4%)
reflecting the quality of business written and IFRS 9 model
enhancements, which resulted in some
one-off provision releases.
As a result, we delivered an adjusted
1
profit before tax of
£39.1 million (2023: £42.6 million) in the year, which impacted
our adjusted
1
ROAE of 8.0% (2023: 9.6%). Total ROAE was
5.5% (2023: 7.3%). Three of our specialist businesses grew
profitability year-on-year. The higher cost of risk in Vehicle
Finance impacted our overall results. Further insight is shared
in our segmental reporting which can be found in Note 3 to
the Financial Statements.
With our four specialist lending segments all offering
compelling propositions in large addressable markets, we
have solid foundations in place to make further market share
gains. This is demonstrated by our strong track record in
recent years. We saw gains in Retail Finance’s market share
of new business, which grew to 15.3%
2
; this continues to grow
year-on-year (2023: 13.5%). Vehicle Finance’s market share
of new business was 1.4%
3
increasing its position from 2023
(1.2%). As a result, this contributed to net lending growth in
the Consumer Finance businesses of 13.4% (£225.7 million)
since 2023. Business Finance increased by £67.5 million,
despite a subdued trading environment.
“Foundations in place to support
net lending growth ambition.”
David McCreadie
Chief Executive
1.
Adjusted metrics exclude exceptional items of £9.9 million (2023: £6.5 million). Details can be found in Note 8 to the Financial Statements.
2.
Source: Finance & Leasing Association (‘FLA’): New business values within retail store and online credit: 2024 15.3% (2023: 13.5%): FLA total and Retail Finance new business of £8,427million
(2023: £8,810 million) and £1,289.7 million (2023: £1,185.4 million) respectively. As published at 31 December 2024.
3.
Source: FLA. Cars bought on finance by consumers through the point of sale: New business values: 2024 1.4% (2023: 1.2%): Used cars: 2024, FLA total and Vehicle Finance total of
£21,281 million (2023: £22,082 million) and £294.4 million (2023: £260.0 million) respectively. As published at 31 December 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
06
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Chief Executive’s statement
Key performance indicators
The following key performance indicators are the primary measures used by management to assess the performance of the Group.
Why we measure this
The CET 1 ratio demonstrates
the Group’s capital strength
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
14.0
12.3
14.5
14.0
12.7
Common Equity Tier 1 (‘CET 1’) ratio
(%)
Why we measure this
Measures how effectively the Group manages
the credit risk of its lending portfolios
Why we measure this
Shows the growth in the Group’s lending
balances, which generate income
Why we measure this
Measures the Group’s ability to generate
profit from the equity available to it
Why we measure this
Shows the interest margin earned on the
Group’s lending balances, net of funding costs
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
2.0
1.8
0.2
1.4
1.4
Cost of risk
(%)
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
2.2
3.6
2.5
2.9
3.3
Loans and advances to customers
(£bn)
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
5.9
5.5
15.9
10.8
7.3
Total return on average equity
(%)
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
6.1
5.4
6.1
5.7
5.4
Net interest margin
(%)
Why we measure this
Measures how efficiently the Group uses its
cost base to produce income
Adjusted cost to income ratio excludes exceptional items.
For further information see page 14
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
56.6
55.8
60.0
55.0
57.5
Cost to income ratio
(%)
54.0
50.9
Financial
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
07
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Chief Executive’s statement
Why we measure this
Indicator of customer satisfaction with
the Group’s products and services
Non-financial
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
4.7
4.7
4.6
4.6
4.6
Customer Feefo ratings
(Stars)
1
Why we measure this
Indicator of employee engagement and satisfaction
Why we measure this
Indicator of the Group’s impact on the environment
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
82.0
74.0
80.0
85.0
83.0
Employee survey trust index score
(%)
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
3.1
1.5
3.0
2.8
2.0
Environmental intensity indicator
2
1.
Mark out of 5 based on star rating from 1,661 reviews (2023:1,989; 2022: 990; 2021: 937; 2020: 1,466).
2.
Total Scope 1, 2 and certain Scope 3 emissions per £million Group operating income. See page 60 for further details.
Certain key performance indicators represent alternative performance measures that are not defined or specified under International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’).
Definitions of the financial key performance indicators, their calculation and an explanation of the reasons for their use can be found in the Appendix to the Annual Report on pages 176 to 178.
All key performance indicators are presented on a continuing basis, unless otherwise stated.
Further information on discontinued operations are included in Note 10 to the Financial Statements. Further explanation of the financial key performance indicators is discussed in the
narrative of the Financial review on pages 12 to 17. Further explanation of the non-financial key performance indicators is provided in the Managing our business responsibly (pages 42
to 65) and Climate-related financial disclosures (pages 54 to 65) sections.
The Directors’ Remuneration report, starting on page 94, sets out how executive pay is linked to the assessment of key financial and non-financial performance indicators.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
08
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Chief Executive’s statement
During the year, we took the opportunity to showcase our Real
Estate Finance and Commercial Finance businesses at Capital
Markets events held in July and November. Further details
can be found on our website (
www.securetrustbank.com/
presentations
).
Strategic priorities
Our strategic priorities are simplifying the Group, enhancing
customer experience and leveraging our networks, all enabled
by technology. These are the right priorities to Optimise for
Growth, and will enable us to progress towards delivering all
of our medium-term targets.
Simplify
A key initiative of simplification has been Project Fusion, where
we achieved the target of £5 million
1
in annualised savings
at the end of 2024. This was achieved through a sustained
focus on cost discipline and we contained our year-on-year
cost growth at 4.1%. We continued with supplier reviews
to crystallise cost savings, and implemented technology
enhancements. This year, this included migrating the e-signing
of lending agreements to use in-house developed technology
for our Retail Finance business, eliminating the need to use a
third party.
The update in our Project Fusion target, announced at the
half year, to £8 million
1
in annualised savings reflected material
cost savings from organisational redesign. In the first half of
the year, we consolidated our IT and Operations teams under
the Group’s Chief Operating Officer, and in the second half
of the year this was further refined where we amalgamated
product-specific teams under a single management structure.
In addition, there were changes within Finance and the Risk
Function to ensure they are configured to support the business
in the most effective way, this also led to the creation of several
new roles. The organisational changes will drive a simpler
and more cost-efficient structure, remove duplication and
provide clearer career paths and development opportunities.
The changes did result in a redundancy programme, which
resulted in some colleagues leaving the organisation, at a cost
of £1.5 million. I would like to thank all colleagues who have
left the business for their hard work and dedication and wish
them well for the future. Although not an easy decision to
make, these changes position the Group for future success.
The organisational changes work was completed in December
2024, and the £3 million cost savings will be fully realised
in 2025.
Combined, these initiatives give us high confidence in driving
our cost income ratio to our target of 44 to 46% as we achieve
our ambition for net lending of £4 billion. With that in mind,
we are currently undertaking a strategic review of our business
activities and future opportunities to inform the Group’s future
ambition and objectives beyond 2025.
Enhance customer experience
We are pleased to see that our customers are taking advantage
of our digital platforms. During the year, we invested in
enhancing our savings application process by simplifying
the customer journey on our website. This included making
the process a lot more user friendly, and better supporting
customers with accessibility needs.
Over 97.1% of our Savings customers are registered to use
online banking (2023: 95.8%). Since the launch of our Savings
app in 2023, we have seen further uptake of app registrations,
which is now at 30.1% and saw over half of servicing
transactions being submitted on the Savings app for Access
and Notice accounts.
More customers than ever (87.4%) have registered with
our Retail Finance online account management system
(2023: 80.4%). We also re-launched our AppToPay app, which
now offers a mobile-based service platform for all our Retail
Finance products, allowing customers to self-serve and initiate
payments (see below for further details).
We continue to focus on customer outcomes and improving
customer satisfaction, and again we score highly with Feefo,
achieving 4.7 (2023: 4.6) for our Consumer Finance businesses.
In addition, our Retail Finance business was nominated for Best
Consumer Credit Product at the Credit Awards.
Within Business Finance, our Commercial Finance business
was recognised by TheBusinessDesk.com North West
Rainmakers Award, and was nominated for the ‘Asset- based
Lending Team’. In September, the business surpassed this
and won the ABL/Non-Bank Lender of the Year award at the
Midlands Insider Deal Makers Awards, a great achievement.
Internal customer satisfaction reviews showed a 97%
satisfaction score, which is a testament to a business that
is highly reliant on expertise and relationship management
model. In Real Estate Finance, 100% of respondents rated
the service they receive from the team as ‘Excellent’.
Leverage networks
Our relationships with partners, retailers, car dealers,
intermediaries, new business originators and advisers support
our growth.
Our Retail Finance net lending balance of £1.4 billion
(2023: £1.2 billion) was supported by nearly 1,100 retail partners.
2024 saw the business secure longer-term contracts with a
large furniture retailer and a jewellery retailer, and gaining new
retailers in the lifestyle sector. Vehicle Finance saw an increase
of 19.5% in its net lending balance growing from £0.47 billion
to £0.56 billion.
API integration is a key feature in our offering to our consumer
distribution networks. This enables us to work seamlessly
with our partners, creating efficient working practices across
both partner organisations and internally. This has long been
an advantage as part of our Retail Finance offering to retail
partners, integrating at speed.
The power of our relationship model in Real Estate Finance
has seen new lending to existing clients increase from 36% in
2021 to 67% in 2024, with reliance on new lending origination
from brokers declining from 42% to 13% over the same
period. This retention model has the benefit of reduced cost
of customer acquisition and provides greater knowledge of
customers’ risk profiles.
1.
£5.0 million cost savings relative to operating expenses for the 12 months ended December 2021. The additional £3.0 million savings (of the £8.0 million) will be relative to annualised operating expenses for the six months ending 30 June 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
09
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Chief Executive’s statement
Enabled by technology
In October, we rolled-out the enhanced capability of our
modern Vehicle Finance origination and loan management
platform, which is now capable of hosting all new business
across products and risk segments. Importantly, customer
applications submitted by intermediaries will cascade through
our credit tiers and be matched to the most appropriate
product terms, which will enable us to offer loans to more
customers. This represents a significant investment made over
several years allowing us to move forward with technology
designed for the market and allow us to migrate away from
legacy high maintenance systems.
As noted, we re-launched our AppToPay proposition in
December. Initial data shows customers taking advantage
of making payments through open-banking, which is more
convenient for the customer, and more cost-efficient for the
Group. The app provides the initial foundations for providing
customers and retailers opportunities to access our full Retail
Finance product suite.
Regulatory and legal interventions
As highlighted at the end of 2023, we were working on
improving our collections processes, procedures and policies
following the FCA’s review of Borrowers in Financial Difficulty
(‘BiFD’) across the industry. Customers are now being offered
a wider range of forbearance options to support them through
financial difficulties. We have identified that it is appropriate
to pay £2.2 million to customers (of which £2.0 million was
recognised in 2023) where we could have supported them
better due to their individual circumstances. A significant part
of the customer communications have now been distributed,
and we expect to complete activities by the middle of 2025.
This was a delay on our initial timetable, as we took additional
time to ensure the quality and clarity of our correspondence
was appropriate for our customers. We incurred an additional
£1.5 million of costs (treated as exceptional) during 2024,
primarily in relation to managing the programme.
The BiFD review resulted in a larger stock of defaulted
loans within our Vehicle Finance business and increased the
associated loan impairment provision. The stock of defaulted
Vehicle Finance loans has remained elevated throughout
the year, and as noted above, market conditions were not
conducive to deliver on our strategic plans to normalise the
position by year-end. The impairment charges recognised on
the defaulted stock is not a reflection of the underlying quality
of the business being originated. Collections activities returned
to normal as the year progressed and arrears levels have
reduced over the year.
In light of legal and regulatory developments, including the
FCA’s ongoing review of historical discretionary commission
arrangements (‘DCA’) in the motor finance market, and the
Court of Appeal’s judgment which is currently under appeal,
we have recognised costs of £6.9 million (£5.2 million redress,
£1.7 million costs) for both DCA and fixed commission
structures. There are important factual differences between
those cases and how we operated. Further information can
be found in Note 29 to the Financial Statements.
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’)
We have made progress against all our ESG focus areas during
the year and refreshed our strategy to ensure it is reflective of
our ESG aspirations moving forwards.
We were again recognised by UK’s Best Workplaces™ by Great
Place to Work
®
for a number of accolades. This is supported
by colleagues completing employee opinion surveys at the
end of 2023. The Group undertook a survey towards the end
of 2024 and achieved a trust index score of 74% (2023: 83%).
We had anticipated this fall, with the survey being undertaken
during the rollout of our organisational redesign programme,
which led to a period of uncertainty for many colleagues and
a number of roles ultimately being made redundant. However,
the score remained high against similar size organisations,
which is positive considering the wide impact of change.
I appreciate this time has been very challenging for those
impacted as well as those remaining within the organisation.
I would like to extend my personal thanks to colleagues for
their hard work and commitment while we worked through
this period of change.
Fundraising for good causes by
teams taking on the Yorkshire
and Welsh Three Peaks Challenge
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
10
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Chief Executive’s statement
Our colleagues continued to work hard to donate their time
and efforts to support and raise funds for charity across a
number of events, which included a golf day and the Three Peaks
Challenge, raising nearly £100,000 for great causes this year.
As part of our ongoing work on Climate Action, we have
become members of the Partnership for Carbon Accounting
Financials (‘PCAF’). Our membership of PCAF underlines
our ongoing commitment to monitor and manage our
environmental impacts as part of our ESG strategy. We have
enhanced our emission disclosures around Scope 3, which
can be found on pages 60 to 62. We also surpassed our goal
to reduce our Scope 1 and 2 emissions by 50% (from 2021) a
year early. During 2024, initiatives such as reducing our office
footprint have contributed towards this reduction. We continue
to look at internal initiatives to also support the impact we have
on the environment, having launched a new employee benefit,
a green car scheme, that is enabling our colleagues to lease
brand new electric or plug-in hybrid vehicles.
Changes in Executive Committee
During the year, we saw some changes to our Executive
Committee. John Bevan who oversaw the Commercial Finance
business retired at the end of the year. John was with the
Group for over 10 years, establishing the Commercial Finance
business in 2014 and growing it to be a significant player in
the asset-based lending market. Geoff Ray, Managing Director
of the Real Estate Finance business, will retire in April 2025.
Geoff joined the business in its early days and has been an
integral part of its leadership team. Both have played a key role
in developing their teams and growing their franchises with
huge passion for their respective sectors. I would like to thank
them both for the valuable contribution and wish them well in
their retirement.
I would like to welcome Luke Jooste, who joined us on
1 March 2025 from Momenta Finance where he was the Chief
Executive Officer. Luke has been appointed as Managing
Director, Business Finance and will provide a fresh perspective
to both Commercial and Real Estate Finance, and be the
Executive Committee lead in setting the future strategy
for our proposition to business customers.
Outlook
On balance, 2024 ended with a more positive economic
outlook than 2023 with issues such as COVID and the
cost-of-living crisis seeming to be largely behind us.
However, the expected stability and optimism for growth
that was promised from a change in UK government has not
yet materialised. Whilst interest rates have started to slowly
come down following a period of stabilised inflation figures,
concerns over growth in the UK economy and the perceived
adverse impact of the new Chancellor’s Budget on the market,
businesses and consumer confidence. There has also been
additional geopolitical uncertainty due to the change of
legislature in the US.
2024 has been extremely challenging for specialist banks due
to the legal and regulatory developments relating to motor
finance commissions. We are hopeful that the industry will
receive the clarity it needs in 2025, and that we can move
forward with confidence and renewed focus on delivering
against our strategic objectives.
Subject to no adverse changes in the economy and trading
environment, we expect by the end of 2025 we will have clear
line of sight to delivering against our medium-term targets.
With that in mind, we are currently undertaking a Group-wide
review of our business activities. We have made an initial
decision to re-focus the Vehicle Finance business on higher
returning segments. I intend to provide an update on the
outcome of this work in our 2025 Interim Report.
David McCreadie
Chief Executive
12 March 2025
Best Workplaces in
Large Organisations
TM
Best Workplaces in Financial
Services & Insurance
TM
Best Workplaces
for Development
TM
Best Workplaces
for Women
TM
Best Workplaces
for Wellbeing
TM
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
11
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Chief Executive’s statement
“Strong lending performance
driving income growth with costs
kept under control.”
Rachel Lawrence
Chief Financial Officer
Operating
leverage being
delivered
Income statement
2024
£million
2023
£million
Movement
%
Continuing operations
Interest income and similar income
366.0
304.0
20.4
Interest expense and similar charges
(181.1)
(136.5)
32.7
Net interest income
184.9
167.5
10.4
Fee and commission income
19.2
17.3
11.0
Fee and commission expense
(0.2)
(0.1)
100.0
Net fee and commission income
19.0
17.2
10.5
Operating income
203.9
184.7
10.4
Net impairment charge on loans and advances to customers
(61.9)
(43.2)
43.3
Other (losses)/gains
(0.3)
0.3
(200.0)
Fair value and other gains on financial instruments
1.2
0.5
140.0
Operating expenses
(103.8)
(99.7)
4.1
Profit before income tax from continuing operations before exceptional items
39.1
42.6
(8.2)
Exceptional items
(9.9)
(6.5)
52.3
Profit before income tax from continuing operations
29.2
36.1
(19.1)
Income tax expense
(9.5)
(9.7)
(2.1)
Profit for the year from continuing operations
19.7
26.4
(25.4)
Discontinued operations
Loss before income tax from discontinued operations
(2.7)
(100.0)
Income tax credit
0.6
(100.0)
Loss for the year from discontinued operations
(2.1)
(100.0)
Profit for the year
19.7
24.3
(18.9)
Basic earnings per share (pence) – Adjusted
150.1
172.3
(12.9)
Basic earnings per share (pence) – Continuing
103.4
140.8
(26.6)
Basic earnings per share (pence) – Total
103.4
129.6
(20.2)
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
12
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Financial review
Selected key performance
indicators and
performance metrics
2024
%
2023
%
Percentage
point
movement
Net interest margin
5.4
5.4
Net revenue margin
6.0
6.0
Adjusted cost to income ratio
50.9
54.0
(3.1)
Statutory cost to income ratio
55.8
57.5
(1.7)
Cost of risk
1.8
1.4
0.4
Adjusted return on
average equity
8.0
9.6
(1.6)
Total return on average equity
5.5
7.3
(1.8)
Common Equity Tier 1 ratio
12.3
12.7
(0.4)
Total capital ratio
14.6
15.0
(0.4)
Certain key performance indicators and performance
metrics represent alternative performance measures
that are not defined or specified under International
Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’). Definitions of
these alternative performance measures, their calculation
and an explanation of the reasons for their use can be
found in the Appendix to the Annual Report on pages
176 to 178.
All key performance indicators are presented on a
continuing basis, unless otherwise stated. Adjusted profit
before tax refers to profit before income tax from
continuing operations before exceptional items.
Further information on exceptional items are included
on page 14 and discontinued operations are included in
Note 10 to the Financial Statements.
The Directors’ Remuneration report, starting on page 94,
sets out how executive pay is linked to the assessment of
key financial and non-financial performance metrics.
In 2024, we delivered strong lending growth,
particularly within our Consumer Finance
businesses, with net lending growth, of 8.8%
driving income growth of 10.4% at a stable net
interest margin. Cost growth has been actively
managed and contained at 4.1%, but we have
incurred higher impairments within our Vehicle
Finance business due to the operational impacts
of the FCA’s review of Borrowers in Financial
Difficulty (‘BiFD’). The Group achieved an adjusted
profit before tax of £39.1 million (2023: £42.6
million), with the Common Equity Tier 1
(‘CET 1’)
ratio of 12.3%.
Increased impairment charges have reduced profits, resulting
in total Earnings Per Share (‘EPS’) decreasing from 129.6 pence
per share (2023) to 103.4 pence per share. On an adjusted
basis, EPS decreased to 150.1 pence per share (2023: 172.3
pence per share). Total return on average equity decreased
from 7.3% (2023) to 5.5%. On an adjusted basis, return on
average equity decreased to 8.0% (2023: 9.6%).
Detailed disclosures of EPS are shown in Note 11 to the
Financial Statements. The components of the Group’s profit are
analysed in more detail in the following sections.
Operating income
The Group’s operating income increased by 10.4% to
£203.9 million (2023: £184.7 million). Net interest income on the
Group’s lending assets continues to be the largest component
of operating income. This increased by 10.4% to £184.9 million
(2023: £167.5 million), driven by growth in net lending assets,
with average balances increasing by 10.1% to £3,413.9 million
(2023: £3,099.4 million).
The Group’s net interest margin was maintained at 5.4%
(2023: 5.4%) by actively increasing gross yields to reflect
the higher cost of funds.
The Group’s other income, which relates to net fee and
commission income, increased by 10.5% to £19.0 million
(2023: £17.2 million).
Impairment charge
Impairment charges increased to £61.9 million
(2023: £43.2 million) resulting in an increased Group
cost of risk
 
of 1.8% (2023: 1.4%).
Increased expected credit losses in the Vehicle Finance
business have been the principal reason for the increased
impairment charges. Vehicle Finance has experienced
increased levels of customer defaults due to a pause in
collections activities from second half of 2023 as the business
addressed the specific feedback received following the FCA’s
review of BiFD. The credit quality of new lending in the Vehicle
Finance business has improved over time and arrears levels
have reduced over the year.
Impairment charges are lower year on year across all other
lending businesses. Retail Finance has originated a greater mix
of higher-quality loans and also updated to reflect an improved
debt sale arrangement. Both Business Finance businesses have
incurred charges on specific cases but, overall, the portfolios
performed better than 2023.
Overall impairment provisions increased to £111.8 million
(2023: £88.1 million) with a total coverage level of 3.0%
(2023: 2.6%).
During the financial year, the Group refreshed macroeconomic
inputs to its IFRS 9 Expected Credit Loss (‘ECL’) models,
incorporating its external economic adviser’s latest UK
economic outlook. The forecast economic assumptions within
each IFRS 9 scenario, and the weighting applied, are set out
in more detail in Note 16 to the Financial Statements.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
13
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Financial review
1.
£5.0 million cost savings relative to operating expenses for the 12 months ended December 2021. The additional £3.0 million savings will be relative to annualised operating expenses for the six months ending 30 June 2024.
The Group has applied Expert Credit Judgements
(‘ECJ’s’) underlays totalling £5.7 million (2023: £1.2 million
underlay), where management believes the IFRS 9 modelled
output is not accurately reflecting current risks in the loan
portfolios. The majority of the ECJ underlays of £4.5 million
(2023: £2.1 million) relate to the Vehicle Finance lending
portfolios LGD stage 1 and 2 recovery assumptions being
understated in the model; which will be updated in 2025.
Further details of these ECJs are included in Note 16 to the
Financial Statements. During the year, the Group implemented
a new IFRS 9 model for Vehicle Finance prime lending and
an enhanced Probability of Default model for Retail Finance.
These better reflect the underlying credit quality of business
written and has reduced the need for ECJ’s. We have also
updated IFRS 9 Significant Increase in Credit Risk (‘SICR’)
criteria, and implemented a new curing policy for Consumer
Finance, further information can be found in Note 16 to the
Financial Statements.
Fair value and other gains on financial instruments
The Group has highly effective hedge accounting relationships,
and, as a result, recognised a small hedging ineffectiveness
gain of £0.1 million (2023: £0.1 million gain) and £0.6 million
gain (2023: £nil) relating to hedge accounting inception
and amortisation adjustments (See Note 5 to the Financial
Statements). The Group also recognised a gain of £0.5 million
(2023: £0.8 million loss) relating to interest rate swaps being
entered into ahead of hedge accounting becoming available,
which will reverse to the income statement over the remaining
life of the swaps.
During 2023, the Group realised a gain of £1.2 million
on the buy-back of the 2018 Tier 2 debt.
Operating expenses
The Group’s adjusted
cost income ratio improved to 50.9%
(2023: 54.0%) with the cost base increasing by 4.1% to
£103.8 million (2023: £99.7 million). The improved ratio reflects
both the increase in operating income and the ongoing
programme of initiatives that are driving more efficient and
effective operational processes, including digitalisation of
processes, supplier and procurement reviews, organisational
design and property management. As at the end of 2024,
Project Fusion has delivered £5 million of annualised cost
savings¹, and will deliver another £3 million of additional
annualised savings
1
in 2025. Statutory cost income ratio
inclusive of exceptional items was 55.8% (2023: 57.5%).
Taxation
The effective tax rate on continuing activities of 32.5%,
increased compared with 2023 (26.9%) primarily as a
result of non-deductible expenses in exceptional items.
Exceptional items
The Group recognised charges for exceptional items of
£9.9 million during the year (2023: £6.5 million).
Further costs have been recognised in 2024 following the
FCA’s review of BiFD across the industry of £1.5 million
(£1.3 million costs and £0.2 million potential redress/goodwill).
£4.7 million was recognised in 2023 (£2.7 million costs and
£2.0 million potential redress/goodwill).
In light of the FCA’s ongoing review of historical discretionary
commission arrangements (‘DCA’) in the motor finance market,
and the Court of Appeal’s judgment which is currently under
appeal, we have recognised costs of £6.9 million (£5.2 million
redress, £1.7 million costs) for both DCA and fixed commission
structures. Further information can be found in Note 29 to the
Financial Statements.
Following an organisational redesign in 2024, £1.5 million was
incurred for restructuring costs. In 2023, the Group recognised
charges in relation to non-recurring corporate activity of
£1.8 million.
Further details on all Exceptional items are included
in Note 8 to the Financial Statements.
Distributions to shareholders
The Board recommended the payment of a final dividend
for 2024 of 22.5 pence per share, which together with the
interim dividend of 11.3 pence per share, represents a total
dividend for the year of 33.8 pence per share (2023: 32.2
pence per share). This is in line with the Group’s progressive
dividend policy.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
14
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Financial review
Summarised balance sheet
Assets
2024
£million
2023
£million
Cash and Bank of England
reserve account
445.0
351.6
Loans and advances to banks
24.0
53.7
Loans and advances to customers
3,608.5
3,315.3
Fair value adjustment
for portfolio hedged risk
(6.8)
(3.9)
Derivative financial instruments
14.3
25.5
Other assets
31.7
35.8
4,116.7
3,778.0
Liabilities
Due to banks
365.8
402.0
Deposits from customers
3,244.9
2,871.8
Fair value adjustment
for portfolio hedged risk
(3.4)
(1.4)
Derivative financial instruments
10.0
22.0
Tier 2 subordinated liabilities
93.3
93.1
Other liabilities
45.6
46.0
3,756.2
3,433.5
New business
2024 was another positive year for new business with
new lending of £2,331.9 million, up 1.1% year on year
(2023: £2,305.4 million). Consumer Finance, which grew by
11.2% over 2023, offset by lower Business Finance, 24.6%
lower than in 2023 due to more challenging market conditions.
Further details on the divisional split of this new business can
be found in the Business review on pages 18 to 27.
Customer lending and deposits
Group lending assets increased by £293.2 million (8.8%) to
£3,608.5 million (2023: £3,315.3 million), continuing our growth
towards our net lending ambition of £4.0 billion.
Consumer Finance balances grew by £225.7 million or
13.4% driven by strong demand from strategic partner
retailers, supported by Business Finance balances growth of
£67.5 million (4.2%).
Further analysis of loans and advances to customers, including
a breakdown of the arrears profile of the Group’s loan books, is
provided in Note 16 to the Financial Statements.
Customer deposits include Fixed term bonds, ISAs, Notice and
Access accounts. Customer deposits increased by 13.0% to
£3,244.9 million (2023: £2,871.8 million) driven by lending book
growth and as part of the strategy to replace drawings from
the Bank of England Term Funding Scheme with additional
incentives for SMEs (‘TFSME’) funding. Total funding ratio of
112.4% increased slightly from 31 December 2023 (111.7%).
As set out on page 17, the mix of the deposit book has
continued to change as the Group has adapted to the interest
rate environment, with a focus on meeting customer demand
for Access products, and retaining stable funds, which is
reflected in the proportion of Fixed term bonds and ISAs.
Loans and advances to customers
New business volumes
2023: £3,315.3m
£3,608.5m
Vehicle Finance
£558.3
m
Retail Finance
£1,357.8
m
Real Estate Finance £1,341.4
m
£351.0
m
Commercial Finance
2023: £2,305.4m
£2,331.9m
Vehicle Finance
£552.9
m
Retail Finance
£1,289.7
m
Real Estate Finance
£383.5
m
£105.8
m
Commercial Finance
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
15
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Financial review
 
 
Investments and wholesale funding
Amounts due to banks include drawings from the TFSME
facility of £230.0 million, reducing from 2023 (£390.0 million) as
the Group actively prepays this funding. In addition, it includes
£125.0 million drawn from the Indexed Long-Term Repo (‘ILTR’)
facility as at the end of 2024 (2023: £nil), a routine sterling
liquidity management facility provided by the Bank of England.
Tier 2 subordinated liabilities
Tier 2 subordinated liabilities represent £90.0 million of 10.5-
year 13.0% Fixed Rate Callable Subordinated Notes, which
qualify as Tier 2 capital.
Capital
Management of capital
Our capital management policy is focused on optimising
shareholder value over the long term. Capital is allocated
to achieve targeted risk adjusted returns, while ensuring
appropriate surpluses are held above the minimum
regulatory requirements.
Key factors influencing the management of capital include:
• The level of buffers and the capital requirement set by the
Prudential Regulation Authority (‘PRA’);
• Estimated credit losses calculated using IFRS 9 methodology,
and the applicable transitional rules;
• New business volumes; and
• The product mix of new business.
Capital resources
Capital resources increased over the year from £397.6 million to
£415.7 million. This includes the proposed 2024 final dividend
of £4.2 million. The increase was primarily in CET 1 capital and
was driven by total profit for the year of £19.7 million, offset
by the final 2024 dividend of £4.2 million, and the expected
reduction in the IFRS 9 transitional adjustment of £2.0 million.
The remainder of the increase was from Tier 2 (£4.6 million) as
capital eligibility increased through asset growth.
The resultant CET 1 and Total capital ratios are 12.3%
(2023: 12.7%) and 14.6% (2023: 15.0%) respectively.
Capital
2024
£million
2023
£million
CET 1 capital, excluding
IFRS 9 transitional adjustment
351.3
335.8
IFRS 9 transitional adjustment
0.1
2.1
CET 1 capital
351.4
337.9
Tier 2 capital
1
64.3
59.7
Total capital
415.7
397.6
Total risk exposure
2,855.7
2,653.4
Capital ratios
2024
%
2023
%
CET 1 capital ratio
12.3
12.7
Total capital ratio
14.6
15.0
CET 1 capital ratio (excluding IFRS
9 transitional adjustment)
12.3
12.7
Total capital ratio (excluding IFRS 9
transitional adjustment)
14.5
14.9
Leverage ratio
9.5
9.7
1.
Tier 2 capital, which is solely subordinated debt net of unamortised issue costs, capped at
25% of total Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements.
Capital requirements
The Total Capital Requirement, set by the PRA, includes both
the calculated requirement derived using the standardised
approach and the additional capital required, derived from
the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (‘ICAAP’).
In addition, capital is held to cover generic buffers set at a
macroeconomic level by the PRA.
2024
£million
2023
£million
Total Capital Requirement
257.0
238.8
Capital conservation buffer
71.4
66.3
Countercyclical buffer
57.1
53.1
Total
385.5
358.2
The increase in lending balances through the year resulted in
an increase in risk weighted assets over the period, bringing the
total risk exposure up from £2,653.4 million to £2,855.7 million.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
16
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Financial review
 
 
Liquidity
Management of liquidity
The Group uses a number of measures to manage liquidity risk.
These include:
• The Overall Liquidity Adequacy Requirement (‘OLAR’), which
is the Board’s view of the Group’s liquidity needs, as set out in
the Board-approved Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment
Process (‘ILAAP’).
• The Liquidity Coverage Ratio (‘LCR’), which is a regulatory
measure that assesses net 30-day cash outflows as a
proportion of High Quality Liquid Assets (‘HQLA’).
• Total funding ratio, as defined in the Appendix to the
Annual Report.
• ‘HQLA’ are held in the Bank of England Reserve Account
and UK Treasury Bills. For LCR purposes, the HQLA excludes
UK Treasury Bills that are pledged as collateral against the
Group’s TFSME drawings with the Bank of England.
The Group was above the LCR minimum threshold
(100%) throughout the year, with the Group’s average
LCR being 219.6% (2023: 208.0%) based on a rolling 12
month-end average.
Liquid assets
We continued to hold significant surplus liquidity over the
minimum requirements throughout 2024, managing liquidity
by holding HQLA and utilising funding (predominantly from
retail funding) to support lending. Total liquid assets increased
to £469.0 million (2023: £400.3 million) which, amongst other
things, reflects the levels of liquidity at the end of 2024 to
support funding required to fund the pipeline and fixed term
bond maturities.
The Group is a participant in the Bank of England’s Sterling
Money Market Operations under the Sterling Monetary
Framework and has drawn £230.0 million under the TFSME
(2023: £390.0 million) and £125.0 million under the ILTR scheme
(2023: £nil). The ILTR scheme has used collateral already
prepositioned with the Bank of England and was initiated
during the year as part of the strategy to repay TFSME before
the end of its contractual term. Further drawings of ILTR are
planned in 2025 as the remaining balance of TFSME is repaid.
The Group has no liquid asset exposures outside the United
Kingdom and no amounts that are either past due or impaired.
Liquid assets
2024
£million
2023
£million
Aaa–Aa3
445.0
356.4
A1–A2
24.0
43.9
Total
469.0
400.3
We continue to attract customer deposits to support balance
sheet growth. The composition of customer deposits is shown
in the table below:
Customer deposits
2024
%
2023
%
Fixed term bonds
47
54
Notice accounts
2
6
ISAs
26
22
Access accounts
25
18
Total
100
100
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
17
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Financial review
Consumer Finance
Retail Finance
We provide quick and easy finance
options at the point of purchase.
What we do
• We provide a market-leading online e-commerce service
to retailers, providing unsecured, interest-free and
interest-bearing prime lending products to UK customers
to facilitate the purchase of a wide range of consumer
products, including furniture, jewellery, dental, leisure
items and football season tickets. These retailers include
a large number of household names.
• Products are available to purchase in store or online, using
our market-leading origination platform, which provides
fast decision making, with 90% of applications agreed in
an average of six seconds.
• The customer proposition and the integrated platform
support the growth of UK retailers and the real economy.
2024 performance
• Another record year for new lending led to lending
balances increasing by 11.0% with an increase in Retail
Finance’s market share of new business, which grew to
15.3%
1
 (2023: 13.5%).
• In the year, the lag effect of the steep increases in Base Rate
began to reverse, with a stable and now declining Base Rate,
such that margins expanded, resulting in net interest margin
increasing to 6.8% (2023: 6.4%).
• At the end of the year, 86.7% (2023: 86.3%) of the lending
book related to interest-free lending, and 87.4% (2023: 80.4%)
of customers have signed up to online account management
allowing self-service of their account.
Outlook
• Despite a challenging environment for both retailers and
consumers, we still anticipate further lending growth
from both new and existing retail partners, with potential
improvement in net interest margin. Cost of risk will
normalise to 2023 levels.
• Our operational plans now include our recently launched
AppToPay service, which will continue to digitalise our
processes to improve our customer and retail partners’
experience through app-based technology.
1,223.2
1,054.5
764.8
1,357.8
658.4
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Loans and advances to customers
(£m)
1,185.4
1,124.3
771.5
1,289.7
614.5
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
New business
(£m)
6.4
6.8
8.1
6.8
8.7
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Net interest margin
(%)
5.3
5.6
7.8
6.0
6.7
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Risk adjusted margin
(%)
Performance history
Business review
1.
Source: Finance & Leasing Association (‘FLA’): New business values within retail store and online credit: 2024 15.3% (2023: 13.5%): FLA total and Retail Finance new business
of £8,427 million (2023: £8,810 million) and £1,289.7 million (2023: £1,185.4 million) respectively. As published at 31 December 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
18
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Exclusive deal
with Bensons
for Beds
“Our business has grown stronger with
the support of a trusted retail finance
provider. V12 has been attentive to our
needs, offering alternative solutions
and helping us enhance customer
service and profitability. We are excited
about the future and what it holds.”
Steve Adlington
Head of Services at Bensons for Beds
2024 Retail Finance
lending balances
£1.4bn
2023: £1.2 billion
Our partnership with Bensons for Beds
started in 2019 when we became their
exclusive online finance provider.
Sam Beresford, Account Manager, developed a strong
relationship with Bensons, focusing on increasing
sales and enhancing the customer experience.
One significant innovation was allowing customers to
apply for finance from anywhere using a bespoke link
after choosing their bed in-store. This idea was well-
received. By 2024, the trust and respect built over time
enabled Sam and the Retail Finance team to secure
a two-year exclusive deal worth around £160 million.
Today, Bensons thrives with Retail Finance by its side.
Sam says, “At V12 Retail Finance, our standout is
providing systems and service that retailers can trust.
It’s all about collaborating with our partners to drive
business forward. We’re not just there to provide the
tech; the support element is crucial, and we’re with
our retailers every step of the way.”
Market share¹
15.3%
2023: 13.5%
1.
Source: Finance & Leasing Association (‘FLA’): New business values within retail
store and online credit: 2024 15.3% (2023: 13.5%): FLA total and Retail Finance
new business of £8,427 million (2023: £8,810 million) and £1,289.7 million
(2023: £1,185.4 million) respectively. As published at 31 December 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
19
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Business review
Consumer Finance
Vehicle Finance
We provide quick and easy used car
finance options at the point of purchase.
What we do
• We provide consumer lending products that are secured
against the second hand vehicle being financed.
• We also provide a vehicle stock funding product, which is
secured against dealer forecourt used car stock; sourced
from auctions, part exchanges or trade sources.
• Finance is provided via technology platforms, allowing us
to receive applications online from introducers; provide an
automated decision; facilitate document production through
to pay-out to dealer; and manage in-life loan accounts.
2024 performance
• Record new business of £552.9 million, resulted in lending
balances increasing by 19.5%. Our market share of new
business increased to 1.4%
1
(2023: 1.2%).
• Growth has come from higher-quality, lower-margin
consumer products and Stock Funding. Combined this has
reduced net interest margin to 9.4% (2023: 10.3%).
• Stock funding continued to grow despite the contraction of
the overall market with some competitors choosing to exit.
We now have 427 active dealers (2023: 297) with credit lines
of £70.8 million (2023: £51.5 million).
• Cost of risk increased to 7.6% (2023: 3.4%) largely driven
by the pause in consumer collections in the second half
of 2023 in relation to the FCA’s review of Borrowers in
Financial Difficulty.
• We have now completed the final phase of our Motor
Transformation Programme, including the rate for risk
module, and undertaken a pilot with a select number
of introducers. This allows us to price customer lending
based on the risk profile of the borrower.
Outlook
• We have already taken steps in 2025 to refine our strategy
in Vehicle Finance to focus on higher returning segments.
• We plan to complete the transfer of all future consumer
vehicle finance originations onto the new rate for risk
platform by the end of 2025.
467.2
373.1
263.3
558.3
243.9
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Loans and advances to customers
(£m)
471.2
401.7
199.8
552.9
78.6
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
New business
(£m)
10.3
12.0
13.1
9.4
12.8
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Net interest margin
(%)
7.3
6.1
14.0
1.9
5.1
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Risk adjusted margin
(%)
Performance history
Business review
1.
Source: FLA. Cars bought on finance by consumers through the point of sale: New business values: 2024 1.4% (2023: 1.2%): Used cars: 2024, FLA total and Vehicle Finance
total of £21,281 million (2023: £22,082 million) and £294.4 million (2023: £260.0 million) respectively. As published at 31 December 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
20
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
“Our growth has been sizable. We have
gone from a start-up to a significant
player in the used vehicle Stock Funding
sector. This success is a direct result of
our dedication and our dealer partners’
trust in us. We are continually evolving to
meet the changing needs of the market.”
Tim Maffey
Stock Funding Director
Driving 5 years
of success with
Stock Funding
2024 Vehicle Finance
(Consumer and Stock
Funding) lending balances
£0.6bn
2023: £0.5 billion
The growth of Stock Funding over
the past five years is a testament to
our commitment to service.
Since our inception in 2019, we have expanded our
portfolio, introduced products, and forged strong
relationships with a range of dealers across the UK.
This growth has not only solidified our position in the
market but has also allowed us to continuously refine
and enhance our offerings to better serve our partners.
From inception we have partnered with 647 dealers and
provided funding of £692.6 million, which equates to
62,335 vehicles with the target to hit £1 billion funded
by September 2025. We are committed to driving
innovation in Stock Funding solutions, leveraging
technology and industry insights to stay ahead of
market trends. We aim to continue expanding our
reach, supporting more dealers, and encouraging
long-term partnerships that drive mutual success.
Consumer lending
market share¹
1.4%
2023: 1.2%
1.
Source: FLA. Cars bought on finance by consumers through the point of sale:
New business values: 2024 1.4% (2023: 1.2%): Used cars: 2024, FLA total and
Vehicle Finance total of £21,281 million (2023: £22,082 million) and £294.4 million
(2023: £260.0 million) respectively. As published at 31 December 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
21
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Business review
Business Finance
Real Estate Finance
We lend money against residential
properties to professional landlords
and property developers.
What we do
• We provide non-regulated first charge secured lending
to specialist real estate markets, lending to professional
landlords to enable them to improve and grow their
portfolio and provide development facilities to property
developers and SME housebuilders to help build new
homes for sale or letting.
• Due to our specialist relationship-led business model, we
offer through the cycle tailored underwriting and cash flow
led debt structuring.
• Finance opportunities are sourced and supported on a
relationship basis directly and via introducers and brokers.
2024 performance
• Strong levels of new business, particularly in the
Residential Investment sector, built on a strong origination
team and the refinancing of existing loans through strong
customer relationships.
• Lending balances grew by 7.8% to a record high of
£1,341.4 million despite weak economic growth and
a challenging economy for investors and developers.
• The portfolio principally comprises lower risk residential
investment lending, 88.1% (2023: 83.8%). The remainder
of the book relates to development and commercial
investment lending.
• Our market remains competitive, however, net revenue
margin was maintained at 2.6% (2023: 2.6%).
• Impairment charges of £4.0 million (2023: £4.5 million)
remain higher than the historical average, primarily due
to one legacy development case, which is being actively
managed to achieve a timely exit. Despite this, we have
seen a 0.1% improvement in the risk adjusted margin.
• As at year-end, the loan book has an average loan-to-value
of 56.0% (2023: 57.2%).
Outlook
• With the economic outlook for house prices more stable
than in recent years, we see real growth opportunities in
our focused real estate segments supported by the new
UK government’s desire to build more homes.
1,243.8
1,115.5
1,109.6
1,341.4
1,051.9
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Loans and advances to customers
(£m)
434.0
384.5
376.1
383.5
189.5
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
New business
(£m)
2.6
2.7
3.0
2.6
3.0
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Net revenue margin
(%)
2.2
2.6
3.0
2.3
2.5
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Risk adjusted margin
(%)
Performance history
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
22
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Business review
Contemporary
Essex
apartments
refinanced
“Harlow Flats is the latest addition
to a thriving area, and we are proud
to provide stunning accommodation
to its newest residents. Having
previously worked with Secure Trust
Bank we were confident that, even
with its complex nature, the deal
was in the right hands.”
Raj Shah
Prisma Property Developments
2024 Real Estate
Finance loans and
advances to customers
£1.3bn
2023: £1.2 billion
Real Estate Finance provided a £6.6 million
five-year residential investment loan to
refinance two contemporary apartment
blocks in West Essex.
Developed by Prisma Property Developments,
comprising 47 units in the Mayflower and Bluebell
House blocks of Harlow Flats. The collection of one and
two-bedroom apartments featured fully-fitted kitchens,
integrated appliances, spacious bathrooms and
ensuites, and a private terrace or balcony.
Harlow ranks among the top five commuter towns
for London. The flats are located under one mile
from Harlow Town train station, allowing residents
to reach the capital in half an hour.
Average
loan-to-value
56.0%
2023: 57.2%
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
23
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Business review
Business Finance
Commercial Finance
We support the growth of UK businesses
by enabling effective cash flow.
What we do
• We offer a full suite of asset-based lending solutions to
SMEs and some larger corporates who need bespoke
working capital solutions for their business.
• We operate a high-touch relationship-led model throughout
the life of a facility, where partners and clients have direct
access to decision-makers.
• Our lending remains predominantly against receivables,
releasing funds of up to 90% of qualifying invoices under
invoice discounting facilities.
• Business is sourced and supported directly from clients via
private equity houses and professional introducers, but is
not reliant on the broker market.
2024 performance
• New business lending has been lower in 2024 due to limited
M&A activity in our target markets, and our unwillingness to
transact on riskier deal structures at low margins.
• Whilst year-end balances were 7.9% lower in 2024, average
lending balances were 1.2% higher year-on-year.
• The increase in net revenue margin was driven by fees
charged for new facilities, extensions and early terminations.
• The risk adjusted margin has increased to 5.9%, reflecting
the higher fees, but it included a higher cost of risk at
1.7% (2023: 2.3%) after a £5.6 million charge relating to a
specific client.
Outlook
• Economic and market conditions still remain challenging
for our clients, but we remain committed to supporting their
growth and success, and we look forward to partnering with
new businesses in 2025 as market conditions improve.
381.1
376.4
313.3
351.0
230.7
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Loans and advances to customers
(£m)
214.8
157.3
93.7
105.8
126.1
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
New business
(£m)
7.0
6.4
5.7
7.6
5.5
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Net revenue margin
(%)
4.7
6.2
5.8
5.9
5.0
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Risk adjusted margin
(%)
Performance history
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
24
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Business review
UK’s oldest
commercial
vineyard secures
facility 
“In helping to ensure our growth
remained sustainable, the Secure
Trust Bank team worked closely
with us to really understand our
business, and what we were looking
to achieve over the coming years.”
Joe Jeffers
Finance & Operations Director of Hambledon Vineyard
2024 Commercial Finance 
lending balances
£0.4bn
2023: £0.4 billion
Commercial Finance provided a £10 million
facility to support Hambledon Vineyard in its
next stage of growth. The Hampshire-based
English Sparkling Wine producer is the UK’s
oldest commercial vineyard.
As the wine tourism sector continues to flourish,
Hambledon Vineyard had ambitious plans to increase
its market share, primarily through its newly opened
restaurant and visitor centre, along with UK distribution
channels and international markets. To consolidate
its growth, the business needed additional working
capital to maintain its level of production. The facility
received from Commercial Finance has enhanced the
investment into the winery and in its people.
Total facilities available
to clients
£0.6bn
2023: £0.7 billion
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
25
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Business review
£3,244.9m
ISA
£857.3m
£72.4m
£805.2m
£1,510.0m
Notice
Access
Term
2024
Savings
We look after our customers’ savings
and provide a competitive return.
1,719.1
1,210.1
661.3
1,604.2
535.9
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Total funds raised
(£m)
2,871.8
2,514.6
2,103.2
3,244.9
1,992.5
2024
2021
2020
2022
2023
Total deposits
(£m)
ISA
£629.6
m
£174.3
m
£521.3
m
£1,546.6
m
Notice
Access
Term
2023
£2,871.8m
Performance history
What we do
• We offer a range of savings accounts that are purposely
simple in design, with a choice of products from Access to
180-day notice, and six month to seven-year fixed terms
across both Bonds and ISAs.
• Our range of savings products enables us to access the
majority of the UK personal savings markets and compete
for significant liquidity pools, achieving a lower marginal
cost with the volume, mix and the competitive rates offered;
optimised to the demand of our funding needs.
2024 performance
• In 2024, we successfully funded the growth in the lending
businesses, and are now managing deposits of £3.2 billion,
a 13.0% increase on year-end 2023 (£2.9 billion). We have
raised over £1.6 billion of new deposits and retained
£0.9 billion at maturity.
• The Bank of England Base Rate remained at 5.25% for the
first half of 2024, with two 0.25% reductions in the second
half in line with market forecasts. Further rate reductions
are expected in 2025, these are priced into market rates
for savings.
• We have seen significant growth in both Access and ISAs,
both proving a popular customer choice. Notice products
have continued to be a less popular choice in a high
interest environment.
• Savings balances are made up of retail customers. 95.1%
of total deposits are fully covered by Financial Services
Compensation Scheme (‘FSCS’) providing our customers
with additional confidence about the security of their savings.
• We continue to invest in the customer’s digital journey, as
shown on the opposite page.
Outlook
• The savings market has started to see product pricing
adjustments in anticipation of a falling interest rate
environment. Customers will seek to optimise returns, and
we have a product set designed to meet these needs.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
26
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Business review
Digital-first
approach for
savings
“Easy to use online platform with
prompt and clear communication.”
Customer feedback
Feefo, Savings Customer
2024
Customer deposits
£3.2bn
2023: £2.9 billion
Customers have continued to adopt a more
digital-first approach, with 97.1% registered
for internet banking, of which, 30.1% are
also registered for the mobile app.
To support this we continue to invest more in
technology to enhance the customer journey for our
customers, particularly for self-service capability.
This has included enhancements to streamline the
online journey, making it easier for new customers to
apply for our Savings Accounts and better supporting
customers with accessibility needs.
In addition, functionality has been added, including
single name account customers, can transfer money
between their accounts via internet banking and
single name Fixed term bond and ISA maturities have
been automated removing manual intervention from
operational teams for straightforward transactions.
Retail deposits
covered by FSCS
95.1%
2023: 95.6%
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
27
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Business review
The Group operates exclusively within the UK and its revenue
is derived almost entirely from customers operating in the UK.
The Group is therefore particularly exposed to the condition of
the UK economy. Customers’ borrowing demands are variously
influenced by, among other things, UK property markets,
employment levels, inflation, interest rates and customer
confidence. The economic environment and outlook affect
demand for the Group’s products, margins that can be earned
on lending assets and the levels of loan impairment provisions.
As a financial services firm, the Group is subject to extensive
and comprehensive regulation by governmental and regulatory
bodies in the UK. The Group conducts its business subject to
ongoing regulation by the Financial Conduct Authority (‘FCA’)
and the Prudential Regulation Authority (‘PRA’). The Group
must comply with the regulatory regime across many aspects
of its activities, including: the training, authorisation and
supervision of personnel; systems; processes; product design;
customer journey; and documentation.
Economic review
Economic growth, measured in real annual UK Gross Domestic
Product (‘GDP’), was estimated to be 0.9% in 2024 (2023: 0.4%).
Economists’ base case forecasts indicate GDP growth will
increase in 2025, with full-year growth in GDP expected to
be 1.4%. However, there is some scepticism that the new
UK government’s first Budget will have the desired effects of
boosting growth, and that household savings are less available
to be deployed to boost consumer spending. This has led
to downward revisions in more recent UK GDP forecasts, in
contrast to global growth forecasts, which have improved
partly due to the expected loosening of US fiscal policy
under President Trump.
The rate of inflation fell sharply in 2024 and was largely back to
the Bank of England target of 2% by June 2024, but there was
a small increase to 2.5% by the end of the year and a further
increase to 3.0% in January 2025. Reflecting the 2024 fall in
inflation, the Bank of England reduced the Base Rate from
5.25% to 5.00% in August 2024 and from 5.00% to 4.75% in
November 2024. A further decrease to 4.50% was announced in
February 2025. Financial markets have responded to the Bank
of England reducing rates and the expectation that inflation
has largely stabilised by pricing in further Base Rate reductions
through 2025, albeit at a relatively cautious level.
Employment levels in December 2024 were 74.9%
1
which
represents a small decrease during the period from 75.0%
1
in December 2023. In line with this fall, unemployment has
risen from 3.9%
1
in December 2023 to 4.4%
1
at December
2024. Vacancies in the labour market were circa 0.8 million
and have been decreasing for two and a half years.
Although unemployment levels have risen during the period,
wage growth remained strong, at 5.9%
1
and remains ahead of
inflation. The latest forecasts suggest that unemployment has
peaked, and will remain near its current level throughout 2025.
UK house prices grew by 4.6%
2
in 2024 and the risk of a
large correction in prices has reduced. The uncertainty over
the timing and quantum of Base Rate cuts has given rise to
some mortgage rate volatility in the year, albeit the overall
position is one of lower rates being available than in recent
years. Net mortgage borrowing showed 1.5%
3
annual growth
in December 2024, with mortgage approvals up significantly
year on year.
Outlook
Interest rates are expected to fall further in 2025 with the
market expecting Base Rate to end the year below 4.00%.
The UK economy is expected to grow in 2025 by less than
1%
3
per the Bank of England’s latest forecast down from
its previous forecast of 1.5%. House prices are expected to
continue to grow as mortgage rates soften and borrower
affordability improves. Unemployment is expected to remain
near its current level of 4.4%
1
for 2025. The longer-term
expectation is that unemployment will recover towards a
long run level of 4.0% by 2028.
Government and regulatory
This has been another eventful year for government and
regulatory announcements that impact the Group and/or the
markets in which it operates. The key announcements in 2024
are set out below.
Prudential regulation
During March 2024, the PRA issued PS5/24 ‘Solvent exit
planning for non-systemic banks and building societies’. This is
intended to provide an alternative to resolution and creates a
new requirement for non-systemic banks to perform a Solvent
Exit Analysis to develop an understanding of how firms would
exit from PRA-regulated activities, while remaining solvent,
the main barriers and risks faced in doing so, and how they
would make timely and effective decisions during the process.
The Group has commenced work on the Solvent Exit Analysis
ahead of the implementation date of 1 October 2025.
1.
Source: Office for National Statistics, data as at 31 December 2024, unless otherwise stated.
2. Source: HM Land Registry.
3. Bank of England.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
28
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Market review
Basel 3.1 changes remain the core focus of regulatory change
for the Group alongside the Small Domestic Deposit Takers
(‘SDDT’) regime. Slightly later than anticipated due to the
general election, in September 2024, the PRA issued PS9/24
‘Implementation of the Basel 3.1 Standards near-final part 2’
and four consultation papers relevant to the topic. The policy
statement set out the awaited changes to Credit Risk, Pillar
3 disclosures and consequential reporting changes, which
completed the framework when considering PS17/23, issued
in December 2023.
The simplified capital regime proposal for SDDT firms was set
out in CP7/24. The highlights from these proposals included
the removal of Pillar 1 requirements for counterparty credit
risk and credit valuation adjustment risk, simplified Pillar 2A
approaches to credit risk, credit concentration risk, operational
risk, the removal of some methodologies and proposed
replacement of Pillar 2B capital buffers with a new non-cyclical
Single Capital Buffer (‘SCB’). In addition, it also proposed
reduced reporting, including changes to the Internal Capital
Adequacy Assessment Process (‘ICAAP’).
The Group undertook an initial impact analysis of the
combined PS9/24 and PS17/23 amendments, also
considering the proposals set out in CP7/24 to understand
the impact under SDDT. The Group expects the impact to
be broadly neutral overall.
In the second half of 2024, the Group received confirmation
of its successful application to join the SDDT regime. PS17/23
confirmed that firms, that are part of the SDDT regime, do
not need to adopt full Basel 3.1 rules and can remain on the
interim rules equivalent to the current UK Capital Requirements
Regulation regime until the capital rules applicable to the
SDDT regime are applicable.
In November 2024, the PRA issued PS19/24 ‘Strong and simple
framework: The definition of an Interim Capital Regime’, which
set out the process firms should follow to apply to adopt the
Interim Capital Regime (‘ICR’). The ICR was expected to apply
from 1 January 2026 with the expected SDDT implementation
date being 1 January 2027. However, on 18 February 2025, the
PRA announced a delay to Basel 3.1 implementation by one
year to 1 January 2027. As a consequence we expect a delay in
the implementation date for SDDT. The Group has applied for
a Modification by Consent waiver to apply the ICR.
Conduct regulation
Throughout 2024, FCA publications focused on
Consumer Duty, including the findings from their review of
implementation, which highlighted good practice and areas of
improvement. Dear CEO letters and speeches have reiterated
the focus on ensuring firms prioritise areas where there is the
greatest risk of consumer harm, setting and testing higher
standards, and promoting competition and positive change.
The application of the Duty to closed products came into
force on 31 July 2024 with limited impact to the Group.
In January 2024, the FCA introduced temporary changes to
the rules for handling motor finance complaints. This was to
allow time for its review of historical discretionary commission
arrangements (‘DCAs’), information requests for which were
sent to motor finance firms in the period. On 25 October 2024,
the Court of Appeal issued its decision on three motor finance
commission cases.
The lenders involved have been granted permission to appeal
the judgment to the Supreme Court, the hearing for which
will take place in April 2025. The FCA will update firms on its
next steps after the Supreme Court decision. The pause in
complaints responses was extended to 4 December 2025 for all
motor finance commission complaints. The FCA also issued a
Dear CEO letter directing firms to maintain adequate financial
resources, with a view to the implications for firms of any
potential remedial activities arising from DCAs. Further details
on the impact of these developments can be found in Note 29
to the Financial Statements.
In April 2024, the FCA published two policy statements.
One on protections for Borrowers in Financial Difficulty,
incorporating aspects of the Tailored Support Guidance into
the FCA’s sourcebooks with effect from November 2024; the
requirements for this have been addressed through an internal
project. The other bringing Consumer Credit product sales
data reporting into force in Q4 2025. This will be the focus of
an internal project during 2025.
Government and monetary policy
The Bank of England MPC announced two rate reductions over
2024, 0.25% rate cuts in August and November 2024, reducing
UK Bank Base Rate to 4.75% as at 31 December 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
29
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Market review
Risk management
The effective management of risk is a key part of the Group’s
strategy and is underpinned by its Risk Aware value. This helps
to protect the Group’s customers and generate sustainable
returns for shareholders. The Group is focused on maintaining
sufficient levels of capital, liquidity, operational control, and
acting in a responsible way.
The Group’s Chief Risk Officer is responsible for leading the
Group’s Risk function, which is independent from the Group’s
operational and commercial teams. The Risk function is
responsible for designing and overseeing the embedding
of appropriate risk management frameworks, processes
and controls, to enable key risks to be identified, assessed,
monitored, and accepted or mitigated in line with the Group’s
risk appetite. The Group’s risk management practices are
regularly reviewed and enhanced to reflect changes in its
operating environment. The Chief Risk Officer is responsible
for reporting to the Board on the Group’s principal risks and
how they are being managed against agreed risk appetite.
Risk appetite
The Group has identified the risk drivers and major risk
categories relevant to the business, which has enabled it
to agree a suite of risk appetite statements and metrics to
underpin the strategy of the Group. The Board approves
the Group’s risk appetite statements annually and these
define the level and type of risk that the Group is prepared
to accept in the pursuit of its strategic objectives.
Risk culture
A strong risk-aware culture is integral to the successful delivery
of the Group’s strategy and the effective management of risk.
The Group’s risk culture is shaped by a range of factors
including risk appetite, risk frameworks and policies, values
and behaviours, as well as a clear tone from the top.
The Group looks to enhance continually its risk culture, and
performs an annual assessment against standards based
on industry best practice and guidance from the Institute
of Risk Management.
Risk governance
The Group’s approach to managing risk is defined within its
Enterprise-Wide Risk Management Framework. This provides
a clear risk taxonomy and an overarching framework for risk
management supported by frameworks and policies for
individual risk disciplines. These frameworks set the standards
for risk identification, assessment, mitigation, monitoring
and reporting.
The Group’s risk management frameworks, policies and
procedures are regularly reviewed and updated to reflect the
evolving risks that the Group faces in its business activities.
They support decision making across the Group and are
designed to ensure that risks are appropriately managed
and reported via appropriate committees.
An Executive Risk Committee, chaired by the Chief Risk
Officer, reviews key risk management information from
across all risk disciplines, with material issues escalated to
the Executive Committee and/or the Risk Committee of the
Board, as required.
The Group operates a ‘Three Lines of Defence’ model for the
management of its risks. The Three Lines of Defence, when
taken together, control and manage risks in line with the
Group’s risk appetite. The three lines are:
• First line: all employees within the business units and
associated support functions, including Operations, Finance,
Treasury, Human Resources and Legal. The first line has
ownership of, and primary responsibility, for their risks.
• Second line: specialist risk management and compliance
teams reporting directly into the Chief Risk Officer, covering
Credit risk, Operational risk, Information Security, Prudential
risk, Compliance and Conduct risk, and Financial Crime risk.
The second line are responsible for developing frameworks
to assist the first line in the management of their risks and
providing oversight and challenge designed to ensure they
are managed within appetite.
• Third line: is the Internal Audit function that provides
independent assurance on the effectiveness of risk
management across the Group.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
30
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Principal risks
Executive management performs ongoing monitoring
and assessment of the principal risks facing the Group,
including those that would threaten its business model,
future performance, solvency or liquidity.
Further details of the principal risks and the changes to risk
profile seen during the 2024 financial year are set out on the
following pages.
The Group also regularly reviews strategic and emerging
risks and analysis has been included to detail output of these
reviews for 2024. Notes 37 to 40 to the Financial Statements
provide further analysis of credit, liquidity, market and capital
risks. Emerging risks are identified in line with the Group’s
Enterprise-Wide Risk Management Framework, using a
‘top-down’ approach with Group Executive workshops and
a ‘bottom-up’ approach through the business unit Risk and
Control Self-Assessment process.
Further details of the Group’s risk management framework,
including risk appetite, can be found on the Group’s website:
www.securetrustbank.com/riskmanagement
.
Board and Board Committees
See Corporate Governance section on pages 68 to 111.
Group Executive Committee
Chair: Chief Executive Officer
Provides an executive oversight of the ongoing safe and profitable operation of the Group.
It reports to the Board through the Chief Executive Officer.
Responsible for the execution of the strategy of the Group at the direction of the Chief Executive Officer.
Executive Risk Committee
Chair: Chief Risk Officer
Responsible for overseeing the Group’s risk profile,
its adherence to regulatory compliance and monitoring
these against the risk appetite set by the Board.
Monitors the effective implementation of the risk
management framework across the Group.
Assets and Liabilities Committee (‘ALCO’)
Chair: Chief Financial Officer
Responsible for implementing and controlling the liquidity,
and asset and liability management risk appetite of the
Group, providing high-level control over the Group’s
balance sheet and associated risks.
Set out controls, capital deployment, treasury strategy
guidelines and limits, and focuses on the effects of future
plans and strategy on the Group’s assets and liabilities.
Credit Risk
Committees
Responsible for making
decisions and providing oversight of
credit scorecards and modelling.
Non-Financial Risk
Committee
Responsible for providing oversight
of all non-financial risks, including,
Financial Crime, Operational,
Conduct and Compliance, Climate
Change, Information Security, IT and
Change risk.
Model Governance
Committee
Responsible for understanding,
challenging and assessing risk
and appropriateness of statistical
and financial models, and to
challenge model assumptions,
and to provide oversight of
model validation.
Assumptions
Committee
Responsible for approving
assumptions that have a material
impact on the Group’s reporting
and/or decision-making processes.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
31
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Description
Mitigation
Change during the year
Credit risk
The risk of loss to the Group from
the failure of clients, customers or
counterparties to honour fully their
obligations to the firm, including
the whole and timely payment
of principal, interest, collateral
or other receivables.
Progress:
Stable
The Group has a defined Credit risk framework, which sets out
how Credit risk is managed and mitigated across the Group.
Risk appetite is cautious with the Group focusing on sectors and
products where it has deep experience.
Specialist Credit teams are in place within each business area to enable
new lending to be originated in line with the Group’s risk appetite.
For Business Finance, lending is secured against assets, with Real Estate
Finance lending, the majority of which is at fixed rates, secured by
property at conservative loan-to-value ratios. Short dated Commercial
Finance lending is secured across a range of assets, including debtors,
stock, and plant and machinery.
For Consumer Finance, security is taken for Vehicle Finance lending
and Retail Finance is unsecured, however, positioned towards lower
risk sectors. The vast majority of Retail Finance lending is interest-free
for consumers, with remaining consumer lending at fixed rates, which
mitigates the direct impact of rising interest rates on affordability.
Consumer Credit risk is assessed through a combination of risk
scorecards, credit and affordability policy rules.
Portfolio performance is tracked closely and reported via specialist
management review meetings into the Executive and Board Risk
Committees, with the ability to make changes to policy, affordability
assessments or scorecards on a dynamic basis.
Management monitors and assesses concentration risk for all lending
against control limits. The diversification of lending activities and
secured nature of larger exposures mitigates the exposure of the
Group to concentration risk.
During 2024, economic conditions continued to be challenging in the UK, with high
levels of inflation and cost-of-living pressures for consumers. The lower Base Rate
environment in the second half of 2024 has, however, had a positive impact upon
the property market.
The Group’s lending portfolios performed satisfactorily in 2024. Vehicle Finance saw
increased levels of arrears at the beginning of 2024 following changes to collections
procedures and the introduction of new forbearance options in the latter part of
2023. Performance has improved over 2024 from a new business perspective with
lower delinquency rates being observed, as well as at a portfolio level with roll and
cure rates improving during the year. Retail Finance saw a small increase in arrears,
following a relaxation of strategy but remains well within risk appetite.
The Real Estate Finance and Commercial Finance businesses are performing
satisfactorily, with key risk metrics remaining within appetite. Some customers have
been impacted by higher inflation and lower consumer demand; however, they
have been managed closely with low levels of customer defaults resulting.
Real Estate Finance at a portfolio level is performing well, with continued strong
rental demand supporting valuations across the portfolio. Only a small number
of cases are in active workout, and where appropriate, specific provisions have
been taken to cover the risk of loss from these exposures. The Real Estate Finance
provisions have increased through the year, however, this is mainly due to existing
defaulted balances being held for longer than anticipated, leading to increased
non-recovery of interest.
Similarly, the Commercial Finance business is performing well at a portfolio level.
There has been one write-off taken at the end of 2024, attributable to a historic
case that was impacted by loss of consumer demand and withdrawal of trade
credit insurance. However, in general within 2024, we have seen lower levels of
attrition due to client failure, compared to 2023. The overall rating for the year
is driven by the continuing uncertainty in the external economic environment.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
32
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Description
Mitigation
Change during the year
Liquidity and
Funding risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the
Group is unable to meet its
liquidity obligations as they fall
due or can only do so at excessive
cost. Funding risk is the risk that the
Group is unable to raise or maintain
funds to support asset growth, or
the risk arising from an unstable
funding profile that could result
in higher funding costs.
Progress:
Stable
Liquidity and Funding risk is managed in line with the Group’s Prudential
Risk Management Framework. The Group has a defined set of liquidity
and funding risk appetite measures that are monitored and reported,
as appropriate.
The Group manages its liquidity and funding in line with internal and
regulatory requirements, and at least annually assesses its exposure
to liquidity risks and adequacy of its liquidity resources as part of the
Group’s Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process.
In line with the Prudential Regulation Authority’s (‘PRA’) self-sufficiency
rule, the Group always seeks to maintain liquid resources that are
adequate, both as to amount and quality, and managed to ensure that
there is no significant risk that its liabilities cannot be met as they fall due
under stressed conditions. The Group defines liquidity adequacy as the:
• ongoing ability to accommodate the refinancing of liabilities upon
maturity and other means of deposit withdrawal at acceptable cost;
• ability to fund asset growth; and
• otherwise, capacity to meet contractual obligations through
unconstrained access to funding at reasonable market rates.
The Group conducts regular and comprehensive liquidity stress testing to
identify sources of potential liquidity strain and to check that the Group’s
liquidity position remains within the Board’s risk appetite and prudential
regulatory requirements.
Contingency funding plans
The Group maintains a Recovery Plan that sets out how the Group would
maintain sufficient liquidity to remain viable during a severe liquidity stress
event. The Group also maintains access to the Bank of England liquidity
schemes, including the Discount Window Facility.
The Group received regulatory permission to move to the Small Domestic Deposit
Takers (‘SDDT’) regime during 2024, the simplified liquidity rules became effective
from 1 July 2024.
The Group has maintained its liquidity and funding ratios in excess of regulatory
and internal risk appetite requirements throughout the year. A significant level
of high-quality liquid assets, held as cash at the Bank of England, continue to be
maintained so that there is no material risk that liabilities cannot be met as they
fall due.
The Group has reviewed funding requirements ahead of the upcoming Term
Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (‘TFSME’) maturities in
2025 to manage the associated refinancing risk and increased competition for
retail funding, and during 2024 has repaid £160.0 million of TFSME earlier than
the contractual maturity.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
33
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Description
Mitigation
Change during the year
Capital risk
Capital risk is the risk that the
Group will have insufficient capital
resources to meet minimum
regulatory requirements and to
support planned levels of growth.
The Group adopts a conservative
approach to managing its capital.
It annually assesses the adequacy
of the amount and quality of capital
held under stress as part of the
Group’s Internal Capital Adequacy
Assessment Process (‘ICAAP’).
Progress:
Stable
Capital management is defined as the operational and governance
processes by which capital requirements are identified and capital
resources maintained and allocated, such that regulatory requirements
are met, while optimising returns and supporting sustainable growth.
The Group manages its capital requirements on a forward-looking basis
against minimum regulatory requirements and the Board’s risk appetite
set to enable capital resources to be sufficient to support planned levels
of growth. The Group will take opportunities to increase overall levels
of capital and to optimise its capital stack as and when appropriate.
In addition to the ICAAP, the Group performs regular budgeting and
reforecasting exercises that consider a five-year time horizon.
These forecasts are used to plan for future lending growth at a rate
that both increases year-on-year profits and maintains a healthy capital
surplus, taking into consideration the impact of known and anticipated
future regulatory changes. The Group also models various stressed
scenarios looking over a five-year time horizon, which consider a range
of growth rates over those years as part of the viability and going
concern assessments.
Further information on the Group’s capital requirement is contained
within the Pillar 3 disclosures, which are published as a separate
document on our website (
www.securetrustbank.com/pillar3
).
The Group’s balance sheet and total risk exposure has increased since the
beginning of the year as the Group continues to grow its core businesses
organically. Despite the growth in its balance sheet, the Group has continued to
maintain adequate capital, and all capital ratio measures have been exceeded
throughout the period. Details of the Common Equity Tier 1 ratio, total capital
ratio and leverage ratio are included in the Financial review on page 16.
The 2024 ICAAP showed that the Group can continue to meet its minimum
regulatory capital requirements, even under extreme stress scenarios. Additionally,
the Group has assessed the capital impact of severe but plausible outcomes in
relation to potential redress payments related to historical motor commissions (see
page 40 for further information) against our 2024 ICAAP and Recovery Plan and
are satisfied the Group could maintain capital adequacy in such a scenario.
The Group has assessed the high-level impact of the proposed Basel 3.1 rules and
the PRA Interim Capital Regime, and has taken this into consideration as part of
the capital planning.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
34
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Description
Mitigation
Change during the year
Market risk
Market risk is the risk to the
Group’s earnings and/or value from
unfavourable market movements,
such as interest rates and foreign
exchange rates. The Group’s
market risk primarily arises from
interest rate risk. Interest rate
risk refers to the exposure of the
Group’s financial position, balance
sheet and earnings to movements
in interest rates.
The Group’s balance sheet is
predominantly denominated in
GBP, although a small number of
transactions are completed in US
Dollars, euros and other currencies
in support of Commercial
Finance customers.
Progress:
Stable
The Group’s principal exposure comes from the term structure of interest
rate sensitive items and the sensitivity of the Group’s current and future
earnings and economic value to movements in market interest rates.
The Group does not take significant unmatched positions through the
application of hedging strategies and does not operate a trading book.
The main contributors to interest rate risk are:
• the mismatch, or duration, between repricing dates of assets and
liabilities; and
• customer optionality, for example, early repayment of loans in advance
of contractual maturity dates.
The Group uses an interest rate sensitivity gap analysis that informs
the Group of any significant mismatched interest rate risk positions
that require hedging. This takes into consideration the behavioural
assumptions for optionality as approved by ALCO. Risk positions are
managed through the structural matching of assets and liabilities with
similar tenors and the use of vanilla interest rate derivative instruments
to hedge the residual unmatched position and minimise the Group’s
exposure to interest rate risk.
The Group has a defined set of market risk appetite measures that are
monitored monthly. Interest rate risk in the banking book is measured
from an internal management and regulatory perspective, taking into
consideration both an economic value and earnings-based approach.
The Group monitors its exposure to basis risk and any residual non-GBP
positions. Processes are in place to review and react to movements of the
Bank of England Base Rate.
The Group has no significant exposures to foreign currencies and hedges
any residual currency risks to sterling.
All such exposures are maintained within the risk appetite set by the
Board and are monitored by ALCO.
Despite changes in the Bank of England Base Rate during 2024, and continued
uncertainty over interest rate movements, interest rate risk and foreign exchange
risk remain well managed. Risk exposures are actively managed through
increased frequency of monitoring and in 2024, the Group has successfully
implemented central clearing to support increased derivative activity.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
35
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Description
Mitigation
Change during the year
Operational risk
Operational risk is the risk that
the Group may be exposed to
direct or indirect loss arising
from inadequate or failed
internal processes, personnel
and succession, technology/
infrastructure, or from
external factors.
The scope of Operational risk
is broad and includes business
process, operational resilience,
third party risk, Change
management, Human Resources,
Information Security and IT risk,
including Cyber risk.
Progress:
Stable
The Group has an Operational Risk Framework designed in accordance
with the ‘Principles for the Sound Management of Operational Risk’
issued by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision. This framework
defines and facilitates a range of activities, including:
• a Risk and Control Self-Assessment process to identify, assess and
mitigate risks across all business units through improvements to the
control environment;
• the governance arrangements for managing and reporting these risks;
• risk appetite statements and associated thresholds and metrics; and
• an incident management process that defines how incidents should
be managed and associated remediation, reporting and root-
cause analysis.
The framework is designed to ensure appropriate governance is in place
to provide adequate and effective oversight of the Group’s operational
risks. The governance framework includes the Non-Financial Risk,
Executive Risk and Board Risk Committees.
The Group has a defined set of qualitative and quantitative Operational
risk appetite measures. These measures cover all categories of
operational risk and are reported and monitored monthly.
In addition to the delivery of framework requirements, the Group has
focused on various thematic areas of operational risk in 2024, including
operational resilience where the Group is on track to meet the March
2025 regulatory deadline, and the integration of Artificial Intelligence (‘AI’)
risk into existing Risk Frameworks and Policies.
The Group uses the ‘Standardised Approach’ for assessing its operational risk
capital, in recognition of the enhancements made to its framework and embedding
it across the Group. The Group continues to invest in resource, expertise and
systems to support the effective management of operational risk. In 2024, the
Group has continued to enhance these standards and has introduced several
improvements to the control frameworks in place across its operational risks.
Overall, the assessment is that the level of risk has remained stable.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
36
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Description
Mitigation
Change during the year
Model risk
Model risk is the potential for
adverse consequences from model
errors or the inappropriate use
of modelled outputs to inform
business decisions.
The Group has multiple models
that are used, amongst other
things, to support pricing, strategic
planning, budgeting, forecasting,
regulatory reporting, credit risk
management and provisioning.
Progress:
Stable
Whilst the Group is not within the scope of the PRA’s Supervisory
Statement 1/23, it has aligned its model risk management practices to
this standard and has a model risk management framework, defined risk
appetite, a model Governance Committee, policies, procedures, model
development standards and model validation in place.
The Group has made progress in formally implementing stronger Model
Governance in 2024 and strengthening the scope, awareness and reporting of
its model inventory. The Group has clarified roles and responsibilities for model
owners and has produced internal independent validation reports for a number
of higher risk models.
Description
Mitigation
Change during the year
Compliance and
Conduct risk
The risk that the Group’s products
and services, and the way they are
delivered, or the Group’s failure
to be compliant with all relevant
regulatory requirements, result
in poor outcomes for customers
or markets in which we operate,
or cause harm to the Group.
This could be as a direct result of
poor or inappropriate execution of
our business activities or behaviour
from our employees.
Progress:
Heightened
The Group manages this risk through its Compliance and Conduct Risk
Management Framework. The Group takes a principle-based approach,
which includes retail and commercial customers in our definition of
‘customer’, with coverage across all business units and both regulated
and unregulated activities.
Risk management activities follow the Enterprise-Wide Risk Management
Framework, through identifying, assessing and managing risks,
governance arrangements and reporting risks against Group risk
appetite. Arrangements include horizon-scanning of regulatory changes,
oversight of regulatory incidents and assurance activities conducted
by the three lines of defence, including the second line Compliance
Monitoring programme.
The Group’s horizon-scanning activities track industry and regulatory
developments, including the implementation of the Basel 3.1 standards
and the SDDT regime, Consumer Credit product sales data reporting
and regulation of Buy Now Pay Later.
The overall rating for the year is driven predominantly by the developments
regarding historical motor finance commissions.
Following the Court of Appeal’s rulings in October, the Group paused new
consumer lending in Vehicle Finance to consider the implications of the ruling
and commenced new business after three days with enhanced disclosures in
place about commission arrangements between the Group and its Vehicle Finance
introducers. The Group is continuing to track developments in order to respond
when the implications for the industry become clearer.
Other Compliance and Conduct risk areas of focus during the year related
to the Group’s review of its collections processes, procedures and policies
in Vehicle Finance, following its formal discussions with the FCA on its BiFD
review. The Group is in the final stages of this review.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
37
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Description
Mitigation
Change during the year
Financial Crime risk
The risk that the Group’s products
and services will be used to
facilitate financial crime, resulting
in harm to its customers, the
Group or third parties, and the
Group fails to protect them by
not having effective systems and
controls. Financial Crime includes
anti-money laundering, terrorist
financing, proliferation financing,
sanctions restrictions, modern
slavery, human trafficking, fraud,
the failure to prevent fraud and
the facilitation of tax evasion.
The Group may incur significant
remediation costs to rectify issues,
reimburse losses incurred by
customers and address regulatory
censure and penalties.
Progress:
Stable
We operate in a constantly developing financial crime environment and
are exposed to financial crime risks of varying degrees across all areas
of the Group. The Group is focused on maintaining effective systems
and controls, alongside vigilance against all forms of financial crime and
meeting our regulatory obligations.
The Group has a Financial Crime Framework designed to meet regulatory
and legislative obligations, which includes:
• mandatory annual colleague training and awareness initiatives;
• regular reviews of our suite of financial crime policies, standards and
procedures, checking they remain up to date and addressing any
legislative/regulatory change and emerging risks;
• detection, transaction monitoring and screening technologies;
• extensive recruitment policy to screen potential and
existing employees;
• horizon-scanning and regular management information production
and analysis conducted to identify emerging threats, trends and
typologies, as well as preparing for new legislation and regulation;
• financial crime-focused governance with risk committees providing
senior management oversight, challenge and risk escalation; and
• intelligence shared through participating in key industry events such
as those hosted by UK Finance and other networks.
Enhancements to the Group’s financial crime control environment have continued
with a focus on Authorised Push Payment Reimbursement policy requirements.
We are closely monitoring changes to financial crime regulation and guidance,
and responding to them.
Description
Mitigation
Change during the year
Climate Change risk
Climate change, and society’s
response to it, present risks to the
UK financial services sector, with
some of these only fully crystallising
over an extended period.
The Group is exposed to physical
and transition risks arising from
climate change.
Progress:
Stable
The Group has established processes to monitor our risk exposure
to both the potential ‘physical’ impacts of climate change and the
‘transitional’ risks from the UK’s adjustment towards a carbon neutral
economy. The Group approach to climate risk is proportionate to its scale
and nature of its activities. This has enabled the Group to align both its
business and climate objectives. Climate change and its management are
a key part of the Group’s Environmental, Social and Governance strategy.
The Group continues to undertake stress testing aligned to climate
change scenarios, individually, across each of our key businesses.
The tests are focused on the resilience of our portfolios and strategies,
to manage the risks and opportunities of climate change. Further detail
is provided within the Climate-related financial disclosures section of the
Annual Report and Accounts (see pages 54 to 65).
The Group’s direct exposure to the physical impacts of climate change remains
limited, given its footprint and areas of operation. However, it has maintained
robust controls and oversight, designed to manage the associated risks and
continues to develop its business plans, as the risks mature. Disclosures are
made within the Climate-related financial disclosures section of the Annual Report
and Accounts in line with the guidance from the ‘Task Force on Climate-Related
Financial Disclosures’, where we are now fully aligned.
Specific detail on each of the key risks identified and mitigation are covered
within the Strategy section on page 56. The Group continues to monitor
the evolving climate disclosure landscape and regulatory requirements and
expectations, including transition planning.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
38
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Strategic and emerging risks
The key strategic risk for the Group remains the macroeconomic environment in the UK. The Group’s operational footprint, lending exposures and funding sources are all in the UK, therefore,
overall performance is influenced by the strength and performance of the UK economy. Given the specialist nature of the Group’s lending, it is not exposed across all areas and sectors of the
UK economy, however, key areas such as consumer confidence and affordability, levels of economic activity and house prices will impact on levels of demand for the Group’s products and
services. As well as performance of its credit portfolios and achievable returns.
Whilst inflation pressures reduced significantly in 2024, this did not allow for material reductions in the Bank of England Base Rate, which remains high by recent standards. Whilst these issues
have not presented at a portfolio level given the prudent approach taken by the Group towards credit risk, these factors are tracked closely through ongoing portfolio monitoring and required
changes in lending parameters are undertaken on a proactive basis.
The Group monitors the look forward strategic risk via regular analysis of forecast economic data as part of its review of impairment assumptions and in its annual ICAAP and ILAAP processes.
In addition to direct economic factors, the Group is also exposed to the general operating environment in the UK for a regulated business.
The Group is tracking closely the potential legal and regulatory risk associated with the Court of Appeal rulings and Supreme Court appeal about the three historical motor commissions cases
(see Note 29 to the Financial Statements). The Group is awaiting the outcome of the Supreme Court appeal and other legal developments, and the FCA’s motor finance review to establish
whether and how its historical Vehicle Finance lending will be impacted.
In addition to these specific industry events, the Group is also tracking the various consultation papers relating to regulatory change and engaging with industry bodies to provide input into
proposed changes, as well as tracking potential impact.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
39
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Principal risks and uncertainties
Going concern
In assessing the Group as a going concern, the Directors
considered the factors likely to affect its future performance and
development, recent regulatory announcements, the Group’s
financial position and the principal risks and uncertainties
facing the Group, as set out in the Strategic Report. The Group
uses various short and medium-term forecasts to monitor
future capital and liquidity requirements, and these include
stress-testing business planning assumptions to identify the
headroom on regulatory compliance measures. The details
of the forecasts and stress tests are explained in the Business
viability section below.
Accordingly, the Directors conclude that the Company and
the Group have adequate resources to continue in operational
existence for a period of at least 12 months from the date of
the approval of the Financial Statements and, therefore, it is
appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in
preparing the accounts.
Business viability
In accordance with provision 31 of the UK Corporate
Governance Code, the Directors have a reasonable expectation
that the Company and the Group will be able to continue in
operation and meet their liabilities as they fall due, for the
period up to 31 December 2029. As the Group’s financial
planning horizon is five years, the Group considers a five-year
period for its viability assessment.
The Directors are confident of the Group’s viability over the
longer term after considering all of the principal risks affecting
the Group, including the following factors.
• The Group has delivered solid trading profits and sound
capital management in 2024 and the 2025 annual budget
process indicates long-term growth potential.
• Decrease in tail-risks from the cost-of-living crisis that resulted
from a prolonged period of high inflation and high interest
rates coupled with a lag on wage growth.
• Our deposit base is made up of retail customers and 95.1%
of total deposits are fully covered by the Financial Services
Compensation Scheme (‘FSCS’).
• Our stress testing indicates the Group’s ability to manage
its capital and liquidity requirements through the regulator’s
prescribed financial stresses.
• Capital stress testing is conducting after assessing the
drivers of credit risk in the business, specifically the impact
of adverse changes in economic variables that impacts
the Group’s IFRS 9 Expected Credit Loss (‘ECL’) models:
unemployment, CPI, and HPI. The Group also considers
specific business model risks that could lead to unexpected
credit and operational losses.
• The Group has maintained capital levels in excess of
its internal risk appetites and regulatory requirements
throughout the year and is forecast to continue to do so over
the five-year planning horizon.
• The Group has considered the potential impacts on
provisioning for customer redress and associated costs for a
severe but plausible and worst case outcome for future FCA
actions following the October 2024 Court of Appeal ruling
and April 2025 Supreme Court appeal on historical motor
finance commissions.
• In the area of climate change, the Board recognises the
long-term risks and launched its Environmental, Social
and Governance strategy in 2023. Risks associated with
climate change are considered as part of the annual ICAAP.
Material impacts of climate change on the Group’s markets
and business model will emerge over the longer-term
horizon and beyond the period of viability assessment.
Notwithstanding this, the Group is mindful of the need
to adapt its business model to changes in the markets it
operates in as a result of climate change.
Furthermore, the Board considers that the circumstances
required to cause the Group to fail, as demonstrated by its
stress testing procedures, are sufficiently remote.
The Directors have based their assessment on the results of the
following activities.
• The latest annual budget process, which contains information
on the expected financial and capital positions and
performance of the Group over the 2025 to 2029 period.
• The Group monitors its key performance indicators across
profit, capital, liquidity, and different risk categories to
mitigate any changes in risk outside of its risk appetite.
• In addition to the annual budget process, key sensitivities are
measured through other forecasting activity undertaken over
the course of the year, which would impact on capital and
liquidity over the planning horizon.
• The Group’s ILAAP, approved by the Board in June 2024,
provides assurance that the Group can maintain liquidity
resources that are adequate, both as to amount and quality,
to ensure that there is no significant risk that its liabilities
cannot be met as they fall due. This risk was tested under the
financial stresses outlined on the following page. The Group
has maintained liquidity levels in excess of its liquidity risk
appetite and regulatory requirements throughout the
year, and is forecast to continue to do so over the ILAAP
planning horizon.
• The Group’s ICAAP, which considered the PRA’s published
macroeconomic stress and severe scenarios in order to
assess the adequacy of capital resources over the 2024
to 2028 period, was approved in August 2024. Within this
process, the Group considered the extent of the credit,
operational and market risks it is exposed to, and how
such risks affect its required capital levels. Under the
macroeconomic stress, the details of which are set out on the
following page, at no point were minimum regulatory capital
requirements breached, and capital buffers held at the start
of the stress were confirmed to be adequate.
• The level of provisions recognised for expected potential
redress and costs related to legal and regulatory
developments about historical motor finance commission
payments is based on probability weighting multiple
outcome scenarios (See Note 29 to the Financial Statements).
For the going concern and viability assessment the Group
has considered how the loss provision could change under a
severe but plausible and worst case outcome after applying
increased probability to adverse scenarios including: scope
of redress, customer journey; claims rates and the FCA
position on customer harm caused.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
40
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Viability and going concern
• The latest Group Recovery Plan was approved in October
2024 and confirmed that the Group has sufficient recovery
options available to recover from the severe combined
idiosyncratic and macroeconomic stress scenario modelled
over the 2024 to 2028 period. The primary recovery options
are to reduce the level of new lending, and thus slow down
the rate of growth, and raise new deposits.
• Consideration of the other principal risks, as set out on
pages 30 to 39, identify any other severe, but plausible
scenarios that could threaten the Group’s business model,
future performance, solvency or liquidity.
A summary of the different financial stresses are set out below:
ILAAP
The Group’s 2024 ILAAP included idiosyncratic, market-wide
and combined stress scenarios.
The idiosyncratic liquidity stress test assumed an operational
incident within the deposits operations team leads to adverse
media coverage across financial websites, newspapers and on
TV. This leads to a short-term loss in customer confidence and
makes it materially more challenging to retain maturing term
bonds, higher notice being served and customers withdrawing
Access deposits.
The market-wide stress is based upon the UK economy
entering a severe recession with rising unemployment and
inflation, falling house and equity prices, subdued wage
growth and a contraction in GDP, due to prolonged economic
uncertainty. Higher customer default rates (in line with the
Macro ICAAP stress) and the regulators decision to allow
consumer customers to take payment holidays results in lower
payment inflows. Completions on consumer contracts fall,
while requests for refinancing from business customers also
contracts in line with reduced economic activity. The combined
stress includes elements of the idiosyncratic and market
stresses, whereby the UK economy enters a severe recession,
and the Group suffers outflows due to poor customer services
at the same time.
A combined stress includes elements of the idiosyncratic and
market stresses, whereby the UK economy enters a severe
recession, and the Group suffers operational issues in the
deposits function at the same time.
In addition, the ILAAP includes sensitivity analysis to model the
impact of adverse variances in stress assumptions used in each
of these scenarios.
Reverse stress test modelling was also performed to identify the
type and severity of a stress required for the Group to no longer
be able to meet its liquidity requirements. Three scenarios
were assessed to consider the impact of: 1) an extreme retail
deposits stress leading to higher attrition and inability to raise
new deposits; 2) a significant reduction in lending inflows at the
same time as a full utilisation of Commercial Finance facilities;
and 3) the impact of Retail Finance loans becoming ineligible
for use in supporting Bank of England drawdowns.
ICAAP
The Group’s ICAAP considered a combined PRA-published
macroeconomic stress and severe idiosyncratic losses to assess
the adequacy of capital resources over the 2024 to 2028 period.
The macroeconomic stress included an unemployment peak
of 8.5% in Q2 2025, a 31.0% property price decline by mid-
2026, and an economic recovery beginning in 2026. However,
unemployment and house prices were not assumed to return
to pre-stress levels before the end of the five-year scenario.
At no point under the stress were the Group’s minimum capital
requirements not met, and capital buffers held at the start of
the stress were confirmed to be adequate.
Reverse stress test modelling was also performed to assess
the level of stress required for the Group to no longer be able
to meet its capital requirements. This required a significantly
more severe scenario, including peak unemployment of
12.0%, a sharper decline in house prices to 48.3% and multiple
concurrent idiosyncratic loss events occurring at the start of
the scenario.
The ICAAP also used scenario modelling for elements of
the Group’s Pillar 2A capital assessment to support the
assessment of operational risk and credit risk.
Recovery Plan
The latest Group’s Recovery Plan confirmed that the Group has
sufficient recovery options available to recover from the severe
stress scenarios modelled over the 2024 to 2028 period.
The combined capital stress test included peak
unemployment of 12.0%, a 48.3% decline in property prices
and an increase in operational losses based on the ICAAP
Pillar 2A scenario modelling.
The idiosyncratic liquidity stress test assumed a loss of
confidence in the Group, resulting in a run on the bank with
a rapid loss of Access and ISA deposits and significantly
increased Notice account outflows. In addition, it was
assumed that there would be a significant increase in requests
to withdraw funds from fixed term bonds prior to the original
maturity date. At the same time, to reflect a layering of
liquidity risks, lending outflows were increased due to higher
levels of pipeline completion.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
41
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Viability and going concern
Stakeholders and why we engage with them
Their priorities
How we engage
Outcomes
Customers
Our customers are the individuals and
businesses we provide finance products to.
Our purpose is to help our customers achieve
their ambitions, through our range of savings
products and loan facilities.
We engage with our customers to help us
understand their needs and to enable us
to develop products to meet these needs.
We also engage to seek feedback on the
service we provide and look continually
to improve.
Our customers want to borrow or save money
at competitive rates and under fair terms.
They want high levels of customer service and
to be able to access their accounts through
a variety of channels that suit their needs.
We engage with our customers through
a variety of channels; our contact centres;
relationship managers; our sales teams; online
services; and through our business partners.
The Board has appointed Finlay Williamson an
independent Non-Executive Director, as the
Consumer Duty Champion. He provides regular
updates to the Board on our customers and
the services we provide to them. He helps to
ensure that the retail customer voice is heard
in the boardroom and that their interests are
considered in our decision making.
• Feefo customer trust score of 4.7.
• Trustpilot scores of 4.6.
• Following the launch of a pilot scheme for our
Retail Finance AppToPay app last year, we
listened to the feedback from customers and
launched a revised version of the app this year,
to help our customers service their accounts in
an easy way.
Shareholders and investors
Our shareholders are the individuals and
businesses that own/invest in the Company
and provide the capital required to help
achieve our strategic objectives.
We engage to understand their views
on the Group’s strategy, performance,
management and governance.
Our shareholders want to receive returns on
their investment through dividends, capital
returns and capital appreciation. They want
a long-term sustainable business that has
strong governance and risk management.
Our Executive Directors, Chair and investor
relations team primarily undertake engagement
and run investor engagement programmes
after the release of our full-year and interim
results. The Chair of our Remuneration
Committee engages with shareholders
following the annual remuneration round.
All of our Directors are available to meet
with shareholders on request and attend the
Annual General Meeting, which provides
a valued opportunity to engage with our
smaller shareholders.
This year, our newly appointed Chair met with
major shareholders as part of his induction
programme and we undertook two capital
market day presentations focusing on our
Real Estate Finance and Commercial Finance
businesses. We also ran an independent
shareholder perceptions study.
• In 2024, we agreed a new more sustainable
dividend policy, which has enabled us to
continue our growth strategy. The first
dividend under the new policy was paid in
September 2024.
• Following feedback from our shareholders we
have enhanced our segmental reporting to
provide shareholders with greater information
on each of our business units.
Managing our business responsibly
Engaging with our stakeholders
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
42
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Engaging with our stakeholders
Stakeholders and why we engage with them
Their priorities
How we engage
Outcomes
Employees
Our people are key to our success and help us
deliver the service our customers expect.
We engage with them to understand their
views and priorities to help us retain, develop,
motivate and recruit high-performing people
who are aligned with our culture.
Our people want to work in a supportive,
diverse and inclusive environment.
They want opportunities for career and personal
development, and a competitive remuneration
and benefits package. They want to work for an
organisation that has strong ESG practices and
delivers value to stakeholders.
We have an employee council, which is chaired
by Paul Myers, an independent Non-Executive
Director and the designated Director for
workforce engagement. The Council comprises
nominated representatives from key business
areas and discusses employee views on a
wide range of subjects. Paul Myers provides
feedback at the Board meetings following
Council meetings.
We have held regular employee townhalls
with updates on the Company’s strategy,
performance and ESG initiatives. We have
strong internal communications centred
around Hive (our intranet) and Viva engage and
our Chief Executive Officer (‘CEO’) regularly
provides business updates.
The Board reviews the results of our
employee engagement surveys and has
oversight of action plans to address items
raised. Our People team lead engagement
with employees and provide updates to the
Board. The Chair visited several of our offices
during the year and met with people across
the business.
• Successfully retained our Great Place to
Work
®
 (‘GPTW
®
’) accreditation.
• Achieved an overall employee trust index
score of 74%.
• Low rates of attrition with a voluntary
turnover rate of 13%.
• Employees participated in 4,592 hours
of training across the Group.
Business partners
Our business partners includes our suppliers,
who support our operational infrastructure, and
the brokers, retailers, introducers and dealers
we have relationships with, who help distribute
our products.
We engage with them to ensure that we
maintain effective working relationships, their
services help support our delivery to clients
and our activities are carried out in compliance
with requirements.
Our business partners want to develop
beneficial and effective long-term business
relationships. They want us to offer a product
range that meets their clients’ requirements
including effective servicing of their accounts.
They want prompt and fair payment for
services provided and to receive feedback
to understand how they can improve their
services and processes.
Engagement with our business partners is
primarily undertaken by our management,
client teams, and individual business units
or functions. For our suppliers we also have
a dedicated procurement team who set the
framework for managing the relationships.
The Board receives regular updates from
all business units and our Chief Operating
Officer who is also responsible for the Group’s
procurement team and any matters that
require escalation are done so through the
governance framework.
• 33.2 average creditor payment days.
• An assessment of 611 suppliers within
the Group’s supply chain was undertaken
in 2024, identifying nine that presented
a higher risk of modern slavery and
human trafficking. These suppliers were
required to provide additional assurance
of the programmes they have in place to
address their risks. The assurance received
highlighted no concerns.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
43
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Stakeholders and why we engage with them
Their priorities
How we engage
Outcomes
Regulators
Regulators are responsible for supervising
their respective financial markets, including
the entities and people working within
them. They have an interest in ensuring we
treat customers fairly, act with integrity and
transparency, and comply with requirements.
We engage with regulators to keep them
updated on our business and also engage
with regulators and policy makers to
help develop and understand changing
regulatory requirements.
To protect the interests of customers and the
operation and stability of the financial markets
that they regulate. In order to achieve this, they
are interested in our practices and processes to
protect our customers, the level of capital we
hold, our governance and control frameworks
and the performance of our business.
Our senior management, compliance and
finance teams are the primary point of contact
with our regulators. They hold meetings with
the regulators to keep them updated on
developments within our business. In addition,
we make regulatory applications, notifications
and filings in-line with requirements.
Our senior managers and Directors provide
feedback to the Board on our engagement
with regulators. The Risk Committee receives
updates from the Compliance team at
each meeting, which includes details of all
communications with our regulators and a
‘horizon scanning’ report, which identifies
legal and regulatory changes relevant to
our business.
• Continued compliance and enhancements
to the Group’s processes in relation to the
Consumer Duty requirements.
• Engagement with the regulator on legal
and regulatory developments in relation to
historical motor commissions.
• Common Equity Tier 1 (‘CET 1’) of 12.3%.
• Commenced the redress programme under
the Financial Conduct Authority’s Borrowers
in Financial Difficulty review.
Communities and society
We believe we have a responsibility to make a
wider contribution to society, which we primarily
achieve through our Environmental, Social and
Governance (‘ESG’) strategy.
We engage with our charitable partners to
understand their priorities and how we can
help them. We also engage with our business
partners to help drive enhancements in their
ESG practices (for instance, modern slavery
and carbon emissions).
The Communities in which we operate and
wider society cares about the impact we
have, both in minimising our impact to the
environment and having a positive impact to
society. This includes our plans to enhance the
impact we have to achieve better outcomes
for all stakeholders and to support diversity,
equity and inclusion across the industry.
We have an established Charity Committee,
which leads charitable activities across the
Group and the engagement with our charitable
partners, including through our volunteering
partnership scheme. We engage with all
other stakeholder groups on our ESG strategy
and priorities in order to understand their
views. Our website provides information to
all stakeholders and provides updates on our
ESG initiatives.
• Reduced our Scope 1 and 2 CO
2
equivalent
emissions by 22.8% against last year and
achieved our target of 50% reduction in Scope
1 and Scope 2 emissions by 2025, a year early
in 2024 (since 2021). Please see page 46 for
further information.
• £99,800 of charitable funds raised in 2024.
• 281 volunteer days donated by
our employees.
• The Board reviewed and challenged the
Group’s Modern Slavery Policy and Statement
which outline the steps taken by the Group to
prevent modern slavery and human trafficking
in its operations.
Section 172 Directors’ duty
The Directors have continued to discharge their duties in accordance with section 172 of the Companies Act, which includes the need to consider the interests of the Company’s wider
stakeholders. Details of how the Directors have fulfilled their duties can be found throughout the Strategic and Governance Reports with further information on how the Directors have
considered stakeholder interests in key decisions during the year on page 77.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
44
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Engaging with our stakeholders
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
e
s
a
n
d
C
h
a
r
i
e
s
C
l
i
m
a
t
e
A
c
o
n
/
R
i
s
k
C
u
s
t
o
m
e
r
T
r
u
s
t
What is our ESG strategy?
As a regulated bank, we put strong emphasis on ensuring
we are aligned to the external standards relevant to our
organisation, but our ESG strategy goes beyond this.
It commits us to prioritise the ESG focus areas material to our
organisation and stakeholders, and so is key to the delivery of
our business strategy and our ability to achieve success.
We have a process in place for regular senior oversight
and discussion of our ESG activities, their progress and any
potential risks to progress. In 2024, as part of this process,
we reviewed the ESG strategy launched at the start of 2023
resulting in some enhancements, which are effective from
the start of 2025, and are reflected in the ESG summary
graphic shown above and the strategy overview chart on
the following page.
What progress has been made against
our ESG strategy and priorities?
During 2024, we continued to make good progress across each
of our focus areas. This is reflected by the positive responses
of above 80% across all ESG-related questions in our annual
employee opinion survey.
In June, a series of ESG calibration meetings were held
focusing on our ESG focus areas, which fed into a senior
level discussion about how we ensure our ESG aspirations
remain as tightly aligned as possible to our business purpose
and strategy. The outcome covered anticipated disclosure
requirements about climate change and artificial intelligence,
but also an evolved approach within our ‘Communities and
Charities’ and ‘Education and Skills’ focus areas.
During 2024, we have made the ESG disclosures that we
committed to and largely met the targets that we set for the
period. Although the deadline for achieving the Group’s
published target of reducing Scope 1 and 2 CO
2
equivalent
(CO
2
e) emissions by 50% is not until the end of 2025 (since
2021), our published data shows that we have achieved this
target a year early, with further initiatives planned for 2025.
We published progress against the Women in Finance Charter
targets set at the start of 2024 in January 2025. This shows that
during 2024 we exceeded targets set for female representation
on our Executive Committee (33%), female participation in
leadership programmes (52%), flexible working requests
accepted (95%) and female participation in mentoring
programmes as mentees (54%). We also improved female
representation in senior management (grade seven and above,
excluding Executive Committee members) by 2% to 24%,
Our priorities
Environmental
Social
Governance
Sustainable Development Goals
Climate Action/Risk
Customer Trust
Equity, Diversity and Inclusion (‘ED&I’)
Education and Skills
Communities and Charities
Acting responsibly
Delivering value for all stakeholders
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
45
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy
Stakeholders
ESG priorities
Measures/disclosures
Progress
Governance
Environmental
Climate Action/Risk
• Regulators
• Business partners
• Shareholders
and investors
• Communities and society
We aim to understand the risks to our business
associated with climate change so that we
can maintain a strong credit discipline, capital
allocation and risk management capabilities
that support our specialised lending. We also
aim to minimise the harmful impact of our
business on the environment by reducing
Scopes 1 and 2 CO
2
e emissions from our
operations, understand better Scope 3
emissions associated with our lending activities,
and to use less and re-use more.
• Report annually on our operational energy use and carbon
emissions in line with Streamlined Energy and Carbon
Reporting (‘SECR’) regulations.
• Scope 1 and 2 CO
2
e emissions from our operations reduced
by 50% from 31 December 2021 to 31 December 2025.
• Climate-related disclosures (and climate risk scenarios)
under the Task Force for Climate-related Financial Disclosures
(‘TCFD’) and Companies Act requirements and related PRA
regulations/Listing Rules.
• Starting with the year beginning 1 January 2025 we are working
to be ready to publish a Transition plan following the Transition
Plan Taskforce Disclosure Framework and, when applicable,
related mandatory requirements.
Page 48
New
for 2025
Always
acting with
integrity and
transparency
to deliver
value for
all our
stakeholders
Social
Customer Trust
• Customers
• Employees
• Regulators
• Business partners
• Shareholders
and investors
Our aim is to build the trust of our customers
through the way we treat them, by enhancing
our customers’ experience, achieving high
standards of customer service excellence and
through the outcomes we enable for them.
• Feefo Trusted Awards.
• External awards for our products and services, HM
Government Cyber Essentials Plus certification.
Page 49
demonstrating progress towards our end of 2025 30% target.
Although our employee engagement survey scores were
negatively impacted by the reorganisation implemented at the
end of 2024, they remain reassuringly high. For example, our
Trust Index at 74% and the proportion of colleagues who say
the Group is a great place to work (71%) remain well above the
average for UK companies surveyed in the most recent GPTW
®
population study.
Our ESG progress is supported by a range of partnerships
developed with organisations who have relevant expertise and
we will build on this further as we continue our ESG journey.
Who owns our ESG strategy?
Ultimate ownership and oversight of our ESG strategy is
with the Board, as it supports the business strategy set by it.
The Board delegates the implementation of our ESG strategy
to the CEO and through him to the Executive Committee.
What is the governance that supports
our ESG strategy?
The Executive Committee is supported by the Executive Risk
Committee and working groups or committees for each of our
five focus issues identified under the Environmental and Social
part of our ESG strategy. These report progress to the senior
team on a regular basis.
More broadly, we require our people to act with integrity
and provide them with the necessary training and resources
to conduct themselves with due skill, care and diligence.
For example, we have a suite of policies to support the
conduct of our employees including, our Conflicts of Interest
and Conduct Risk policies. This is facilitated by a suite of
policies, which promote the good conduct of our employees,
and support our ESG principles, including our Anti-Harassment
and Bullying, Menopause, Wellbeing and Family Friendly
Policies. See page 66 for details on some of the Group’s
other policies, including our ED&I policy.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
46
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy
Stakeholders
ESG priorities
Measures/disclosures
Progress
Governance
Social
Equity, Diversity
and Inclusion (‘ED&I’)
• Customers
• Employees
• Regulators
• Business partners
• Shareholders
and investors
• Communities and society
Our vision is to be a successful, inclusive
business where all our people feel respected
and can confidently be themselves and
fulfil their potential. We aim to develop a
positive and healthy working environment
where colleagues have the opportunities and
resources to support their own wellbeing,
and which contributes to a culture where
people feel able to be their authentic selves.
We will strive to support all the protected
characteristics and improve our gender and
ethnic diversity.
• Maintaining inclusion on the GPTW
®
UK Best Workplace
TM
listings for Women and Wellbeing (large companies).
• Signatory to the HM Treasury Women in Finance Charter.
We have pledged to set and publicly report against gender
diversity targets annually.
• Annually reporting on our Gender Pay Gap.
• Maintaining/improving our Employer Network for Equality
and Inclusion (‘ENEI’) TIDE Mark.
• Maintaining our Disability Confident accreditation.
Page 50
Always
acting with
integrity and
transparency
to deliver
value for
all our
stakeholders
Social
Education and Skills
• Customers
• Employees
• Regulators
• Business partners
• Shareholders
and investors
Through our Learning and People
Development activities we aim to help all our
colleagues build their specialisations, increase
their confidence, plan their career progression
and make it happen. We are a specialist lender,
so these activities enhance our specialisations,
support our differentiation from others and
enable us to have market expertise and deep
customer knowledge.
• Maintaining inclusion on the GPTW
®
UK Best Workplace
listings for Development
TM
(large companies).
Page 52
Social
Communities and Charities
• Customers
• Employees
• Regulators
• Business partners
• Shareholders
and investors
• Communities and society
We aim to make a positive contribution to the
communities in which we work and conduct
our business. We aim to build and maintain
strong links with these communities through
support of local community initiatives and
fundraising activities, prioritised by colleagues’
preferences.
• Our bi-annual report of our supplier payment period in days.
• Our annual modern slavery statement setting out the steps we
take to eradicate modern slavery in our own businesses and
supply chains.
• Total annual fundraising for charities by colleagues and
matched by Secure Trust Bank £4£.
• Provide an annual update on community volunteering
and local initiatives.
Page 53
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
47
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy
2024 progress
Looking ahead
Climate
Action/Risk
We aim to support the government’s ambitions in terms of tackling climate change by minimising the harmful impact of our
business on the environment as well as protecting our business from climate-related risks and we have made good progress
in 2024.
• The Group committed to a 50% reduction in its own Scope 1 and 2 CO
2
e emissions by December 2025 (since 2021) and
this target was met at the end of 2024. Details of how this was achieved are included on page 62.
• We offer our employees an opportunity to participate in our ‘green car’ leasing scheme, which has the potential to
reduce Scope 3 emissions. This has been supported by a doubling of electric vehicle charging points at our head office.
• We joined the Partnership for Carbon Accounting Financials (‘PCAF’), which supported us in enhancing our Scope 3
emissions reporting capabilities, in particular the disclosure of financed emissions. Details can be found on page 61.
• We developed our own internal reporting and assurance model to give confidence to stakeholders and observers of
our progress, working in consultation with PCAF. We have updated the Executive Committee and our Board about the
Group’s alignment with the TCFD required disclosures.
• Further information on the Group’s climate change strategy, risk management, and metrics and targets, including our
CO
2
e emissions, and work undertaken during 2024 can be found within our Climate-related financial disclosures section
on pages 54 to 65.
The key focuses in 2025 will be:
• working towards the expected Transition
plan disclosure requirements anticipated
from 2026;
• embedding the Scope 3 emissions
reporting processes;
• embedding business unit climate strategies
developed in 2024; and
• implementing our energy savings plan
developed during 2024 and reducing our
office footprint where practicable.
In support of our CO
2
e emissions reduction
target, we invested in energy-saving solar panels
at our head office in Solihull in 2024, following
the successful installation of solar panels in the
Cardiff office in 2023.
By generating our own power, we save around 19 tonnes
of CO
2
annually, equivalent to planting 1,140 trees.
Around 94 MWh of solar energy will be produced from
the solar-powered system, which will help to power the
day-to-day electricity for our offices, dramatically reducing
the cost of energy bills. We have already moved to
renewable energy sources in these office locations.
Solar-powered offices
Our Cardiff and Solihull offices also have electric vehicle
chargers installed, which are free to use by colleagues.
In 2024, extra vehicle chargers were installed to meet
demand in Solihull. In the same year, as part of our Green
Car Scheme employee benefit, 27 electric vehicles were
delivered to employees who opted for environmentally
friendly travel via this scheme.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
48
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy
2024 progress
Looking ahead
Customer
Trust
With a vision to become the UK’s most trusted specialist lender, developing customer trust is clearly a key priority for us and
the experience of our consumers is monitored regularly in great detail as part of our Consumer Duty processes.
• A key measure of customer trust is how satisfied our customers are. We achieved high scores for our Consumer Finance
and Savings business, 4.7 out of 5 stars for Feefo and 4.6 out of 5 stars for Trustpilot.
• In our Business Finance businesses, satisfaction has also remained high with 100% client satisfaction for Real Estate
Finance and 97% for Commercial Finance.
• The quality of the Group’s product and service provision is also reflected through external recognition, which in
2024 included:
-
Retail Finance: Won Best Retail Finance Provider (Interiors Monthly);
-
Retail Finance: Finalist for Best Consumer Credit Product (Credit Strategy 2024 Credit Awards); and
-
Commercial Finance: Won Asset Based Lender of the Year (Insider Media Midlands Dealmakers Awards 2024).
• At the start of the year, the Group received the government-backed Customer Service Excellence accreditation for
the 11th consecutive year and was awarded a Compliant Plus rating. The assessment concluded that the Group had
demonstrated year-on-year improvements to service delivery and sustained high levels of customer satisfaction in a
climate of global financial uncertainty.
• Technology has been a key enabler to improving customer experience during the year, as well as driving efficiency.
Our Digital Savings Experience project is a good example. Further details can be found on page 27.
The focus in 2025 will be on:
• continuing to embed Consumer Duty
principles within the Consumer businesses
and across teams following changes to our
organisational structure;
• building on, and acting on, customer insight;
• developing more opportunities to collect
real-time transactional customer feedback;
and
• supporting customer vulnerability through
targeted training of customer service agents.
Recognition is built into our culture and directly
linked to our purpose and values. We have created
opportunities to recognise colleagues who show
excellence when it comes to demonstrating our
values, one of which is ‘Customer Focus’.
These range from everyday e-thank yous linked to our values,
and our annual flagship ‘Outstanding Achievers’ special
event, to our quarterly Customer Trust Award. At the end of
each quarter, employees who receive one of our Be Valued
Awards for ‘Customer Focus’ are put forward for a Customer
Recognition for customer
service excellence
Trust Award, which is judged by senior colleagues who sit
on our Customer Experience Best Practice Working Group.
One of the standout winners in 2024 was Toni Melissa, one
of our Collections advisers.
The Customer Trust Award recognises colleagues across
all our businesses and support functions who deliver
good customer outcomes. Toni was also nominated as
a ‘Customer Service Hero’ during National Customer
Service Week for handling challenges effectively
and exceeding expectations.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
49
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy
2024 progress
Looking ahead
ED&I
ED&I remains an important focus for the Group. In 2024, we continued to work with Business in the Community (‘BiTC’), as
well as other partners, to move the agenda forwards in this area. Key areas of focus for 2024 included:
• BITC Workwell Commitment – to ensure ED&I is aligned more closely to wellbeing we launched a refreshed Wellbeing
strategy and signed up to BITC’s Workwell Commitment. This provides a framework for embedding health and wellbeing
into our organisational culture. This is supported by the appointment of volunteer Wellbeing Champions and the
introduction of a comprehensive new employee wellbeing offer.
• Evolving our ED&I agenda – BITC facilitated introductions with D&I leads at other organisations, to provide insight into best
practice, and a workshop with members of our Executive Committee to define our future commitment and actions in this area.
• Promoting diversity – we continue to promote understanding of the diverse characteristics within our colleague and
customer groups, through our award-winning internal lived experience podcasts, awareness raising campaigns and
through our network of ED&I Inclusioneer Champions. Following a recommendation for corporate attendance at Pride
events in key office locations, colleagues attended the Cardiff Pride event in 2024.
• Key achievements during the year were as follows.
-
Being placed 24 out of 90 in the GPTW
®
UK Best Workplaces for Women
TM
(Large category).
-
Meeting our stage two targets for Women in Finance due at the end of 2024.
-
Participating in the ENEI’s Talent, Inclusion and Diversity Evaluation (‘TIDE’) assessment, resulting in the Group retaining
the silver TIDE Mark for the fourth consecutive year.
-
Retaining our Disability Confident accreditation.
-
Publishing our 2024 Gender Pay Gap report early, which indicates gradual progress, although the biggest driver of our
gender pay gap is the shape of our workforce and that remains a key challenge to address over time.
• Our Learning and Development offering and colleague recognition suite are key to supporting achievement of our ED&I
targets and examples can be found on page 49.
The focus in 2025 will be on:
• continuing to embed and deliver our
ED&I priorities;
• maintaining/meeting our stage two Women
in Finance targets and reporting our Gender
Pay Gap figures;
• consider actions required in light of the
regulatory consultations on new measures to
enhance D&I in firms; and
• maintaining focus on diversity within
talent planning.
Following a proposal from our team of volunteer
ED&I champions, the Group was delighted to show
its commitment to diversity and inclusion by taking
part in its first Pride parade this year in Cardiff, the
home of our Retail Finance business.
Colleagues were invited from across the Group to join the Pride
Cymru parade and proudly sported V12 Retail Finance t-shirts,
banners and flags as they walked the 1.4 mile route.
Proudly marching at Pride
James Ablett, Operations Delivery Manager, Retail
Finance
, who joined in the parade said: “I loved the event;
I found it uplifting, the atmosphere was amazing and it was
awesome to see so many people supporting the event
both in terms of those marching as well as those cheering
from the sides. The uplifting sense was about seeing
everyone celebrating diversity ranging from very young to
very old and from all walks of life!”
The event received positive feedback and we will be
marching for LGBTQIA+ in Cardiff and Birmingham Pride
parades in 2025.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
50
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy
Board and Executive Management gender representation
At the year-end, the split by gender was:
Number
of Board
members
Percentage
of the Board
Number of senior
positions on the
Board (CEO,CFO,
SID and Chair)
Number in
Executive
Management
1
Percentage
of Executive
Management
Men
4
50
2
7
64
Women
4
50
2
4
36
Other categories
Not specified/prefer not to say
Board and Executive Management ethnic representation
2
At the year-end, the split by ethnicity was:
Number
of Board
members
Percentage
of the Board
Number of senior
positions on the
Board (CEO,CFO,
SID and Chair)
Number in
Executive
Management
1
Percentage
of Executive
Management
White British or other White
(including minority-White groups)
8
100
4
11
100
Mixed/Multiple ethnic groups
Asian/Asian British
Black/African/Caribbean/Black British
Other ethnic group
Not specified/prefer not to say
1.
In accordance with the requirement under Listing Rules LR 9.8.6R(9) and LR 14.3.33R(1), the ‘Number in Executive Management’ includes all members of the Executive Committee
(which includes the CEO and CFO, who are also Directors), and the Company Secretary.
2.
The Board and Executive Management were asked to confirm their ethnicity from the following options: white British/other white, mixed/multiple ethnic groups, Asian/Asian British,
Black/African/Caribbean/Black British, Other ethnic group and not specified/prefer not to say.
Further details on Board diversity can be found in the Nominations Committee report on page 82.
We continue to make progress on our ED&I agenda as demonstrated by external benchmarks and our 2024 metrics show that this
is also resulting in a gradual improvement in our workforce gender diversity.
At the year-end, the split by gender
of the Group was as follows:
Directors
Male
50%
50%
100%
Female
Total
4
4
8
Senior
managers
1
and
their direct
reports
Male
Female
Total
54%
46%
100%
39
33
72
All other
employees
Male
Female
Total
48%
52%
100%
394
430
824
Total
employees
Male
48%
52%
100%
Female
Total
437
467
904
1.
In accordance with the requirement set out in s.414C(8)(c)(ii) of the Companies Act
2006 for disclosure of Secure Trust Bank Group’s ‘senior managers’ (as that term is
defined in s.414C(9)), there were six male and three female senior managers.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
51
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy
2024 progress
Looking ahead
Education
and Skills
Our focus on education and skills is aimed at embedding excellence in our culture and is primarily delivered through our
comprehensive Learning and People Development offering. This covers everything from mandatory regulatory learning
competencies to funding multiple professional qualifications.
We have enhanced our ESG strategy to ensure the emphasis is on developing skills to support better our business strategy
and needs, in addition to career progression.
A major focus in 2024 has been on transitioning learning programmes to an experiential approach, requiring a greater
commitment from delegates. This has been delivered through three key programmes.
• Management Zone, aimed at helping people leaders to shape team culture and drive optimum team performance.
• Blazing My Trail, a four-month programme designed specifically to support our ED&I aspirations and inspires colleagues
to take control of their careers and have the confidence to make changes to their lives that will help them take their next
career step and achieve their potential.
• MentorMe, our mentoring and reverse mentoring programme matches colleagues with team members who can enhance
their skill set and guide their career development. The reverse mentoring element is also aligned to our ED&I agenda by
enabling more junior team members to share their perspectives, experiences and skills with more senior team members
to build greater inclusivity.
Flagship programmes, including the Alan Karter Scholarship, have continued to have a positive impact and in May 2024
GPTW
®
published its first list of UK Best Workplaces for Development
TM
, where we ranked 26 out of 100 companies (‘Large’
category) and satisfaction scores for our Career and Development offer stand at over 97%.
The focus in 2025 will be on:
• supporting development in three areas,
leadership skills; management skills; and
business skills;
• measuring the impact of new skills on
the business;
• rolling out a new learning management
system, which allows tracking of progress
and performance and has the capability
to automate manual processes, including
our performance management framework,
longer term; and
• investing in apprenticeships, with the
focus on using our Apprenticeship Levy to
enhance business skills where possible, and
transfer unused Levy to local good causes
to support their apprenticeship initiatives,
in support of our Communities and
Charities activities.
The Group’s Alan Karter Scholarship was created in
memory of our highly regarded General Counsel,
who sadly passed away in 2020.
After its launch in 2021, Alan’s legacy has continued
to offer scholarship opportunities to a select group of
talented individuals each year, reflecting his passion for
professional development.
Run in partnership with the prestigious Cranfield Business
School, the Scholarship is open to all Group employees who
want to take the next step and believe they would benefit from
intensive professional development.
The Alan Karter
Scholarship
Since launch, competition has been strong to get awarded
one of the residential places on the scholarship and
this takes place via an interview and selection process.
Places are fully funded, showing our commitment to the
learning and career development of colleagues as well as
supporting our ED&I agenda.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
52
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy
2024 progress
Looking ahead
Communities
and Charities
We remain mindful that our role within wider society goes beyond making a profit. We have a duty to act as a good
corporate citizen, helping our stakeholder groups with key issues that are important to them, and where we can having
a positive influence. Key achievements for the year have included:
• The Group raised nearly £100,000 for good causes in 2024 (2023: £98,000). This was for employee-elected charities
(£53,000) as well as a wider range of colleague sponsored good causes through our £4£ Matched Funding programme
(which matches funds raised by individual staff of up to £400 per person each year).
• The Group exceeded its targets set by Charity Committees in Solihull (£100k over three years) and Cardiff (£25k in 2024).
• In 2024, our Solihull office completed three years with its current charity partner, Acorns Children’s Hospice and elected a
new partner for the next three-year period, Birmingham Children’s Hospital. 2025 will be the final year of our Cardiff office’s
three-year partnership with the children’s hospice,Ty Hafan.
• We have targeted different internal demographics to drive engagement as well as leveraging supplier and partner
involvement. The Group’s charity Golf Day and Real Estate Finance’s Ramble have become popular events in the annual
business calendar, offering teams a chance to build their business networks as well as support good causes.
• Colleagues are encouraged to use one paid day a year to make a difference in their local area. In 2024, the equivalent
of 281 days were recorded, supporting a range of organisations benefiting local causes.
• This year the Group extended its work with key charities and other good causes including MIND, the Samaritans and
Neurodiversity in Business, which are directly supportive of our ED&I and Customer Trust focus areas.
• The Group continued to work with its further education college partners to deliver a series of activities that support the
employability skills of young people in our local communities.
• The Group also aims to ensure timely payment of suppliers (average of 33 days) and has processes in place to raise awareness of,
and minimise the risk of, modern slavery within our own business and supply chains, as detailed in our modern slavery statement.
The focus in 2025 will be on:
• establishing a strong working relationship
between the Solihull office and Birmingham
Children’s Hospital and developing a plan to
cover the three-year partnership;
• providing additional volunteering
opportunities, including online volunteering
opportunities, to boost the contribution
our people already make to our local
communities; and
• enhancing our further education college
partner work with a more integrated
programme of activities and roll out to
other office locations, encouraging further
colleague support and involvement.
Secure Trust Bank has been working in partnership
with Solihull College & University Centre for many
years. The partnership is led by our Chief People
Officer, Anne McKenning, who is the College’s
volunteer Enterprise Adviser, working alongside the
Head of Careers for the college.
In 2024, 50 aspiring students from Solihull College spent the
day with our Learning and People Development team to gain
insights into a professional working environment.
Aspiring Solihull College
students visit head office
Students learnt about what it’s like to work at Secure Trust
Bank and how a bank operates, the importance of first
impressions and body language, introvert and extrovert
personalities, and how to spot a fraudulent scam.
The Group also runs an annual intervention with the
college to help business study students prepare for work by
working with them to hone employability skills including CV
development and interview techniques. We also support
the College through apprenticeship support, recruitment
fairs and work experience.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
53
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Environmental, Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Climate change
Climate change, and society’s continued response to it,
presents risks and opportunities to the UK financial services
sector. While some of these risks may crystallise in the short
term, our sector also needs to be prepared to support and
help mitigate the impacts in both the medium and long-term
time horizons.
The Group continues to assess its risk exposure to both
the potential ‘physical’ effects of climate change and the
‘transitional’ risks from the UK’s target to bring all greenhouse
gas (‘GHG’) emissions to net zero by 2050. The Group remains
committed to aligning with legal and regulatory requirements
and is tracking developments via industry bodies and
public statements.
This report sets out how the Group is managing its exposure
to climate change risks and is aligning with the four key pillars
of the ‘Task Force for Climate-related Financial Disclosures’
(‘TCFD’), being Governance, Strategy, Risk management,
and Metrics and targets. The key risks, their mitigants and
assessments are covered under the Strategy and Risk
management sections of this report.
The Climate-related financial disclosures made by the Group
comply with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 as
amended by the Companies (Strategic Report) (Climate-related
Financial Disclosure) Regulations 2022.
The Group has also complied with the requirements of UK
Listing Rule 16.3.23(R) by including Climate-related financial
disclosures consistent with the recommendations and
recommended disclosures of the TCFD within this Annual
Report and Accounts, being fully compliant with each of the
11 statements, successfully closing the two gaps highlighted
for 2023:
• Strategy (b): In 2024, the Group conducted workshops to
identify risks and opportunities across its businesses and
reviewed how its financial planning timelines aligned with
the Group strategy.
• Metrics (b): To support the development of its reporting
capabilities, the Group designed and implemented new
models to report its Scope 3 emissions across all reportable
Consumer and Business lending activity. Details of these are
in the Scope 1, 2 and 3 GHG emissions section. See pages
60 to 62.
A review of disclosures by banks was undertaken to establish
current best practice for metric publication and following this,
the Group decided to enhance the reporting from 2023. As a
result, the Group has disclosed greater detail of its existing
metrics and provided improved insights in this report.
To align our reporting better with industry benchmarks, the
Group joined with the Partnership for Carbon Accounting
Financials (‘PCAF’) in May 2024. Access to PCAF data and
methodologies has helped us develop enhanced Scope
3 reporting.
The Group is working towards the expected Transition plan
disclosure requirements pending a government consultation
anticipated for later in 2025 about mandating them, and for
the likely endorsement by the government of sustainability
reporting driven by the IFRS International Sustainability
Standards Board (‘ISSB’) Disclosure Standards S1: General
Requirements for Disclosure of Sustainability-related
Financial Information and S2: Climate-related Disclosures.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
54
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Governance
The Group recognises the importance of climate change risk management and has continued to invest and provide resources to develop its climate strategy and ambitions. The Group has allocated
the Senior Management Function responsibility for identifying and managing the risks from climate change to the Chief Risk Officer (‘CRO’).
The Board has delegated responsibility for oversight of Climate change risk to the Executive Risk Committee (‘ERC’). The ERC members include the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer
and Chief Operating Officer. The Group’s risk governance structure can be found on pages 30 to 31.
Disclosure
Approach and 2024 progress
Looking forward
The Board’s oversight
of climate-related risks
and opportunities
• The Board approved an updated ESG strategy for the Group with a continued focus on environmental aspects
including climate action/risk.
• Climate change risk is reported to the ERC and then the Board Risk Committee (‘BRC’). Over the year, the ERC
met on 12 occasions and the BRC met on six occasions. The Board receives reports on progress related to climate
change activities (including metrics and targets).
• The Board approved the annual review of the climate change risk appetite statement and metrics.
• The Board received updates on climate change over 2024, and in its October update discussed transitional
planning and regulatory developments.
• The management of all risks (including climate change) is embedded into the Group’s strategy setting, business
plan and executive remuneration policies.
• The Board will continue to be engaged and will
provide oversight to the development of the
Group’s Transition plan.
• As the Group Climate change risk approach
matures and becomes further embedded,
the Group will further refine its reporting to its
governance committees to provide improved
visibility of climate risks and opportunities.
Management’s
role in assessing
and managing
climate-related risks
and opportunities
• Ownership of Climate change risks sit with the accountable executives of the Group’s relevant business areas and
quarterly reporting is provided to the ERC.
• Climate change risk is embedded into the Risk and Control Self-Assessment process, which is performed by first
line risk owners with oversight provided by the second-line risk team. Monitoring of these risks is performed by
the ERC and BRC.
• During 2024, the Group has worked to develop management’s understanding of Climate change risk and
opportunities as well as enhancing its suite of metrics and reporting at a business unit level.
• Management will continue to build knowledge
and further embed climate change in
decision making.
• The CRO and senior members of the risk function,
including the climate lead will continue to attend
industry meetings, and will provide guidance to
management on best practice.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
55
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Strategy
The Group’s updated ESG strategy was approved by the Board in October 2024 and this strategy includes a focus on climate action. Cognisant of the UK government’s 2050 net zero target,
the Group is committed to supporting the consumers and businesses it works with as the UK transitions to a low-carbon economy.
Disclosure
Approach and 2024 progress
Looking forward
Climate-related risks
and opportunities
identified over the
short, medium, and
long term
• In 2024, workshops were held across the Group’s business functions to review existing risks, identify any new
climate-related risks and to explore climate change opportunities. The Group has continued to drive ownership
and accountability for Climate change risk with the relevant accountable executives and the management of all
risks (including Climate change risk) remains embedded in the variable compensation structures for Executive
Directors and other key material risk takers. Details of the Group’s key Climate risks can be found on page 59.
• The current operational strategy includes the Group’s target to achieve a 50% reduction in Scope 1 and 2 CO
2
equivalent (‘CO
2
e’) emissions by December 2025, compared with a 2021 baseline. The Group has achieved this
target a year earlier than anticipated through targeted actions (further details can be found on page 62).
• The Group will continue to assess climate-related
opportunities and integrate climate-related decision
making into its activities. This work will support the
Group in developing its Transition plan.
• The Group has recently approved an Energy Savings
Opportunity Scheme development plan to continue
to drive a reduction in Scope 1 and 2 emissions from
our buildings.
The impact of
climate-related risks
and opportunities
on our businesses,
strategy, and
financial planning
• The Group has identified opportunities and assessed the impact of its climate-related risks and as having minimal
adverse impact on its business, strategy and financial planning over a five-year time horizon.
• The Group has also been monitoring the proposals for sustainability reporting in the UK. Although the
application of these proposals is yet to be finalised, the Group has raised awareness internally and upskilled
relevant employees.
• The Group will continue to respond to evolving
regulatory requirements and developments in
the broader industry, including the emergence of
best practice.
• As businesses in the UK develop and deliver their
own Transition plans, the Group is ready to explore
opportunities to support them and the wider
transition of the economy.
The resilience of our
strategy, taking into
consideration different
climate-related
scenarios, including a
2°C or lower scenario
• The Group conducted scenario analysis exercises to test the resilience of its strategy to the impacts of climate
change and continued to integrate climate issues into the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process
(‘ICAAP’) and IFRS 9 models.
• The outcome of this work demonstrated the Group’s continued resilience to Climate change in the scenarios
tested, for 2024 using the ‘Late Action’ and the ‘Early Action’ scenario basis. Further details are provided on
page 57.
• The Group is developing its internal modelling
capabilities to embed climate scenario analysis
further into its lending decisioning and to help
ensure the Group is adequately capitalised.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
56
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Risk management
The Group has established risk frameworks and policies, which incorporate the approach to managing Climate change risk. Climate change risk is governed through existing risk governance
structures, including reporting to the ERC and monitoring for any new regulation through established horizon scanning processes.
Disclosure
Approach and 2024 progress
Looking forward
Our processes
for identifying
and assessing
climate-related risks
• Climate change has been recognised as a principal risk within the Group. The identification and assessment of
this risk remains integrated and embedded within existing risk management frameworks.
• Assessment of climate-related impacts are based on transactional and portfolio level as well as through stress
testing and scenario analysis for a longer-term view.
• The potential impacts of the risks are assessed against the established hierarchy contained within our risk
frameworks, covering potential financial, regulatory/reputational impact, business disruption, customer impacts
and the emerging regulatory landscape. Each risk has an executive owner, reviewed and agreed at the ERC.
• The Group is actively developing its scenario analysis
capabilities, and future Climate stress testing will
be developed internally, to support a bespoke
approach for our distinct businesses.
Our processes
for managing
climate-related risks
• The Group uses established processes to support the management of Climate-related risks, which includes
monitoring and reporting of data through the climate change working group and governance committees,
driving ownership of Climate change risk to enable regulatory developments to be understood.
• Physical transitional risks continue to be managed and integrated within the Operational Risk and Credit Risk
Frameworks. This includes how risks are identified, assessed, prioritised, mitigated and any associated scenario
analysis outputs.
• Risks are governed through existing risk governance structures, including reporting to the ERC. All risks are
reported collectively to enable the Executive Committee and the Board to understand and consider the scale and
breadth of the Climate change risk profile.
• As the landscape continues to mature around
climate, the Group will continue to develop
its risk capabilities, to support and achieve its
climate ambitions.
How our processes for
identifying, assessing
and managing
climate-related risks are
integrated into overall
risk management
• Climate change risk is integrated into the Group’s existing risk frameworks, and in-line with other key risks has
a Board-approved risk appetite statement, suite of quantitative metrics, reporting through governance bodies
including the ERC, BRC and Board and clear risk ownership and accountability.
• The Group will further embed climate change
into its risk management practices and decision
making, with a focus on developing awareness
and understanding of Climate change risk across
its employees to further improve its climate
risk management.
Stress testing/scenario analysis
In order to understand the potential implications climate change can have on the Group, the Group undertakes annual scenario assessments to help assess the level of risk from climate change.
The Group’s businesses have each undertaken scenario analysis (see pages 63 to 65), appropriate for their time horizon and plausible scenarios. Each scenario is reviewed for its insights as a
minimum every three years. This analysis has improved the Group’s understanding of the key drivers to its risks and therefore the mitigating actions required.
The scenarios are linked to the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenarios (‘CBES’) that are based on those developed by the Network for Greening the Financial System and
are designed to support central banks to bring greater consistency and comparability to stress testing exercises. Two routes to meeting net zero carbon dioxide emissions targets by 2050 were
considered: an ‘Early Action Scenario’ and a ‘Late Action Scenario’. The former assumes early intervention to tackle the challenge of climate change, which results in a smoother transition,
while the latter assumes a more acute fallout due to the lack of action. The outcomes from the scenarios undertaken indicate that currently there is no significant link to Expected Credit Losses
(‘ECLs’) due to climate change factors and the Group is resilient across the scenarios assessed. The results will be factored into the Group’s 2025 ICAAP. The Group plans to develop further in
2025 the scenario analysis undertaken and will continue to use the results to identify climate change risks/opportunities and how they may influence our business plans.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
57
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Metrics and targets
The Group seeks to understand and quantify its Climate change risk exposure, so the Group, working with its customers and clients, can minimise the financial risks associated with the transition to a
low-carbon economy and any impacts from climate change to our business.
Disclosure
Approach and 2024 progress
Looking forward
The metrics used
by the organisation
to assess
climate-related risks
and opportunities
in line with its
strategy and risk
management process
• The Group has integrated climate change metrics into its Enterprise Wide Risk Management Framework.
There are a range of metrics, which are aligned to the Group’s risk appetite and are reported quarterly to the
ERC. These metrics include vehicle emissions for our Vehicle Finance business and flood risk for our Real Estate
Finance portfolio. Further details of these can be found on pages 63 and 64.
• The Group will continue to develop metrics and
measurement capabilities to monitor and manage
climate-related risks and opportunities.
Scope 1, Scope 2, and,
if appropriate, Scope
3 GHG emissions, and
the related risks
• In 2024 the Group joined PCAF, to access previously unavailable data points, and for the first time is now able to
report Scope 3 emissions for its Real Estate Finance and Commercial Finance lending portfolios as well as for its
purchased goods and services and capital goods. This is in addition to Vehicle Finance Scope 3 emissions which
have been published for the previous two years.
• The Group will continue working on enhancements
to the availability and quality of data to support
future calculations of emissions.
The targets used
to manage climate-
related risks and
opportunities
and performance
against targets
• In 2024, the Group achieved the target of a 50% reduction in Scope 1 and Scope 2 CO
2
e emissions by
December 2025, compared to the 2021 baseline. The total reduction in Scope 1 and Scope 2 CO
2
e
emissions reached 55.5%.
• Each of the Group’s business metrics are reported alongside appropriate thresholds and target ranges.
This ensures the Group has a clear line of sight across each business, to give governance committees’
appropriate information and insight to Climate change risk.
• The Group will continue to monitor its metrics and
will develop its targets in line with its own climate
ambitions and the external environment.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
58
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Summary of climate change risks
Climate-related risks are identified and assessed through the Group’s Operational and Credit Risk Frameworks. A summary of
these risks is as follows:
Physical risk
Source
Area
Risk
Timeframe
1
Assessment
2
Acute/Chronic
Operations
Impact of climate change interrupting our internal operations
e.g. floods.
Medium and
long-term
Low
Acute/Chronic
Operations
Impact of climate change interrupting our supply chain
e.g. floods.
Short, medium
and long-term
Low
Acute/Chronic
Real Estate
Finance
The value of the Group’s security may be negatively impacted
due to increased risk of flood associated with climate change.
Short, medium
and long-term
Low
Transitional risk
Source
Area
Risk
Timeframe
1
Assessment
2
Market
Vehicle
Finance
Failure to respond/recognise that the value of the loan
security may be negatively impacted by ‘transitional’
effects from climate change.
Short, medium
and long-term
Low
Emerging regulation
Real Estate
Finance
Failure to respond/recognise that the value of the loan
security may be negatively impacted by the effects of
climate change or through ‘transitional’ impacts.
Short, medium
and long-term
Low
Market and
emerging regulation
Commercial
Finance
Profitably or viability of our clients may be impacted by
the transitional effects of climate change.
Short, medium
and long-term
Low
Reputation
Group
The Group’s reputation is negatively impacted due to
failure to meet:
• climate change regulation;
• stakeholder expectations;
• the strategic responses needed to address changing
markets: and
• consumer demands/preferences.
Short, medium
and long-term
Low
1. Short-term 0 to 5 years, medium-term 5 to 10 years, long-term 10+ years.
2.
All risks have been assessed as low, based on impact and likelihood scoring with minimal adverse impact and rare likelihood (0 to 2% likelihood of occurrence).
Affiliations
Through membership of industry bodies and
initiatives, the Group plays an active role in working to
address the sustainability challenges faced across the
finance industry.
Our ongoing membership of UK Finance has seen
the Group support industry-wide consultations
and provide feedback. This is designed to enable
greater industry collaboration. Forums include both
regulatory, strategic and government policy design.
As a member of the PRA Climate Financial Risk
Forum, we have contributed to sessions for Banks.
This has helped us to develop our own strategy, by
discussing good practice with industry experts.
The Group is a member of PCAF and actively
contributes to their working groups developing
good practice in financed emissions reporting
and data collection.
As an official TCFD supporter, the Group Annual
Report and Accounts contains climate-related
disclosures consistent with TCFD.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
59
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
GHG emissions
Scope 1, 2, and 3 GHG emissions
The Group continues to develop its emission reporting
capability each year. Scope 3 emissions for 2024 now include
financed emissions for the Real Estate Finance and Commercial
Finance businesses, as well as emissions for purchased goods
and services and capital goods. The new reporting was
developed through a combination of external consultancy and
internal model validation. Due to the recent implementation
of these new models, we are unable to provide comparative
years performance of the measurement for these items.
Developing the Group’s reporting capabilities will remain a key
focus in 2025 as the regulatory landscape continues to mature.
The following tables set out the Group’s energy consumption
and CO
2
e emissions for 2024 in accordance with TCFD
guidance and the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report
and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013, and the Companies
(Directors’ Report) and Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy
and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018.
We have calculated emissions using the GHG Protocol
Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard
(revised edition).
GHG consumption and emissions are reported as single
totals, by converting them to the equivalent amounts of
kWh and CO
2
e respectively, using emission factors from the
UK government’s GHG Conversion Factors for Company
Reporting 2024.
All energy consumption and emissions relate to the UK and
cover all Group entities and, therefore, are aligned with the
financial reporting of the Group.
Measure
2024
CO
2
e
tonnes
2023
CO
2
e
tonnes
Further
details
Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 (excluding categories 1, 2 and 15) CO
2
e emissions
307.4
369.1
1
See below
Scope 3 (1) Purchased goods and services; and (2) Capital goods
3,399.9
N/A
Page 61
Scope 3 (15) Financed Emissions
639,300.0
N/A
Page 61
Total Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 CO
2
e emissions
643,007.3
N/A
Measure
2024
kwh
2023
kwh
Movement
%
Scope 1 – Building energy: gas consumption
65,926
150,425
(56.2)
Scope 1 – Business travel: Group-leased vehicles
242,895
136,364
78.1
Scope 2 – UK electricity consumption
625,582
948,919
(34.1)
Scope 3 – Business travel: employee-owned vehicles
94,502
148,844
(36.5)
Total energy consumption
1,028,905
1,384,552
(25.7)
Measure (Location-based emissions
2
)
2024
CO
2
e
tonnes
2023
CO
2
e
tonnes
Movement
%
Scope 1 – Direct emissions from the combustion of fossil fuel
68.8
60.2
14.3
Scope 2 – Indirect emissions from purchased electricity
129.5
196.5
1
(34.1)
Scope 3 – Indirect emissions from the value chain – (see page 61 for categories
included)
109.1
112.4
(2.9)
Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 (excluding categories 1, 2 and 15) CO
2
e emissions
307.4
369.1
(16.7)
Measure: Total emissions excluding financed emissions per £ million Group operating income
2024
2023
Movement
%
Group operating income (£ million)
203.9
184.7
10.4
Environmental intensity indicator
1.5
2.0
(25.0)
1.
Restated due to certain emissions that were out of scope for reporting, which were identified through an external assurance process.
2.
Location-based emissions are calculated by multiplying electricity consumption for all sites by the government’s conversion factor for UK electricity.
• Scope 1 emissions result from activities owned and
controlled by the Group. These are direct emissions
that include the combustion of natural gas for heating
buildings and fuel for Group-leased vehicles.
• Scope 2 emissions are indirect emissions generated
from purchased electricity for the Group’s activities
but occur at sources that the Group does not own
or control.
• Scope 3 emissions are indirect emissions generated
by the Group’s activities but occur at sources that
the Group does not own or control up and down the
value chain. Details of which categories are included
in the 2023 and 2024 results are included on the
following page.
Data relating to Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3
(excluding categories 1, 2 and 15) CO
2
e emissions
has been assured by a third party.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
60
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Scope 3 financed emissions
In 2024, the Group continued its work to validate the
baseline for financed emissions associated with our key
lending portfolios.
Financed emissions are the indirect emissions attributable to
the Group due to the financing we provide to our customers.
We have established data for financed emissions for Real
Estate Finance and Commercial Finance in 2024. Due to the
recent implementation of these new models, we are unable to
provide comparative years performance of the measurement.
The Group intends to develop further its data and reporting
capabilities in 2025.
2024
CO
2
e
tonnes
2023
CO
2
e
tonnes
Further
details on
page:
Vehicle Finance
87,900
71,911
63
Real Estate Finance
7,900
N/A
64
Commercial Finance
543,500
N/A
65
Total financed emissions
639,300
N/A
The Group joined the PCAF and used standard PCAF
calculations to calculate emissions. The methodologies
have been provided by third party specialists and undergo
internal validation.
The financed emissions analysis for these lending portfolios
follows the formula prescribed in the PCAF standard.
Scope 3 Supply chain: Purchased goods and services
and capital goods
2024
CO
2
e
tonnes
2023
CO
2
e
tonnes
Purchased goods (1) and
services and capital goods (2)
3,400
N/A
This assessment has been undertaken using data from our
core purchasing system and excludes any payments made
outside of the system such as payments to intermediaries.
The approach incorporates 81% of supplier spend, which
captures our top 100 suppliers.
The approach used to calculate these emissions has been
developed with support from an external consultancy and
the calculations have been validated internally.
Emissions analysis follows the formula prescribed in the
PCAF standard.
The scope will be developed in 2025, to include a greater
volume of suppliers by improving our data capabilities.
Forward look
The Group is well placed to support its customers as they
transition to a low-carbon economy and continues to invest in
internal expertise, engage with relevant bodies and to explore
climate opportunities in its range of products. In 2025 the
Group aims to prepare to publish its first Transition plan.
Scope 3 CO
2
e emissions categories
The Group has assessed the relevance and materiality for each
category of Scope 3 emissions within the table below.
Scope 3 category
Status
1
Purchased goods and services
2
Capital goods
3
Fuel and energy-related activities
(not included in Scope 1 or Scope 2)
4
Upstream transportation and distribution
5
Waste generated in operations
6
Business travel
7
Employee commuting
8
Upstream leased assets
1
9
Downstream transportation and distribution
10 Processing of sold products
11 Use of sold products
12 End-of-life treatment of sold products
13 Downstream leased assets
14 Franchises
15 Investments (Financed emissions)
1.
All material emissions from the leased assets are included in Scope 1 and 2 emissions.
Key
Included in Scope 3 reporting on page 60
Separately disclosed on this page
Not reported
Not applicable to the Group
Financed
emissions
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
61
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Building energy:
UK electricity
42.1%
Scope 2
Business travel:
Vehicles not owned by the
Group and public transport
Other
3.7%
31.8%
Scope 3
Business travel:
Group-leased vehicles
18.4%
Building energy:
Gas consumption
4.0%
Scope 1
2024
• Total CO
2
e emissions from these categories have decreased by 16.7% against equivalent emissions reported in 2023.
• We successfully decreased electricity emissions (67.0 tonnes CO
2
e) and gas consumption (15.0 tonnes CO
2
e), however, this
was offset with increases in business travel in Group-owned vehicles (24.3 tonnes CO
2
e).
• Electricity and gas emissions have reduced by 34.1% and 54.7% respectively year-on-year, following the closure of two
buildings and the installation of solar panels at our two main offices. Gas usage reduced following the removal of a gas
appliances from our two main offices.
• Although electricity accounts for 42.1% of our emissions, 99.8% of our electricity is from REGO-certified 100% renewable sources.
• Although we have switched more drivers from plug-in hybrid to Electric Vehicles (‘EVs’), Group-leased vehicle emissions
increased by 24.3% year-on-year. The number of drivers and the amount of mileage travelled has increased to support the
growth in our Vehicle Finance and Retail Finance businesses.
We will continue to review our performance and implement initiatives designed to reduce further our CO
2
e emissions in the
coming year.
In 2021, our Scope 1 and 2 emissions were at 446 tonnes
CO
2
e. We set a target to reduce these emissions by 50% by
December 2025.
After implementing an extensive programme of work, we
reduced our Scope 1 and 2 emissions to 198 tonnes CO
2
e,
achieving our target a year early.
In just three years, we have achieved the following:
• Rationalised our building use (closing four offices).
• Switched to 100% renewable electricity and installed solar
panels at our two main offices.
• Removed all gas appliances from our head office.
• Phased out all petrol and diesel Group-leased vehicles
and switched many of these from plug-in hybrid to EVs.
Scope 1
Scope 2
2024
2021
2022
2023
132.4
148.3
60.2
68.8
313.3
252.2
196.5
129.5
Scope 1 and 2 CO
2
e emissions (tonnes)
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
62
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 (excluding categories 1, 2 and 15) CO
2
e emissions
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Retail Finance
The Retail Finance business supports the transition to a low-carbon economy through the
funding of EV chargers for home use and E-Bikes. The business is expecting the funding of
EV charging points to increase, as the EV market grows and is exploring partnerships with
solar panel and battery retailers.
The Vehicle Finance business provides lending for lower-emission vehicles and EVs with
current funding levels at 2.7% of overall lending as at 31 December 2024.
The key area of risk for the Vehicle Finance business is the implication of an accelerated
transition to the use of ‘non-fossil fuelled vehicles’ on the residual values of our security
on internal combustion engine vehicles.
We used scenario analysis (see page 57 to explore the impact of this transition). In the
unlikely event of the Group not taking any action to mitigate the potential impacts from
these scenarios, the increase in the level of ECLs would likely peak around 2031 for the
Early Action and Late Action Scenarios, albeit at a lower level in the Early Action scenario.
Management monitor the key indicators so that, if should elements of the scenarios unfold,
the Group can take corrective action through amending credit policies to reduce loan-to
value ratios and/or reduce lending on those vehicles likely most significantly reduced in value
from the transition. The outcomes from the scenarios undertaken indicate that currently there
is no significant link to ECLs due to climate change factors.
Vehicle Finance is enhancing its market intelligence, and monitoring key factors that will
influencing changes in this market (e.g. customer preferences, government intervention,
infrastructure, and vehicle developments). In addition, we are working with our Introducer
base to understand how we can develop our products and lending criteria, to support
demands for EV and hybrid vehicles.
Vehicle Finance
Scope 3: Financed emissions
Given the nature and broad product range of the Retail Finance business and data
availability, calculating Scope 3 financed emissions is not currently possible.
Metrics
Metric example
Key risk
indicators
31 December
2024
Insight provided
Average CO
2
of each vehicle
Monitoring 150 CO
2
Trends of emission
averages per vehicle
New business, average age of the
vehicle being financed.
> 8 years
6.1 years
Consumer behaviour and
buying patterns for internal
combustion engines in
comparison to EVs
Scope 3: Financed emissions: 87,900 CO
2
e tonnes
Attribution factor:
Outstanding loan value / original vehicle value
Emissions:
Vehicle emissions annual Km x CO
2
Kg/Km)
Vehicle Finance emissions have grown broadly in line with the growth of the loan book.
External data sources including CAP code, attribution factors and emission factors have
been used.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
63
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Real Estate Finance
There are two areas of potential Climate change risk that could impact the performance of
the Real Estate Finance portfolio. The first relates to flood risk and the risk that properties
we hold as security for our lending are subject to an increased risk of flooding or similar
risks associated with severe weather. The second area of risk is where the value of our
security could be impacted by transitional changes made or imposed on the sector
through government intervention to improve energy efficiency. These risks are mitigated
through climate-specific risk assessments for all potential deals and regular reviews across
the portfolio.
To understand better the potential implications of these risks, the Group has undertaken
a review of a range of scenario assessments (as described on page 57), to help assess the
longer-term level of risk. The analysis considered the potential economic implications of the
transition to net zero and the most severe potential impacts of flooding on property values.
The analysis showed that the Group’s approach to surveying/valuing properties and the
short-term nature of the lending facilities provided, enabled us to minimise any impact from
flooding within the planning period and adapt lending policy to withstand the most severe
longer-term economic impacts. The outcomes from the analysis indicate that currently there
is no significant link to ECLs due to climate change factors.
Scope 3: Financed emissions: 7,900 CO
2
e tonnes
Metrics
Metric example
Key risk
indicators
31 December
2024
%
Insight provided
Energy Performance Certificate (‘EPC’)
• C or below
• Above C rating
Tracking
75.95
24.05
EPC risk exposure
of the portfolio
Security value of properties in high/very
high flood areas, divided by the total
portfolio security value
> 8%
5.52
Understanding the
impact on portfolio
of flood risk
Attribution factor:
Outstanding loan value/ Property value at loan origination
Emissions:
Property emissions (Annual property Scope 1 and 2 emissions
(tCO
2
e/year))
The business has improved its address match rate to 89% (2023: 57%) of its database for its
climate assessment with the support of a new data provider.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
64
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Managing our business responsibly
Climate-related financial disclosures
Operations
Disruption to the Group’s and third-party suppliers’ operational sites through climate change-related impacts, such as severe weather.
The Group has reviewed the physical risks associated with the location of each of its operational sites. Similarly, we have consulted with our material suppliers about their contingency plans in
the event of flooding or other severe weather. From the flood risk data and energy performance ratings of our internal sites, and the responses from our material suppliers, we do not consider
there to be any material risks in the short term.
In strategic terms, these risks and their associated risk appetites will be assessed and can influence any proposed changes to our operational sites and the selection and onboarding processes
for any new suppliers.
Commercial Finance
The Group’s Commercial Finance clients cover a broad range of sectors. There is a risk that
their businesses and/or customers could be affected by the transitional impacts of climate
change, which in turn, could affect their ability to service their lending from the Commercial
Finance business.
This risk is mitigated through climate-specific risk assessments for all clients and the fact that
the portfolio is primarily composed of short-term, self-liquidating facilities secured principally
by receivables and stock.
Metrics
Metric example
Key risk
indicators
31 December
2024
Insight provided
Number of clients with a residual
climate risk rating of ‘high’
> 1
0
Enables clear
understanding of a
business’ credentials
and impact on the
Group metrics
Properties contained within the Commercial Finance portfolio undergo scenario assessment
using the same approach as the Real Estate Finance business. The outcomes from the analysis
indicate that currently there is no significant link to ECLs due to climate change factors.
Scope 3: Financed emissions: 543,500 CO
2
e tonnes
Attribution factor:
Outstanding loan value/ Total equity + debt
Emissions:
Company emissions (Company turnover x emissions factor (tCO
2
e/£)
or disclosed emissions (tCO
2
/year))
Outputs for Commercial Finance are impacted by availability of data and timing of the
calculation. There is a reliance on information in third parties’ published accounts and
emission factors from PCAF to calculate financed emissions. The business expects like for like
emissions values to reduce as government policy evolves around clean energy and targets
set nationally, however overall values will depend heavily on evolving composition of the
portfolio. Overall emissions are currently weighted towards one client which accounts for
almost 90% of Commercial Finance emissions.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
65
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Non-financial and sustainability information statement
The non-financial and sustainability information required to be
disclosed is detailed below. Information about environmental
matters, employees, social matters, respect for human rights
and anti-corruption and anti-bribery matters is included in the
‘Managing our Business Responsibly’ section and certain other
information is included by reference to the following locations
in the Annual Report and Accounts:
Reporting requirement
Section
Pages
Description of principal risks
and impact of business activity
Principal risks and
uncertainties
30 to 39
Description of the
business model
Our business
model
2
Non-financial key
performance indicators
Chief Executive’s
statement
8
Climate-related
financial disclosures
Climate-
related financial
disclosures
54 to 65
Secure Trust Bank has a range of policies designed to support
effective governance within the organisation. Throughout the
year these policies have been implemented successfully
and have delivered the anticipated outcomes. We ensure
the effective implementation of our policies by fostering a
culture of integrity and accountability, regular review and
communication of the policies, and their requirements and
mandatory staff training where appropriate. The effectiveness
of these policies is reviewed by our risk and compliance
teams (second-line of defence) and Internal Audit (third-line
of defence). A summary of relevant key policies is detailed
as follows:
People policies
Equity, Diversity and Inclusion Policy
Our Equity, Diversity, and Inclusion Policy promotes fair
treatment, non-discrimination, and an inclusive work
environment. The policy includes measures such as diversity
training, reasonable adjustments, and support for employees
with disabilities. It also emphasises the importance of respect,
dignity, and compliance with relevant legislation like the
Equality Act 2010.
Health and Safety Policy
Our Health and Safety Policy ensures a safe and healthy
working environment for all employees, customers, and
visitors. It includes risk assessments, regular safety training,
and compliance with health and safety regulations to
prevent accidents and injuries.
Conflicts of Interest Policy
Our Conflicts of Interest Policy ensures that all potential
conflicts between personal interests and professional duties
are identified and managed effectively. It includes guidelines
for recognising, disclosing, and mitigating conflicts to maintain
integrity and trust. The policy also outlines procedures for
reporting and addressing conflicts to ensure transparency
and ethical conduct.
Whistleblowing Policy
Our Whistleblowing Policy encourages employees to
report any concerns about unethical or illegal activities
within the organisation. It ensures confidentiality and
protection for whistleblowers. The policy outlines clear
procedures for reporting and investigating such concerns
to maintain integrity and transparency.
Consumer policies
Credit Risk Management Policy Framework
We have a Credit Risk Management Policy Framework which
is comprised of a number of policies across the Group and
individual business units to ensure responsible lending that
is fair and appropriate to the customer’s circumstances.
The policy aims to protect customers and maintain the
Group’s financial stability.
Conduct Risk Policies and Framework
Our Conduct Risk Policies and Framework, ensure that
the Group has an effective framework to prevent poor
outcomes for customers and to operate with integrity in
the financial markets.
Product Governance Policy
This policy outlines the governance we implement to ensure
products and services are designed to meet the needs,
characteristics, and objectives of the identified target market,
enabling, and supporting retail customers to pursue their
financial objectives.
Financial Promotions Policy
Our Group Financial Promotions Policy ensures that all
marketing and promotional materials are clear, fair, and not
misleading. It complies with regulatory standards to protect
consumers and maintain trust.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
66
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Climate policies
Environmental Policy
The Company’s Environmental Policy commits to minimising
the environmental impact of its operations by reducing Scope
1 and 2 emissions by 50% from 2021 to 2025. The policy
emphasises sustainable practices, such as energy efficiency,
waste management, and resource conservation. Overall,
the policy reflects the Group’s dedication to environmental
stewardship and sustainability.
Financial Crime policies
Financial Crime Policy
The Financial Crime Policy provides a consistent, coherent,
and proportionate approach to deterring, detecting,
preventing, and reporting all types of financial crime
across the Group.
Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy
Our Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy establishes strict
guidelines to prevent bribery and corruption within the
organisation. It includes procedures for reporting and
investigating suspected bribery and corruption and
ensuring compliance with legal and ethical standards.
Market Abuse and Inside Information Policy
The Market Abuse and Inside Information Policy outlines
the procedures for preventing market abuse and managing
inside information. The policy ensures compliance with UK
Market Abuse Regulations and emphasises the importance
of integrity and transparency in financial markets.
Human right policies
Modern Slavery Policy
The Slavery Policy outlines the Group’s commitment to
combating modern slavery and human trafficking. It includes
measures for preventing these practices within its operations
and supply chain, emphasising a zero-tolerance approach.
Group Data Protection Policy
Our Group Data Protection Policy outlines the Group’s
commitment to complying with the UK GDPR and the
Data Protection Act 2018. It details the principles of data
protection, including lawful processing, individual rights,
and security measures.
The Strategic Report was approved by the Board on
12 March 2025 and signed on its behalf by:
David McCreadie
Chief Executive Officer
Non-financial and sustainability information statement
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
67
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
2024 meeting attendance
Board member
Board
Audit Committee
Nomination Committee
Risk Committee
Remuneration Committee
Ann Berresford
18/18
6/6
6/6
6/6
Jim Brown
1
12/12
4/4
4/4
Lord Forsyth
2
9/9
2/2
3/3
Julie Hopes
3
3/3
1/1
1/1
1/1
Rachel Lawrence
17/18
David McCreadie
18/18
Victoria Mitchell
4
17/18
6/6
2/2
5/5
Paul Myers
18/18
6/6
6/6
5/5
Finlay Williamson
18/18
6/6
6/6
6/6
Victoria Stewart
5
18/18
6/6
6/6
5/5
Board and Committee
changes during 2024
March 2024
• Jim Brown appointed as a
Non-Executive Director, Chair Designate
and a member of the Nomination
and Remuneration Committees
May 2024
• Lord Forsyth steps down from the
Board and as Chair
• Jim Brown appointed as Chair of
the Board
October 2024
• Julie Hopes appointed a
Non-Executive Director, Chair designate
of the Remuneration Committee and as a
member of the Audit, Remuneration and
Nomination Committees
• Victoria Mitchell appointed a member
of the Risk Committee
December 2024
• Victoria Stewart steps down from
the Board and as Chair of the
Remuneration Committee
• Julie Hopes appointed Chair of the
Remuneration Committee
UK Governance Code compliance
The Company supports the principles of corporate governance as set out in the 2018 version of the UK Corporate Governance Code
(the ‘Code’), issued by the Financial Reporting Council (‘FRC’), which can be found on the FRC website at www.frc.org.uk.
The Company did not fully comply with provision 19 of the Code, between 1 January 2024 and 16 May 2024. Provision 19 states that the
Chair should not remain in post beyond nine years from the date of their first appointment to the Board. However, it also confirms that
this period can be extended for a limited time to facilitate effective succession planning, particularly in those cases where the Chair was an
existing Non-Executive Director on appointment.
The previous Chair, Lord Forsyth, was appointed to the Board in March 2014 and as Chair in October 2016 and, therefore, had exceeded
the nine-year period from his first appointment. However, Lord Forsyth remained in post to ensure an effective succession plan and an
appropriate handover of responsibilities. Jim Brown was appointed the Chair at the Company’s Annual General Meeting (‘AGM’) in May
2024 and from this date the Company has been fully compliant with the provisions of the Code.
Secure Trust Bank PLC Board
71% independent
Audit Committee
100% independent
Nomination Committee
100% independent
Remuneration Committee
100% independent
Risk Committee
100% independent
Committee structure
1.
Jim Brown was appointed a
Director effective 31 March 2024.
2.
Lord Forsyth stepped down from
the Board on 16 May 2024.
3.
Julie Hopes was appointed to the
Board effective 24 October 2024.
4. Victoria Mitchell was appointed
to the Risk Committee effective
24 October 2024.
5. Victoria Stewart stepped
down from the Board from
31 December 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
68
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Governance at a glance
Directors’ skills and experience
25.0%
37.5%
75.0%
75.0%
62.5%
87.5%
87.5%
100.0%
Banking
Strategy
Risk
Consumer
Transformation
Operations
Digital
Technology
Non-Executive Directors’ tenure
3.50
6.10
1.16
0.20
0.75
8.10
Ann Berresford
Jim Brown
Julie Hopes
Victoria Mitchell
Paul Myers
Finlay Williamson
Board and senior management composition
As at 31 December 2024
Board
Senior management
1
Independence
Executive Directors
2
5
8
Independent
Non-Executive
Directors
Total
Chair
1
Male
4
4
8
Female
Total
Gender
Ethnicity
8
8
White British
Total
Male
7
4
11
Female
Total
Gender
Ethnicity
11
11
White British
Total
1.
Defined within the Code as consisting of Executive Committee members and the Company Secretary. Further information on wider diversity, as well as the gender breakdown of senior management including their direct reports, can be found on page 51.
Years as at 31 December 2024
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
69
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Governance at a glance
I am pleased to present our Governance report for the
year ended 31 December 2024, which details how we have
implemented the provisions of the UK Governance Code and
provides information on our governance framework, how it has
operated throughout the year and the outcomes it has driven.
UK Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’)
As detailed on page 68, we did not comply with the
requirements of the Code, relating to Chair tenure, between
January and May 2024, while succession planning for the Chair
role and an appropriate handover were executed.
In early 2024, the FRC announced the introduction of a revised
UK Corporate Governance Code (the ‘New Code’) with effect
from 1 January 2025 (with some provisions effective 1 January
2026). The Board supports the provisions of the New Code
and anticipates being compliant with the New Code from the
respective effective dates.
Company’s purpose and culture
The Company has a clearly defined purpose set by the Board,
which is to help more consumers and businesses fulfil their
ambitions. This is underpinned by our strong culture supported
by six core values our colleagues are expected to embody and
their behavioural performance is assessed against. For further
information on this, and our strategic priorities, please see
page 01. The Board oversees the embedding of the culture
across the firm and updates are provided to the Board by
our Chief People Officer and various metrics are monitored
within Board and Committee meetings, to ensure our culture is
consistently applied and aligned to our purpose and strategy.
Effective leadership and
stakeholder engagement
Since my appointment as Chair we have sharpened the focus
on strategy and business performance at the Board, which
was an item identified for development in the 2024 Board
performance review. We have extended the length of Board
meetings and structured agendas to ensure sufficient time for
debate on key strategic items and regular deep-dives into each
business unit. We have also focused on succession planning for
key Board roles and further information on this can be found in
the Nomination Committee Report on page 80.
We continue to focus on stakeholder engagement and hear
regular updates from Board members and management
on stakeholder views. The Board receives regular updates
on how we have embedded Consumer Duty including the
review and challenge of our Consumer Duty dashboards,
and the Consumer Duty Annual Report. Our Consumer
Duty Champion, Finlay Williamson, helps ensure our retail
customers are considered in our decision making and
provides feedback on relevant matters.
In addition to our shareholder engagement programmes
undertaken after our full-year and interim results, I have
met with many of our top shareholders, we have held two
capital market days for investors and also commissioned an
independent shareholder perceptions study.
Our employees are central to our success, and we review the
feedback from our employee survey and hear regular updates
from senior management. The Chair of our Employee Council,
Paul Myers, provides feedback to the Board on the open and
frank discussions held at council meetings. I have visited several
of our offices since my appointment and enjoyed the more
informal discussions with our employees.
Information on our stakeholder engagement can be found
from page 42, our Board activities from page 75 and how we
have considered stakeholders in key decisions on page 77.
Governance Framework
During the year, the Board approved a new management
governance framework across the Group, to better align with
our new centralised operating model. This has reduced the
complexity of our governance structure, reducing risk, while
enhancing our agility. The Board will continue to monitor the
effectiveness of this new structure.
Looking forward
As detailed in my opening statement, the Company faces
some legal and regulatory challenges and addressing these
is a key priority for the Board. We will continue to focus on
the optimisation of our strategy and business performance,
ensuring a high level of service to our customers, and
increase returns for our shareholders.
I am looking forward to meeting with shareholders at the
Company’s AGM, which will be held on 15 May 2025.
Jim Brown
Chair
“Since my appointment as
Chair we have sharpened the
focus on strategy and business
performance at the Board.”
Jim Brown
Chair
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
70
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Chair’s introduction
Appointed to the Board on 17 December 2019 and appointed
as CEO on 5 January 2021.
Skills and experience
David McCreadie has many years of banking experience and
is a Fellow of the Chartered Banking Institute. He spent more
than 20 years at RBS (now Natwest Group plc) holding roles
in Branch Banking, Consumer Finance and several Group
central functions. From 2004 to 2008, David was appointed the
CEO of Kroger Personal Finance, a joint venture between RBS
and Kroger Co, based in Cincinnati, USA. David joined Tesco
Personal Finance in 2008 and was a member of the executive
team that built Tesco Bank. David was an Executive Director
and Managing Director of Tesco Bank, with responsibility for
the banking and insurance businesses, from 2015 to 2019.
Long-term contributions
His executive career and wealth of experience in banking,
risk management, governance, consumer-facing businesses
and retailing provide David with the skills required to manage
the day-to-day activities of the Group. His strong leadership
and strategic expertise enable him to lead the Group in a
sustainable way and create shareholder value.
Appointed as an Independent Non-Executive
Director on 31 March 2024 and Chair on 16 May 2024.
Chair of the Nomination Committee and member of the
Remuneration Committee.
Skills and experience
Jim Brown is a banking professional with many years’
experience, gained through a number of executive positions.
He was Chief Executive Officer (‘CEO’), Sainsbury’s Bank and
a member of the Sainsbury’s Group Operating Board until his
retirement from these roles at the end of March 2024. He is a
Non-Executive Director on the Board of Just Group plc and
is also an investor in, and advisor to, a number of Fintechs.
Before this, Jim was the CEO at Future Williams & Glyn within
The Royal Bank of Scotland (‘RBS’) Group (now Natwest Group
plc) and prior to that he was CEO, Ulster Bank Group. He held a
number of senior appointments within RBS and ABN AMRO in
Asia and the Middle East and, earlier in his career, with Citibank
and Chase AMP Bank.
Long-term contributions
Jim Brown has extensive experience and a proven track record
as a banking executive and brings substantial wholesale,
commercial and retail banking experience to the Board. He has
held roles at the executive level managing both retail and
commercial banking for over 35 years at country and regional
level across multiple markets and various sized businesses.
Much of his career has involved starting, growing and/or
restructuring banks and businesses, as well as mergers and
acquisitions. Jim also has significant stakeholder management
experience including boards, regulators, rating agencies,
investors, suppliers, industry bodies, professional firms,
unions, politicians and media.
Other appointments include
Jim is a Non-Executive Director of Just Group plc.
Jim Brown
Non-Executive Chair
C
David McCreadie
FCBI
Chief Executive Officer
Rachel Lawrence
ACMA
Chief Financial Officer
Committee membership
Nomination
Audit
Risk
Remuneration
Executive
C
Chair
Appointed to the Board and as Chief Financial Officer (‘CFO’)
on 23 September 2020.
Skills and experience
Rachel Lawrence has considerable experience in financial
services gained from a career spanning more than 20 years.
She has held senior finance roles in Metro Bank PLC, where
she was part of the original team that set up the bank, and
Shawbrook Bank where she was part of the successful Initial
Public Offering. Prior to joining Secure Trust Bank, Rachel was
CFO at AIB Group (UK) plc. She brings considerable banking
experience focused on high growth start-up organisation
and wider financial services experience gained in asset
management, life, pensions and general insurance. She is a
qualified chartered management accountant.
Long-term contributions
Rachel’s considerable experience in finance and banking
proves invaluable in her role as CFO. She has a deep
understanding of the Group’s businesses and strategy and
has a strong track record of creating shareholder value.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
71
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Board leadership
Board of Directors
Appointed to the Board on 22 November 2016, appointed
Chair of the Audit Committee on 23 September 2017.
Member of the Risk and Nomination Committees. Ann was
appointed as the Senior Independent Director following the
close of the Annual General Meeting on 24 June 2020.
Skills and experience
Ann Berresford is a Chartered Accountant with a background in
the financial services and energy sectors. She has held positions
at Bath Building Society, the Pensions Regulator, Hyperion
Insurance Group, Triodos Renewables plc, the Pension
Protection Fund, Bank of Ireland Group, Clyde Petroleum plc
and Grant Thornton.
Long-term contributions
Her career has given Ann experience in mortgages, pensions,
operations, accounting, finance and risk. Her previous
experience in the renewable sectors gives her a long-term
outlook. The insights she has gained from her career mean
that she is a strong Senior Independent Director and an
excellent addition to the Board and Committees she serves.
Her financial background makes her an excellent Chair of the
Audit Committee.
Other appointments include
Ann is a Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Audit
and Risk Committee of Albion Crown VCT PLC.
Ann Berresford
ACA
Senior Independent
Director
C
Appointed to the Board on 1 November 2023. Member of the
Remuneration, Risk and Nomination Committees.
Skills and experience
Victoria Mitchell has many years of banking experience, gained
predominantly during a 20-year career with Capital One
(Europe) plc, during which she served as Chief Legal Counsel,
Chief Risk Officer and Chief Operating Officer. Victoria is the
Senior Independent Director of Vocalink Limited, where she
chairs the Risk Committee and is a member of the Audit,
Remuneration and Nomination Committees.
Victoria was previously a Non-Executive Director and member
of the Remuneration and Risk Committees of the West
Bromwich Building Society. She also served as a Non-Executive
Director at Lookers plc, which gave her considerable insight
into the Motor Finance industry. She was a member of the
Audit and Risk, Remuneration and Nomination Committees
throughout her tenure at Lookers plc, was Chair of the
Remuneration Committee from April 2021 to September 2022
and was Chair of Lookers Motor Group Limited. Victoria was
also a member of the Audit and Risk Committee, Nomination
and Governance Committee and Chair of the Financial
Services Board at N Brown Group plc. She is a graduate of
Birmingham University.
Long-term contributions
Her background has given Victoria vast experience in
risk, remuneration, governance, corporate strategy, and
finance, particularly motor finance. This experience makes
her a valuable addition to the Remuneration, Risk and
Nomination Committees.
Other appointments include
Victoria is the Senior Independent of Vocalink Limited where
she also chairs the Risk Committee and is a member of the
Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees.
Victoria Mitchell
Independent
Non-Executive Director
Committee membership
Nomination
Audit
Risk
Remuneration
Executive
C
Chair
Julie Hopes
MBA ACIB
Independent
Non-Executive Director
C
Appointed to the Board on 24 October 2024 and as Chair
of the Remuneration Committee on 31 December 2024.
Member of the Audit and Nomination Committees.
Skills and experience
Julie Hopes has over 30 years’ experience in financial
services, having served in a number of senior roles at RSA
plc, before becoming Managing Director of Insurance at
Tesco Bank until 2013. She is a Non-Executive Director of Saga
plc where she chairs the Remuneration and Risk Committees
and is Deputy Chair, and Chair of the Remuneration
Committee, of West Bromwich Building Society. Previously Julie
was a Non-Executive Director of MS Amlin Underwriting
Limited, where she chaired the Risk and Solvency Committee,
Chair of Police Mutual and a Non-Executive Director and Chair
of the Risk Committee of Co-Operative Insurance.
Long-term contributions
Julie’s background has given her experience in remuneration,
governance, risk, finance, accounting and corporate strategy.
She is an experienced Chair, with a strong customer focus and
her skills and experience make her an ideal candidate to lead
the Remuneration Committee.
Other appointments include
Julie is a Non-Executive Director of Saga plc where she also
chairs the Remuneration and Risk Committees. She is also
Senior Independent Director and Deputy Chair of West
Bromwich Building Society.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
72
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Board leadership
Board of Directors
Paul Myers ACIB
Independent
Non-Executive Director
C
Appointed to the Board on 28 November 2018 and as Chair
of the Risk Committee on 31 March 2020. Member of the
Remuneration and Nomination Committees. Paul is the Non-
Executive Director designated for workforce engagement and
the Chair of the Employee Council.
Skills and experience
Paul Myers has many years of banking experience, gained
initially in Barclays, where he spent 24 years in a variety of
retail banking roles. He was part of the small team that
founded and built Aldermore Bank, where he served as Chief
Operating Officer, Corporate Development Director and on
the Board as an Executive Director. Paul had a wide range
of responsibilities at Aldermore, including IT, operations,
transformation, marketing and digital as well as building and
developing the retail and SME savings operations. Paul also has
previous experience as CEO of a FinTech new banking venture,
GKBK Limited. Paul is an Associate of the Chartered Institute
of Bankers.
Long-term contributions
Paul’s career has given him a wide range of experiences and
responsibilities, including IT, operations, transformation,
marketing and digital as well as building and developing retail
and SME savings operations. His insight into banking, and
particularly IT and operations, provide a unique viewpoint
that complements the Board and the Committees he serves
well. His broad experience positions him well as Chair of the
Risk Committee.
Other appointments include
Paul is currently a Non-Executive Director at Ashman Finance
Limited, a company currently seeking a UK banking licence.
Committee membership
Nomination
Audit
Risk
Remuneration
Executive
C
Chair
Appointed to the Board on 30 June 2021 and as Consumer
Duty Champion on 27 October 2022. Member of the Audit,
Risk and Nomination Committees.
Skills and experience
Finlay Williamson is a qualified accountant with many years
of banking experience, gained initially at RBS (now NatWest
Group plc) and then at Virgin Money Holdings (UK) plc, where
he was CFO prior to the IPO. Finlay was previously a Non-
Executive Director at Paragon Banking Group PLC, where he
was a member of the Audit Committee and chaired the Group
and Bank Risk Committees.
Long-term contributions
His career has given Finlay experience in retail, SME and auto
finance banking, as well as real estate domain experience.
He also has experience of corporate acquisitions and
subsequent integrations, with significant experience of change
and transformation. Finlay has developed good relationships
with the Financial Conduct Authority and Prudential Regulatory
Authority during his career and is up to date with their priorities
and processes. He also has prior appointments on plc Boards
and Committees. The skills and experience he has gained from
his career mean that he is a strong addition to the Board and
Committees he serves.
Other appointments include
Finlay is currently the Chair of the Audit Committee and
Senior Independent Director of Hampden & Co PLC.
Finlay Williamson
CA FCIBS
Independent
Non-Executive Director
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
73
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Board leadership
Board of Directors
The Board – Roles and responsibilities
The Board has a schedule of matters specifically reserved for its attention, which can be found on our website (www.securetrustbank.com/corpgov) and a summary of the key items can be found below:
• Setting the Group’s purpose, culture
and values
• Establishing the Group’s strategy
and objectives
• Overseeing the Group’s operations
and management
• Setting the Group’s Risk Appetite
and maintaining an effective
system of internal controls and
risk management
• Approving the annual budget
• Approving the capital allocation,
dividend payments and other uses
of capital or changes to the Group’s
capital structure
• Deciding major acquisitions,
disposals and investments
• Approving significant
capital projects, expenditure
and borrowings
• Approval of annual or interim
accounts, and certain regulatory
reports/plans
• Board appointments, the
appointment or removal of the
Company Secretary and ensuring
appropriate succession planning for
the Board and senior management
1.
There is clear division of responsibilities between the Chair, CEO and Senior Independent Director which are set out in writing and available on the Company’s website:
www.securetrustbank.com/corpgov
Executive Committee
• Operates under the authority and
direction of the CEO
• Formulates and proposes strategy
to the Board and oversees the
successful execution thereof
• Oversees the day-to-day
management of the Group
Risk Committee
• Board Committee
comprises four independent
Non-Executive Directors
• Responsible for overseeing all
elements of risk management across
the Group and the oversight of the
ICAAP and ILAAP and the Group’s
Compliance function
Read further information on its
activities on page 90
Remuneration Committee
• Board Committee comprises
three independent Non-Executive
Directors and the Board Chair who
was independent on appointment
• Responsible for overseeing
the remuneration of Executive
Directors, senior management and
Group-wide remuneration policies
Read further information on its
activities on page 94
Nomination Committee
• Board Committee comprises
all independent Non-Executive
Directors and is chaired by the
Chair of the Board
• Recommends changes to the
structure of the Board, oversees
succession planning for the Board
and senior management
Read further information on its
activities on page 80
Audit Committee
• Board Committee
comprises three independent
Non-Executive Directors
• Responsible for overseeing
financial reporting and external
and internal audit
Read further information on its
activities on page 83
Chief Executive Officer (‘CEO’)¹
• Proposes the strategy and ensures
its execution
• Runs the business within the
delegated authorities, risk
management and internal
control frameworks
• Builds and maintains an effective
management team
Non-Executive Chair¹
• Leads the Board and is responsible
for its overall effectiveness and
good governance practices
• Works with management and
Independent Non-Executive
Directors to develop and
implement the Group’s purpose,
strategy and culture
• Engages with stakeholders and
ensures their views are understood
by the Board and decisions
consider their interests
Chief Financial Officer (‘CFO’)
• All aspects of financial and capital
reporting and the integrity thereof
• Supports the CEO in the execution
of the strategy
• Leads on financial and
capital planning
Senior Independent Director¹
• Acts as a sounding board for
the Chair
• Leads the Chair’s performance
appraisal and succession
• Available to shareholders and Board
members, should they have concerns
not resolved through normal channels
Independent Non-Executive
Directors
• Contribute to, and constructively
challenge, management on the
development and implementation of
the strategy and firm’s culture
• Establish the Board’s risk appetite and
monitor the control framework
• Oversee the achievement by
management of the purpose and
strategic aims of the Group
• Constitute the Board’s
governance committees
Executive Risk Committee
Responsible for the day-to-day management of all elements
of the Group’s risk management and compliance
Assets and Liabilities Committee
Responsible for implementing and controlling the
liquidity and asset and liability management
Strategic Change and Investment Committee
Responsible for reviewing and approving strategic change
and investments (within the parameters set by the Board)
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
74
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Governance framework
The Board held 10 scheduled meetings in 2024 and eight
additional meetings were held to consider certain matters
that were urgent or needed consideration before the next
scheduled Board meeting. The Board also held two separate
one-day strategy sessions, which were attended by all
Directors and members of senior management as appropriate.
The Directors’ attendance at Board and Committee meetings
is detailed on page 68 and the meetings Directors were unable
to attend were all arranged on short notice. Should a Director
be unable to attend a meeting, they review all of the papers
and raise any questions in advance of the meeting. The Chair
engages with the absent Director prior to, and post, the
meeting to ensure their views are represented at the meeting
and that they are briefed on the meeting outcomes. The Chair
meets with the Non-Executive Directors in a short session prior
to each Board meeting and engages regularly with all Directors
outside of formal meetings. Non-Executive Directors have also
met with senior members of management on an individual
basis. The Senior Independent Director meets with other
Directors to evaluate the Chair’s performance.
At each meeting, the Board receives an update from the CEO
and CFO, which includes a detailed management information
pack providing an overview of Company and business unit
performance. The Committee Chairs, including the Chair of the
Employee Council, and the Consumer Duty Champion provide
updates to the Board at meetings. Various members of the
firm’s senior management team attend part, or all of, the Board
meetings, and this includes the General Counsel, who attends
all meetings to advise on legal and regulatory considerations.
A summary of the principal items considered during the
year and their outcomes are detailed in the table below,
together with the strategic priorities and stakeholder
groups these discussions related to. The Board have also
approved documents such as the Group’s results, ICAAP,
ILAAP and Recovery Plan and Resolution Pack and certain
material contracts.
Items considered
Outcome
Stakeholder
group
Strategic priorities
(See key on page 76)
Strategic
Target operating
model review
The Board approved a change in the operating model of the Group, with a move from federated individual business units to a Group
centralised model. This delivered important benefits including reducing complexity and risk, providing a consistent service to clients
across business units and reducing operating costs.
C
E
S
R
Vehicle Finance
deep-dive
The Board has undertaken a deep-dive review into the Vehicle Finance business and approved some refinements to the strategy,
designed to improve business performance and return on equity, including a refocus to specific segments within the market.
S
C
E
B
Collections
The Board continued to oversee the performance of collections in Vehicle Finance following the FCA’s BiFD review. This has included
the steps taken to enhance customer outcomes, provide redress and the additional resources deployed to increase collections activity.
While there has been progress in this area, the Board will continue to focus on this and the wider collections strategy during 2025.
C
S
R
Dividend policy
The Board approved a new progressive dividend policy, which was effective from the Company’s 2024 AGM. In developing the revised
policy, the Board considered feedback from shareholders, including the need to provide further certainty on expected dividend levels
and the ability of the Company to deploy capital for investment for growth. The revised dividend policy provides shareholders with
assurance that dividends will not be lower than the previous year and is more sustainable, enabling further investment in the business.
S
Approval of 2025 budget
and funding plan
The Board reviewed and challenged the annual budget and funding plan for 2025. A number of changes to management’s proposed
budget were requested and incorporated into the final budget, which was then signed off by the Board.
S
E
R
IT strategy
Following the implementation of the new operating model, the Board reviewed initial considerations of a holistic Group IT strategy.
The Board agreed with the direction of travel and emphasised the need to execute on the Group’s revised data strategy as a key priority.
The Board will continue to focus on this during 2025.
C
E
S
Environmental, social and
governance (‘ESG’) strategy
The Board approved minor changes to the ESG strategy with a greater focus on education, skills and training initiatives, particularly
through our partnerships with local educational institutions, and consideration of responsible use of Artificial Intelligence.
C
E
S
R
W
Industry M&A
The Board received updates on developments within the industry, particularly in relation to M&A and consolidation in the sector.
S
E
Term Funding Scheme for
Small and Medium-Sized
Enterprise (‘TFSME’)
The Board reviewed and approved management’s plan to repay the Bank of England’s TFSME. The Company has already made good
progress in repaying TFSME and the Board also considered the key risks to the plan and management actions to mitigate these risks
and ensure repayment within the required timescales. Any deviation from the proposed plan will be escalated to the Board.
S
R
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
75
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Corporate Governance report
Board activities
Corporate Governance report
Board activities
Key
C
Customers
S
Shareholders
B
Business partners
Simplify
Leverage networks
E
Employees
R
Regulators
W
Communities and society
Enhance customer
experience
Enabled by technology
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
76
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Items considered
Outcome
Stakeholder
group
Strategic priorities
Performance
Business unit spotlights
At each meeting the Board receives an update from individual business units on a rotational basis. These updates cover the
performance of the business unit, growth plans and pipeline, strategic initiatives, customers, competitive landscape and the
management team.
C
E
S
CEO and CFO updates
At each meeting the Board receives updates from the CEO and CFO, which include detailed information on the performance of
the Group and each business unit, information on key stakeholder groups and developments impacting them, updates on strategic
priorities and key projects and information on any industry and competitor developments.
C
E
S
B
R
Update on commissions
The Board received regular updates on the legal and regulatory developments involving motor finance commissions. Following the
Court of Appeal’s judgment on motor finance commissions, the Board approved a pause in writing new motor finance business while
appropriate updates were made to the Group’s systems and processes over a three day period. The Board have considered various
scenarios, potential impacts to the Group and management actions, which are all dependent on the outcome of the ongoing legal
and regulatory processes.
C
S
E
B
R
Governance
Shareholder
perception study
The Board commissioned an independent shareholder perceptions study to provide further insight to the views of shareholders.
Following this, the Board has agreed to increase the level of segmental reporting to provide shareholders with greater information
on the performance of the individual business units operated by the Group.
S
Culture
The Board received updates from the Chief People Officer on the Group’s culture with a focus on the results of the employee
engagement survey, related management actions and employee dashboards. The Board also reviewed a deep-dive on employee
well-being, absences across the Group and initiatives in place to support our people.
E
S
R
Talent and succession
The Board reviewed the Group’s talent management framework, the talent across the Group and management’s succession plans for
key roles. The Board challenged the succession plans and the need to develop further diverse talent within the Group. It was noted that,
particularly due to the changes within the Group’s operating model, this would continue to be a focus during 2025.
E
S
Board appointment
The Board has focused on succession planning for key Board roles and the appropriate refreshment of the Board. In October, in line
with the recommendation of the Nomination Committee, the Board approved the appointment of Julie Hopes as a Non-Executive
Director, Chair designate of the Remuneration Committee and a member of the Nomination and Audit Committees. At the same time,
the Board also appointed Victoria Mitchell to the Risk Committee as also recommended by the Nomination Committee.
E
S
R
ESG updates
The Board received regular updates on the Group’s ESG strategy and including a review of the ESG dashboard, which tracks our
progress across a number of key metrics in line with our ESG strategy, including climate action, acting responsibly, equity, diversity and
inclusion, customer trust, education and skills, and communities and charities.
C
E
S
R
W
S.172 legal duties
Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 requires the Directors
to act in the way that they consider, in good faith, would be
most likely to promote the success of the Company for the
benefit of its members as a whole, and in doing so have regard
(among other matters) to:
i. the likely consequences of any decision in the long term;
ii. the interests of the Company’s employees;
iii. the need to foster the Company’s business relationships
with suppliers, customers and others;
iv. the impact of the Company’s operations on the community
and the environment;
v. the desirability of the Company maintaining a reputation
for high standards of business conduct; and
vi. the need to act fairly as between members of the Company.
How we consider stakeholder interests
The Company’s section 172 statement of compliance can
be found on page 44, together with an overview of our
stakeholders, their priorities, how we engage with them and
outcomes for each stakeholder Group.
The Board considers stakeholder interests and views
and discusses how any decisions will impact the different
stakeholder groups. Our new Executive Summary template
includes dedicated summary sections on customer and
other stakeholder considerations, to ensure relevant issues
are identified and escalated for Board review and challenge.
Stakeholder interests need to be embedded across all levels of
the organisation to help to ensure the appropriate escalation
of stakeholder considerations through the Group’s governance
framework. Our culture, values, governance framework and
training all help to support this.
Stakeholders can have different and sometimes competing
interests, priorities and views, and these need to be balanced
with each other and within the wider duty of the Board to
promote the long-term sustainable success of the Company
and act in accordance with our regulatory obligations. Not all
decisions can deliver the desired outcomes for all stakeholders.
Detailed below is an overview of how stakeholder interests
have been considered in two key decisions taken by the
Board during 2024.
Introduction of a new dividend policy
The Board considered the Group’s current and forecast
capital position, forecast business performance, the
Group’s liquidity profile and the macroeconomic
environment. Directors considered different potential
options with the aim of developing a more sustainable
dividend policy, which appropriately balanced the need
to invest in the business with returns for shareholders.
The Board considered the views of shareholders and
sought feedback from advisers in developing the
revised policy.
The Board approved a move to a progressive dividend
policy, which means dividend payments will not be
less than the previous year and was announced with
the 2023 Annual Results in March 2024. The revised
policy is more sustainable; enabling the Company to
deploy capital to pursue its growth strategy, providing
shareholders with further certainty on the level of
dividend payments and enables year-on-year growth
in the dividend amounts paid to shareholders.
Implementation of a revised operating model
The Board has held several discussions on the need to
optimise the Group’s operating model, which primarily
operated on a federated basis in each business unit.
The Directors considered the potential benefits of
the move to a centralised operating model, which
would enable greater consistency of service to clients
across business units, reduce complexity and risk
across the Group and drive efficiencies. While there
were a number of benefits in implementing the
revised operating model, there were difficult decisions
impacting our employees. After careful consideration,
the Board agreed that proposed changes would help to
drive the long-term sustainable success of the business
for the benefit of its members and other stakeholders
and deliver benefits to our customers.
The Group consulted with employees on the
proposed changes and feedback was provided to
the Board. Throughout the consultation employees’
views were considered and proposals developed
where appropriate. The Board oversaw the support
provided to employees and the Remuneration
Committee approved the good leaver status for
departing employees.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
77
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Corporate Governance report
Stakeholder considerations in our decision making
Outcomes
The Board performance review demonstrated that the Board
was operating effectively and that there had been good
progress across a number of the themes identified in 2023.
Respondents particularly highlighted the additional focus on
strategic discussions and monitoring strategic performance
in Board meetings. There had also been an improvement in
ensuring the Board works at the right level of detail and focuses
on the big picture. Whilst there had been improvements in
talent management, particularly the roll-out of an executive
development centre in partnership with an executive
search firm, this will be an area of continued focus for the
Nomination Committee, especially in light of the structural
changes across the organisation. The performance review
specifically commended the level of challenge and debate
within the Board, which was undertaken in a constructive
and collaborative manner and consideration of the external
economic environment and of stakeholders in decision making.
There were an number of actions and areas identified for
consideration in 2025:
Provider selection
Process approval
Questionnaires
Reporting
A small number of platform providers
submitted proposals for the annual
performance review, with the Company
Secretary making a recommendation
to the Nomination Committee who
approved the final selection.
The Nomination Committee provided
input to, and agreed the proposed
process for, the performance review,
including the scope of reporting
and the content of the individual
questionnaires for the Board
and its Committees.
The final questionnaires were
made available to Directors on the
Independent Audit Ltd platform and
duly completed by the Board and
key stakeholders. These included
questions from previous years, to
identify trends and measure progress,
and included additional questions of
specific relevance for 2024.
Following completion of the
questionnaires, the Company
Secretary, with oversight from the Chair,
prepared reports for the Board and
each of its Committees, which were
discussed at relevant meetings and
formal action plans agreed. The Chair
also met with individual Directors, and
the Senior Independent Director with
the Chair, to discuss performance.
Board performance review
The Board undertook an internal performance review in relation to 2024. An overview of the process followed and the outcomes of the review can be found below. The last externally facilitated review
was undertaken in 2022.
• Further strengthen relations between Board and
management and broaden the Board’s exposure to talent
across the organisation. This was primarily through more
informal engagement opportunities outside of Board
meetings. In addition it was agreed to hold Board meetings
more frequently in different offices, to provide greater
exposure to talent across the business.
• Bring greater external insights and expertise into the
boardroom, particularly focusing on the competitive
landscape and industry developments.
• Develop an overarching cultural dashboard, linked to the
Company’s values to amalgamate the existing management
information and enhance the Board’s oversight of culture
embeddedness across the organisation.
• Post the structural changes develop a revised people
strategy to ensure appropriate recruitment, retention
and development of talent aligned to our strategy.
• Develop a report to track and provide further
information on strategic initiatives.
Training
Directors receive training and education through external
courses and seminars and also through Board-specific training
sessions, which are delivered by external and internal experts.
Such sessions held during the year have included Basel 3.1,
Senior Management Responsibilities, Health and Safety,
Directors’ responsibilities in context of corporate activity,
regulatory changes, and ESG. All Directors have access to the
services of the Company Secretary, who advises the Board
on governance matters, and Directors are able to obtain
independent advice, at the Company’s expense, where this
is necessary to discharge their duties effectively.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
78
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Corporate Governance report
Board effectiveness
Induction process
New Directors are supported in their role by a formal tailored induction process, which is designed to provide a comprehensive introduction to the Company to enable them to discharge effectively
their duties. The induction programme comprises meetings with key senior management and external advisers/stakeholders, together with a tailored documentation pack and all Non-Executive
Directors are provided access to previous Board and Committee packs and minutes. During the year, two inductions were held for Jim Brown and Julie Hopes and a summary of the induction
programme is provided below. As both roles hold Senior Management responsibilities a formal documented handover and meetings were held to transition the Senior Management functions
in line with the Group’s Senior Management Handover Policy. As part of his induction, Jim Brown also held meetings with our major shareholders.
Meeting with
Topics for discussion
Related documents
Board and Nomination
Committee Chair
Recent key Board discussions, decisions and priorities for the Board and Board succession
plans. Views on the Group and management and views of key stakeholders.
Previous Board and Nomination Committee packs and
minutes and Board governance documents.
CEO
Overview of the Group’s purpose, strategy, values and culture. Recent developments within the
business and views of stakeholders.
Group strategy and values, shareholder register and
perceptions study.
CFO
The Group’s financial performance, financial plans, prudential risks and recent developments
across the CFO’s areas of responsibility.
Current budget, funding plan, latest management information
pack and various prudential risk documents.
Chair of Audit Committee
Recent discussions of the Audit Committee and key areas of focus.
Previous Committee packs and minutes, and external and
internal audit documentation (as in relevant sections below).
Chair of Remuneration Committee
Recent discussions of the Remuneration Committee and key areas of focus.
Previous Committee packs, minutes and remuneration policies.
Chair of Risk Committee
Recent discussions of the Risk Committee and key areas of focus.
Previous Committee packs, minutes and risk documentation
(as in risk section below).
Business Unit Managing Directors
Overview of business, route to market, customers, the team and business partners. Update on
recent business performance, initiatives and key priorities and, if relevant, Consumer Duty.
Latest business spotlights reports, performance reporting and
Consumer Duty dashboards.
Chief Operating Officer
Overview of team and areas of responsibility together with key priorities and challenges across
each of the functions and updates on key projects.
Latest operational reports and project updates.
Chief Risk Officer
Group’s risk appetite, principal risks and Enterprise-Wide Risk Management Framework
(‘EWRMF’). Overview of the team and key priorities and challenges.
Risk appetite statement, risk register, EWRMF and recent
risk reports.
Company Secretary
Overview of the Group’s legal structure, governance, share plans and operational matters for
the Board and its Committees. Key priorities and areas of focus for the Company Secretariat.
Group structure, governance documentation, previous Board
and Committee packs, and share plan summaries and rules.
Chief People Officer and Head
of Reward
Overview of firm’s culture, employee benefits and structures. Recent employee initiatives and
key priorities for the team.
Remuneration policies and people dashboards.
Chief Compliance Officer
Overview of compliance monitoring plan and recent compliance reporting. Key priorities and
challenges for the team.
Compliance monitoring plan and recent reports and
Senior Management responsibilities map.
General Counsel
Executive governance structure and sustainability strategy. Overview of the legal team and its
key priorities and challenges.
Governance Manual and ESG strategy.
Chief Internal Auditor
Internal Audit plan and progress thereon including summary of recently issued reports and
outstanding management actions. Views of control environment and cultural alignment.
Overview of Internal Audit structure and team (co-sourced function).
Internal Audit Plan, recent Internal Audit reports,
and the Internal Audit Charter.
External Auditors
Introduction and overview of team. Update on the external audit plan including key
risks, engagement with management and views on the Group’s culture and internal
control environment.
External Audit Plan.
Remuneration Consultants
Update on and views of remuneration policies and practices across the Group.
Remuneration policies.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
79
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Corporate Governance report
Board effectiveness
I am pleased to present the report of the Nomination
Committee (the ‘Committee’) for the year ended 31 December
2024, which provides an overview of the Committee and the
work it has undertaken during the year.
Board and Committee composition
It has been another busy year for the Committee with a focus
on Board succession planning, in consideration of the tenure of
some of our Non-Executive Directors, and the need to ensure a
smooth transition of responsibilities for key roles and sufficient
continuity on our Committees.
In October, we announced the appointment of Julie Hopes as
a Non-Executive Director and a member of the Remuneration,
Audit and Nomination Committees with immediate effect.
Julie was also appointed Chair designate of the Remuneration
Committee and, following the receipt of regulatory approval,
was appointed Chair of the Remuneration Committee on
31 December 2024. On the same date, Victoria Stewart, who
was entering her ninth year on the Board, stepped down from
the Board and as Chair of the Remuneration Committee.
Further information on the recruitment process for Julie Hopes
can be found on page 81.
We also recommended to the Board the appointment of
Victoria Mitchell to our Risk Committee in October 2024, which
has broadened the depth of talent and will provide future
continuity in the membership of the Risk Committee.
Board diversity
The Committee and the Board recognise the benefits of
diversity in its widest sense, and this has continued to be an
area of focus. We have adopted a revised Board Diversity Policy
during the year, which can be found on page 82 and better
articulates the benefits of diversity in achieving our purpose,
and for our colleagues and other stakeholders. We have set
ambitions for diversity aligned to the Listing Rule requirements,
and as at 31 December 2024, we had exceeded two of these.
The Listing Rules state that 40% of the Board should be
comprised of female directors and there should be one female
director in a Board leadership position. We have achieved
gender parity on the Board and have two female Directors in
Board leadership positions, namely our Chief Financial Officer
and Senior Independent Director. However, we do not have
a Director on the Board from an ethnic minority, and while
this was part of the considerations for the recent recruitment
process, we did not identify a suitable candidate with the
specific skills and experience required for the role. This will be
a key consideration in future recruitment, with external search
agencies required to provide short-lists with appropriate
diversity. In line with our Diversity Policy, the key priority will
be to recruit the best candidate with the required skills and
experience to undertake the role. Further details of the Board
and Senior Management diversity can be found on page 69
and our wider diversity tables on page 51.
Management succession
The Committee and the Board as a whole have continued to
oversee succession plans for our Executive Committee and
this will continue to be an area of focus into 2025, particularly in
light of the organisational changes made across the Company
during the year. There will be a focus on roles below the
Executive Committee and developing talent throughout the
organisation. As Chair of the Committee and Board, I met
with our new Managing Director, Business Finance as part of
the selection process. This was an important recruitment and
part of the succession planning for the Executive Committee,
as our Managing Directors of Commercial Finance and Real
Estate Finance announced their retirement plans. We were
pleased to appoint Luke Jooste into the role, with effect from
1 March 2025 and to promote internal candidates to the roles
of managing directors of each of the specific business units,
demonstrating the strength of talent within the organisation.
Outlook
Two key priorities for the Committee in 2025 will be continued
Board succession planning, to ensure suitable refreshment of
the Board and its Committees in line with good governance.
We will also focus on diversity across the organisation, how this
links with our wider strategy, how we drive improvements in
diversity across senior management and develop the diverse
talent we have within the organisation.
I would like to thank the members of the Nomination
Committee, who have worked diligently to help execute on the
Committee’s responsibilities, and to those in the management
team who continue to support the work of the Committee.
Jim Brown
Chair
“The Committee focused on
Board succession planning, in
consideration of the tenure of
some of our Non-Executive Directors,
and the need to ensure a smooth
transition of responsibilities for
key roles and sufficient continuity
on our Committees.”
Jim Brown
Chair
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
80
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Nomination Committee report
Statement by the Chair of the Nomination Committee
Committee Governance
The Committee met six times during the year and members’
attendance is summarised in the table on page 68.
Meetings of the Committee were attended during the year by
the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and Chief
People Officer to present their reports and answer questions
from the Committee as required.
The Chair of the Nomination Committee reports to the
Board on the outcome of Committee meetings and any
recommendations arising from the Committee. The Company
Secretary, or their alternate, acts as Secretary to the
Nomination Committee. Committee materials and minutes
from the meetings are made available, as appropriate, to all
Board members.
The UK Governance Code states that a majority of members
of the Committee should be independent Non-Executive
Directors. The Committee membership, which is comprised
of all of the independent Non-Executive Directors on the
Board and chaired by the Board Chair who was independent
on appointment, complied with this Code provision
throughout 2024.
Key responsibilities
The Nomination Committee is responsible for considering the
structure, size and composition of the Board; the retirement
and appointment of Directors, including Executive Directors;
succession planning for the Board and senior management,
focused on the development of a diverse succession
pipeline; and making recommendations to the Board on
these matters. The Committee’s roles and responsibilities
are covered in its Terms of Reference, which were reviewed
during the year and are available on our corporate website
(
www.securetrustbank.com/corpgov
).
Key activities during the year
Board and committee composition
The Committee reviewed the composition of the Board
and its Committees during the year, focusing on the skills,
experience and diversity of the Directors and taking into
account all relevant governance requirements and best
practice. The Committee agreed that, while the structure
and composition of the Board was appropriate for the
Company’s current needs, there needed to be a focus on
Board and Committee succession planning, particularly in
relation to key roles within the Board and the need to ensure
appropriate leadership and continuity in the membership of
the Board’s Committees.
Board succession and recruitment
Following the review of the Board and Committee composition,
the Committee agreed to start recruitment processes for two
new Directors, with an immediate focus on the succession
planning for the Chair of the Remuneration Committee,
Victoria Stewart, who was entering her ninth year on the Board.
The Nomination Committee appointed Per Ardua Associates
Limited (‘Per Ardua’), who had successfully led the search for
a new Chair of the Board in 2024 (as detailed in last year’s
Nomination Committee report). Per Ardua is a member of
the Association of Executive Search Consultants (‘AESC’) and
is committed to the AESC’s Code of Professional Practice.
With the exception of previous recruitment activities on behalf
of the Group, Per Ardua had no other connections to the
Company, Senior Management or the individual Directors prior
to their appointment.
The Committee and Per Ardua developed candidate profiles,
with due consideration of the Board’s skills matrix and required
experience for the roles. In relation to the Remuneration
Committee role, Per Ardua presented a long-list of diverse
candidates, which was reviewed by the Committee and
developed into a short list. The Committee established an
interview panel consisting of the Chair, the Senior Independent
Director and Chair of the Risk Committee, who also sits on the
Remuneration Committee, which regularly provided feedback
to the Committee. Other Directors and key stakeholders
met with the preferred candidate, prior to the Committee
recommending the appointment of Julie Hopes to the Board.
During 2025, the Committee will focus on the recruitment of a
new Non-Executive Director to ensure appropriate succession
planning is in place for key Board roles.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
81
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Nomination Committee report
Conflicts of interest
The Company’s Articles of Association permit the Board to
consider and authorise situations where a Director has an
actual or potential conflict of interest in relation to the Group.
All Directors are required to disclose to the Board any outside
interests that may conflict with their duties to the Group
(including any related party transactions). The Board has a
formal system to record potential conflicts and, if appropriate,
to authorise them. Conflicts of interest are included as a
standing agenda item at each Board and Committee meeting.
When authorising conflicts or potential conflicts of interest, the
Director concerned may not take part in the decision making.
Director re-election
In line with governance requirements, all Directors stand for
annual re-election at the Company’s Annual General Meeting.
Each Director’s performance, including the results of the
annual Board performance review, independence, potential
conflicts and ability to commit sufficient time to the Company
is considered by the Committee, which recommends to
the Board their re-election. Each Director also undertakes a
detailed fitness and propriety assessment each year.
Board and Committee performance review
The Committee reviewed the proposed process for the annual
Board and Committee performance review, including the use
of a third-party platform, scope of reporting and provided
feedback on the individual questionnaires. Details of the
Board and Committee performance review process can be
found on page 78. The 2024 Committee performance review
demonstrated that the Committee was operating effectively
and that there had been good progress in a number of areas
since the last performance review undertaken in respect of
the 2023 year. Respondents generally felt that there had been
improvements in discussion and debate among Committee
members and in the Committee’s oversight of the skills and
experience required for the Board. There were a number of
areas identified for further action during the course of 2025,
including:
• enhancing oversight of executive capability, succession and
talent development including consideration of initiatives
to drive diversity. This was particularly identified due to the
changes in senior leadership and organisational restructure;
and
• develop a Board training plan for 2025, which includes
mandatory training being undertaken online, in accordance
with the general employee population and greater focus on
external expertise in evolving areas relevant to the business.
Board Diversity Policy
The Board is committed to promoting diversity, equity
and inclusion in the boardroom and throughout the
Group. The Board believes that promoting a culture that
is diverse, inclusive and equitable creates a supportive,
enjoyable and healthy working environment for our
colleagues. It also enables the Group to make the
most of the different backgrounds, experience and
perspectives of our colleagues and best supports our
customers to achieve their ambitions.
The Board is supportive of this culture and believes that
a diverse Board brings a broad range of perspectives,
insights and challenges which drives effective decision
making and enables us to better respond to our
stakeholder’s needs.
Appointments to the Board will be subject to a formal,
rigorous and transparent procedure. Appointments and
succession plans will be based on merit and objective
criteria, recognising the benefits that diversity,
in its widest interpretation, brings to the Board
including in relation to gender, ethnicity, age, sexual
orientation, disability, neurodiversity, socio-economic,
educational and professional background, and
geographic provenance.
When reviewing the Board composition, conducting
searches for Board candidates, and making
recommendations to the Board on appointments, the
Nomination Committee will have due consideration of
the benefits of diversity including, but not limited to, the
factors outlined above, in order to enable the Board to
discharge its duties and responsibilities effectively.
As part of the annual performance review of the
effectiveness of the Board, Board Committees and
individual Directors, the Nomination Committee will
consider the balance of skills, experience, independence,
knowledge and the diversity representation of the Board,
how the Board works together as a unit, and other factors
relevant to its effectiveness.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
82
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Nomination Committee report
I am pleased to present the report of the Audit Committee
(the ‘Committee’) for the financial year ended 31 December
2024. The report is designed to provide stakeholders with
information on the Committee, including how the Committee
has discharged its responsibilities during the year.
I would like to touch on changes to the Committee
membership during the year. Victoria Stewart stepped down
from the Board and her membership of the Committee from
31 December 2024. On behalf of the Committee, I would like
to extend our thanks to Victoria for her valuable contributions
during her tenure. We were delighted to welcome Julie
Hopes as a new member of the Committee in October 2024.
Julie brings a wealth of knowledge and experience in finance,
accounting and governance that make her a strong addition to
the Committee.
A key responsibility of the Committee is to safeguard the
integrity of the Group’s financial statements including
monitoring of the Company’s financial reporting process.
The Committee conducted a detailed review of the Group’s
Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December
2024 as well as the half-year ended 30 June 2024. An important
part of this has been the Committee’s rigorous review and
challenge of the judgements applied in the Group’s expected
credit loss IFRS 9 models, process of changes to the models,
the validation of those models’ outputs and, particularly in
2024, the implementation of new models. This included a
dedicated deep dive into model governance and the controls
in place to ensure the effectiveness of the models.
The Committee considered the potential impacts on the
Group, arising from legal and regulatory developments within
the motor finance sector, particularly commission payments.
These developments, further information on which can be
found in Note 29 on page 162, could lead to redress payable
to customers and associated operational costs. We have
therefore recognised a provision in the Annual Accounts for the
year ended 31 December 2024, in the amount of £6.4 million.
This has been reviewed and challenged by the Committee and
further information on this can be found on page 86.
The Committee has continued to oversee the effectiveness
and independence of the Group’s External Auditor, Deloitte
LLP, who are approaching the conclusion of their seventh year
of appointment. Our lead audit partner, Neil Reed, will step
down from the conclusion of the external audit for the year
ended 31 December 2024, due to the length of time he has
worked on the Company’s external audit. I would like to thank
Neil for his work and the professionalism he has demonstrated
throughout his tenure. Potential candidates for the lead
external audit partner were considered by the Committee and
we are pleased to confirm Kieren Cooper will be appointed
lead external audit partner for the year ending 31 December
2025, subject to Deloitte’s reappointment by shareholders.
The Committee remain satisfied that Deloitte LLP continues to
be effective and, therefore, recommends their reappointment
as External Auditor, which will be proposed to shareholders at
the forthcoming AGM.
Another key responsibility of the Committee is the oversight
of the Internal Audit function and the Committee receives
regular reports from the Chief Internal Auditor on progress
against the internal audit annual plan, which is approved
by the Committee, the outcomes of recent Internal Audits,
updates on management actions and Internal Audit’s view
of the effectiveness of the control environment.
Looking forward, the key priorities for the Committee in 2025,
in addition to its core responsibilities, will be to continue to
monitor the legal and regulatory environment relating to
motor finance commissions, to ensure a smooth transition
to our new lead external audit partner and oversee the
implementation of elements of the 2024 UK Governance Code,
particularly in relation to the assessment of the effectiveness
of internal controls.
Finally, I express my gratitude to those who have supported
the Committee throughout the year. We have continued to
receive valued support from internal and external stakeholders
including the Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Financial Officer,
senior members of the Finance team and the External Auditors.
I hope to be able to meet with shareholders and discuss the
Committee’s activities, in person, at the AGM on 15 May 2025.
Ann Berresford
Chair of the Audit Committee
“The Committee considered the
potential impacts on the Group,
arising from legal and regulatory
developments within the motor
finance sector.”
Ann Berresford
Chair of the Audit Committee
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
83
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Audit Committee report
Statement by the Chair of the Audit Committee
Committee Governance
The Audit Committee met six times during the year and
members’ attendance is summarised in the table on page 68.
Meetings of the Committee were regularly attended during
the year by the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Internal Auditor,
Company Secretary, the Chief Financial Officer and senior
members of the Finance team, as well as the lead external
audit partner and senior members of the External Audit team.
Other members of the Board also attended meetings at the
invitation of the Committee. The Committee maintains a close
and open dialogue with the External Auditor and Chief Internal
Auditor, routinely holding private sessions with them following
Committee meetings and as required between meetings.
The Chair of the Audit Committee reports to the Board on the
outcome of Committee meetings and any recommendations
arising from the Committee. The Company Secretary, or
their alternate, acts as Secretary to the Audit Committee.
Committee materials and minutes from the meetings are
made available, as appropriate, to all Board members.
The Committee membership complied with the Code provision
for independence throughout 2024. Both Ann Berresford and
Finlay Williamson are considered by the Board to have recent
and relevant financial experience and the Audit Committee, as
a whole, has competence relevant to the sector in which the
Group operates.
Key responsibilities
The Audit Committee assists the Board in, among other
matters, discharging its responsibilities for regulatory reporting,
financial reporting, including monitoring and reviewing
the integrity of the Company’s annual and interim financial
statements, reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness
and independence of the External Auditors, including
advising on their appointment, reappointment, removal and
remuneration. The Committee also oversees the effectiveness
of the Company’s internal audit activities, internal controls
and risk management systems including the Company’s
whistleblowing framework. The ultimate responsibility for
reviewing and approving the Annual Report and Accounts
and the Interim Report remains with the Board. The Audit
Committee reviews the Annual Report before submission to
the Board for approval, and will consider whether taken as a
whole, it is fair, balanced, and understandable and provides the
information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s
position, performance, business model and strategy. The Audit
Committee assists the Board in reaching its conclusions by
reviewing significant financial reporting judgements, including
the going concern assumption and long-term viability of the
business and any material uncertainties, and assessing whether
the narrative reporting in the Strategic Report accurately
reflects the financial statements.
The Audit Committee is supported in this assessment by an
effective external audit, the assessment of internal controls
by internal audit and by challenging management on the
integrity of financial and narrative statements.
Items considered by the Committee
during the reporting period
Meetings of the Audit Committee are scheduled to align
with key dates in the Group’s financial reporting cycle.
The Committee maintains a schedule of meetings with a
forward-look agenda that facilitates the even distribution of
items and the effective management of Committee time, as
required additional Committee meetings may be convened
to consider items as they arise.
Items considered
Outcomes
Financial reporting
For further information see page 86.
Annual and interim reporting
The Committee reviewed and recommended the approval of the Annual and Interim Reports to the Board, including that there were effective financial controls
operating across the Group to safeguard their integrity and the accounting judgements and assumptions used in their preparation.
The Committee reviewed and suggested changes to the annual and interim reports to ensure they provided a true and fair view of the Company’s position and that
they were fair, balanced and understandable.
Distributable reserves
Prior to the declaration of the interim and final dividends, the Audit Committee considered whether the Company had sufficient distributable reserves to pay a
dividend and confirmed to the Board that there were sufficient distributable reserves.
External Audit
For further information see page 88.
External Audit reporting
The Committee received regular reporting from the External Auditors on the external audit plan, progress thereon and any matters identified in the course of the
external audit.
External Audit
process effectiveness
The Committee oversaw the relationship with the External Auditors and assessed the effectiveness of the external audit process ensuring that the audit is conducted in
accordance with all applicable requirements. The Committee found the External Auditors to be effective and recommended their reappointment to shareholders.
Independence of
External Auditors
At each meeting the Committee considered the independence of the External Auditors including consideration of non-audit related engagements and expenditure
and ensured it remained satisfied that the External Auditors continued to be independent.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
84
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Audit Committee report
Items considered
Outcomes
External Audit fee
The Committee reviewed and challenged the proposed fees for the external audit of the Company and its subsidiaries. This year’s audit fee is £1,223,525
(2023: £968,000) such increase primarily driven by increases in the scope of the audit due to the implementation of further IFRS 9 models and additional systems
in place across the Group. Total non-audit fees paid to the External Auditors have decreased to £88,000 (2023: £185,000).
Lead audit partner transition
The Committee considered and approved the appointment of a new lead audit partner for the year ended 31 December 2025 and will oversee the transition to
Kieren Cooper as the Group’s new lead audit partner.
Internal Audit
For further information see page 88.
Internal Audit reporting
At each scheduled meeting, other than the single subject meetings held in January and July, the Committee received a report from Internal Audit, which provided an
update on the internal audit plan, an overview of all internal audit reports issued during the period and an update on identified and outstanding management actions.
All Internal Audit reports are made available to the Board at the time they are finalised. The Committee reviewed the reports and challenged management on any
actions that had been identified as overdue.
Internal Audit plan
The Committee reviewed and approved the internal audit plan, which outlined an appropriate focus on higher risk areas and areas of regulatory focus. The plan
ensures coverage of all major risk areas over a five-year period with coverage of each business unit and an element of credit risk audited each year. The Committee
agreed the Internal Audit plan including the use of co-sourced providers.
Internal Audit effectiveness
A formal review of the effectiveness of the Internal Audit function was undertaken during the year. The Committee noted and agreed with the conclusion that, overall,
the Internal Audit function was effective and that no change was required to meet the CIIA Performance and Attribute Standards or the recommendations set out in
the 2013 Code on Effective Internal Audit in Financial Services (updated 2021).
Internal Audit charter
In 2024, the Committee reviewed and agreed that no changes were currently required but that this would be considered in Q1 2025 following the implementation of
the Institute of Internal Auditors Global Standards. The changes to the Charter to reflect the Institute of Internal Auditors Global Standards has been agreed in March
2025. The Group’s Internal Audit Charter can be found on our website (
www.securetrustbank.com/corpgov
).
Whistleblowing
Whistleblowing arrangements
The Committee Chair as whistleblowing champion ensures, should any whistleblowing reports be received, these are proportionately and independently investigated
and provides regular updates to the Committee on any issues raised. There was one new case during the year (2023: three). The Committee reviewed the Group’s
whistleblowing policy and arrangements, and found these to be effective.
Other
Hedge accounting update
The Committee received an update on the development of two new hedge accounting models used across the Group and noted the benefits of the new models,
which included additional capability to undertake regression testing and improved tracking of amortisation adjustments.
Model governance – deep dive The Committee reviewed the governance in place to oversee model risk management across the Group, which included the processes for the development of
models, and their monitoring and validation. The Committee was comfortable that the model governance in place was appropriate.
Terms of reference
The Committee reviewed its Terms of Reference to ensure they remained up to date and in accordance with best practice. A small number of amendments were approved,
primarily reflecting updates to the internal audit standards. A full copy of the Terms of Reference can be obtained via the Group’s website (
www.securetrustbank.com/corpgov
).
In-Camera meetings
During the year, the Committee held in-camera meetings with:
• the Chief Internal Auditor; and
• the External Audit Partner.
These meetings provided an opportunity for private discussion with the Committee, without other members of management present, and supported, among other
things, the Committee’s assessment of the performance of the External Auditors and Internal Audit.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
85
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Audit Committee report
Financial and regulatory reporting
A key responsibility of the Committee is to ensure the integrity
of the Group’s financial reporting, which includes reviewing
the financial control systems that identify, assess, manage and
monitor financial risks. The Committee has also assessed the
Annual Report and Accounts to confirm that, taken as a whole,
it is fair, balanced and understandable. The Committee reviews
the accounting policies adopted by the Group and challenges
management on areas of estimation and judgement ahead of
recommending the interim and year-end financial statements
to the Board for approval. The Audit Committee has reviewed
the following matters in connection with the annual and interim
financial statements.
Accounting policies, key judgements and assumptions used in preparing interim and annual financial statements
Significant accounting judgements and estimates
IFRS 9 provisions for expected credit losses
Assessment of area of judgement
The Committee has considered updates and overlays to judgements and assumptions to take account of developments in the macroeconomic environment.
STBG has continued to avail of the support of an economic advisory firm in formulating the macroeconomic scenarios and weightings, prior to recommendation
to the Committee and the Audit Committee has continued to use their outputs for this purpose.
In 2024, the Committee reviewed the outputs from the Group’s IFRS 9 models and considered the quantum and rationale for post-model adjustments in ensuring
the adequacy of the levels of impairment provision, including the performance of the Group’s collections activity within Vehicle Finance, following the Financial
Conduct Authority (‘FCA’s’) thematic review regarding borrowers in financial difficulty (‘BiFD’).
Outcome
The discussions on the IFRS 9 provisions was attended by the External Auditors with whom the Committee engaged to understand the results of their audit work.
The Committee reviewed, challenged and approved the IFRS 9 provisions for expected credit losses as presented by management.
Legal and regulatory developments
Assessment of area of judgement
The Committee considered the legal and regulatory developments in relating to motor finance commissions. Further information on which can be found in
Note 29 to the accounts on page 162. The outcome of these developments is uncertain, requiring judgment about the potential for redress being payable to
customers and associated operational costs.
Outcome
The Committee reviewed and challenged the scenario analysis undertaken, including the assumptions and probability weightings used in the scenario analysis
to estimate a potential exposure. The Committee approved the recognition of a provision of £6.4 million for the year ended 31 December 2024, whilst noting
the level of uncertainty of outcomes which could result in a materially higher or lower provision.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
86
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Audit Committee report
Significant accounting matters
Statement of viability and going concern
Assessment of area of judgement
Under UK law and the UK Corporate Governance Code, the Board of Directors are required to opine on the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern and
to include a statement of viability in the Group’s Annual Report and Accounts. The requirement necessitates that the Directors must satisfy themselves as to the
Company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of 12 months from the date of the approval of the financial statements. In addition, the Company
is required to provide a statement of viability, available from page 40, which reports on the viability of the Company over a longer period, with the Company
applying a five-year period.
Outcome
The Committee considered, challenged and approved the Group’s statement of viability, including the period by reference to which viability is assessed, and
the preparation of the annual and interim accounts on a going concern basis. The Committee’s assessment was supported by a number of factors including the
current financial position, the annual business planning and budgeting process, the different financial stress testing exercises and the effective risk management
of the Principal Risks. The Committee considered the legal and regulatory uncertainty in relation to motor finance commissions and their potential impact.
The Committee’s conclusions are taken into account in the Board’s viability statement on pages 40 and 41.
The Committee concluded that it was appropriate to prepare the financial statements on a going concern basis of accounting and that the Company would
remain commercially viable throughout the forecast period of five years.
Presentation of a fair, balanced and understandable Annual Report and Accounts
Assessment of area of judgement
The Committee assessed whether, taken as a whole, the 2024 Annual Report and Accounts was fair, balanced and understandable. To assist with the Committee’s
assessment as to whether the Annual Report and Accounts is fair, balanced and understandable, the Committee receives and discusses papers from management
outlining changes in the application of any accounting policies together with IFRS 9 and other key judgements. The Committee reviewed drafts of the accounts
during the preparation process and near final versions were presented at its March meeting and throughout considered whether the performance and position of
the Group had been described in a fair, balanced and understandable way.
Outcome
The Audit Committee, having reviewed the content of the Annual Report and considering relevant matters including the presentation of material sensitive items,
the representation of significant issues, the consistency of the narrative disclosures in the Strategic Report with the Financial Statements, the overall structure of
the Annual Report and the steps taken to ensure the completeness and accuracy of the matters included, has advised the Board that the 2024 Annual Report
and Accounts include a ‘fair, balanced and understandable’ assessment of the Group and Company’s businesses.
Disclosure of exceptional items
Assessment of area of judgement
The Committee reviewed and questioned management’s proposal to include a number of exceptional items. These are defined as “Items of income or
expenditure that are significant in size and which are not expected to repeat over the short to medium term”. Exceptional items incurred in 2024 amounted
to £9.9 million and related to costs incurred in relation to the:
• Operating model restructure
• FCA’s thematic review regarding BiFD
• Motor finance commissions
Outcome
The Committee challenged management on the overall quantum of these exceptional items, however concluded that they were in-line with the accounting
definition, a view supported by the Group’s External Auditors.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
87
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Audit Committee report
External Audit
At a glance
External Auditors
Deloitte
Lead engagement partner
Neil Reed
Financial period
first appointed
Year ended 31 December 2018
Audit tender last conducted
2017
Lead engagement
partner designate
Kieren Cooper
Lead partner due to rotate
Year ending 31 December 2025
Next audit tender required
Year ending 31 December 2027
Total statutory audit fees
£1,223,525
Total fees for
non-audit services
£88,000
Independence and effectiveness of the
External Auditor
Deloitte LLP has confirmed to the Audit Committee that it
has policies and procedures in place to satisfy the required
standards of objectivity, independence, and integrity, and that
these comply with the Financial Reporting Council’s (‘FRC’)
Ethical Standards for Auditors. Due to the length of time
Neil Reed has worked on the external audit of Secure Trust
Bank PLC, he will step down as lead audit partner following
the FY24 external audit. It is proposed Kieren Cooper will be
appointed the lead external audit partner in respect of the
financial year ending 31 December 2025, subject to Deloitte’s
reappointment by shareholders, and he has shadowed the
FY24 external audit to ensure a smooth transition. The Audit
Committee has considered matters that might impair the
independence of the External Auditor, including the non-audit
fees paid to the External Auditor (as above and detailed in the
Non-audit services section adjacent), and has confirmed that it
was satisfied as to the independence of the external audit firm,
Deloitte LLP.
During 2024, the Committee assessed the effectiveness of
the external audit process for 2023. The capabilities of the
external audit team, their independence and challenge of
management, the scope of the work, the quality of their
communications and fees were all considered. The assessment
also considered the views of the Finance team, Chief Risk
Officer, Chief Internal Auditor and Company Secretariat.
The Committee also considered the FRC’s Audit Quality review
of Deloitte’s audits, noting the improvements from last year’s
review. The Committee concluded that the external audit
process was satisfactory and that the External Auditor was
performing well. The review did not highlight any reason for
the Audit Committee not to recommend their reappointment.
The Committee remain satisfied that Deloitte LLP continues
to be effective and are recommending their reappointment as
External Auditor to shareholders at the forthcoming AGM.
Non-audit services
The Group has agreed a policy on the provision of non-audit
services by its External Auditor. The policy ensures that the
engagement of the External Auditor for such services requires
pre-approval by appropriate levels of management or the Audit
Committee and does not impair the independence of the
External Auditor, and that such engagements are reported to
the Audit Committee on a regular basis. The External Auditor
is only selected for such services when they are best suited to
undertake the work and there is no conflict of interest. The total
of audit and non-audit fees paid to Deloitte during the period
is set out in Note 6 to the Financial Statements on page 142.
The non-audit services fee of £88,000 (2023: £185,000) were
in respect of, but not limited to, the review of the interim
financial statements and work relating to the profit verification.
In the case of each engagement, management considered it
appropriate to engage Deloitte for the work because of their
existing knowledge and experience of the organisation. Non-
audit fees represented 7.19% of audit fees in 2024 and 8.8%
over a three-year rolling period.
Internal Audit
Internal Audit function effectiveness
The Group has an independent Internal Audit function led
by the Chief Internal Auditor, augmented by external subject
matter experts from a panel of internal audit co-source
providers. The Chief Internal Auditor reports to the Chair of the
Audit Committee and they met frequently through the year.
The primary role of the Internal Audit function is to help the
Board and Executives protect the assets, reputation and
sustainability of the Group, by providing independent and
objective assurance on the design and operating effectiveness
of the Group’s governance, risk management and control
framework and processes, following a risk-based approach.
The Committee reviews and approves the internal audit plan
each year, and during the year it oversaw internal audit activity,
including adjustments to the approved plan to respond
to external and internal events and priorities. In approving
the 2025 internal audit plan, the Committee was satisfied
that the team has the appropriate resource to deliver its
plans. The Committee received and considered all reports
issued by the internal audit team. Key themes addressed in
2024 included:
• Operational Resilience and IT;
• Finance, Treasury and Prudential;
• Consumer Duty;
• Customer Lifecycle;
• Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process
and Recovery plan; and
• Regulatory initiatives.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
88
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Audit Committee report
Internal Controls Framework
The Board has overall responsibility for maintaining the Group’s
system of internal control, including financial, operational
and compliance controls, and for reviewing its effectiveness.
This system is designed to manage risk of failure to achieve
business objectives and to provide reasonable assurance
against the risk of material misstatement or loss. The system
of internal control was in place throughout the financial year,
and up to the date of the approval of the Annual Report
and Accounts. The Board, through the Risk Committee,
has confirmed that in reviewing the Annual Report, it has
completed a robust assessment of the Group’s emerging
and principal risks and has included a description of its risk
management framework and principal risks as set out on
pages 30 to 39.
The Board, through the Audit and Risk Committees, reviews
the effectiveness of the internal control framework. The Audit
Committee receives reports of reviews undertaken by the
Internal Audit function as well as reports from the External
Auditors, Deloitte LLP, which include details of internal control
matters they have identified as part of their external audit.
Other key elements of the Group’s system of internal control
include the Risk and Control Self-Assessment process, regular
meetings of the Executive and Board Risk Committees
and monthly financial and operational reporting. The Audit
Committee also receives an assurance report from the
Chief Internal Auditor on the effectiveness of the internal
control environment.
During 2024, the Committee reviewed the procedures for
detecting fraud affecting financial reporting, and a report
from the Head of Financial Crime on the systems and
controls for the prevention of bribery. The financial reporting
process is operated by suitably qualified and experienced
accountants and designed to provide assurance regarding
the reliability of financial reporting and preparation of financial
statements through documented procedures and accounting
policies. It operates under the Group’s Enterprise-Wide Risk
Management framework, where controls are in place to provide
assurance over the preparation of the financial statements.
The Annual Report and Accounts are reviewed throughout the
financial reporting process by relevant senior managers prior to
presentation to the Audit Committee, which provide review and
challenge, before recommending to the Board for approval.
The Committee’s review of the internal control framework
concluded that it was operating satisfactorily and that there
were satisfactory processes in place to ensure appropriate
financial and regulatory reporting controls over the Group and
that the Group operated a robust three lines of defence model.
Committee performance review
During the reporting period, an internal assessment was
conducted, which considered the Committee’s effectiveness as
part of the wider Board performance review. For details on the
process followed please see page 78. The performance review
confirmed that Committee members and other respondents
considered that the Committee was performing very effectively
with strong performance in all areas. There were a number of
areas of focus identified for 2025, which included:
• Arranging a deep-dive session on IFRS 9 models, with a
number of changes implemented during the year.
• Focus on the implementation of procedures to ensure
compliance with the new Corporate Governance Code
provisions on internal controls.
• Include an update from the Group’s Assumptions
Committee at each meeting.
• Effective oversight of the transition to a new lead external
Audit Partner.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
89
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Audit Committee report
I am pleased to present the report of the Risk Committee (the
‘Committee’) for the financial year ended 31 December 2024,
which provides an overview of the Committee and the work it
has undertaken during the year.
In October 2024, we welcomed Victoria Mitchell as a
member of the Committee. Victoria, who was appointed a
Non-Executive Director of the Company in November 2023,
previously served as General Counsel and Chief Risk Officer of
Capital One (Europe) plc and brings a wealth of experience that
will benefit the operation of the Committee.
This year, the UK saw a continued reduction in inflation albeit
this has remained elevated and, while interest rates stabilised,
they remained high causing continued challenges in consumer
and business affordability. There was greater uncertainty for
much of the year with a change in the UK Government and a
slowdown in economic growth impacting the markets in which
we operate. The Committee continued to monitor the risks
arising from the macroeconomic environment, particularly
credit risk, and potential mitigations to minimise any impacts on
the Group.
As discussed in our Strategic Report, there have been legal and
regulatory developments which have impacted the Group in
2024, specifically our Vehicle Finance business. Assessing the
impacts and responses to these has been a key priority for
the Committee.
The Committee has focused on the Group’s collections
capability and performance, in particular for the Vehicle
Finance business, following the FCA’s BiFD review. The Group
has overhauled extensively its collections processes, overseen
by the Committee and Board via regular updates on activity
and levels of impairment.
There was disruption across the motor finance industry
following the Court of Appeal’s judgment on commissions,
further information on which can be found in Note 29 on
page 162.
During the year, the Committee oversaw enhancements to the
Group’s Risk Appetite Statements, streamlining the number of
risk appetite metrics monitored by the Committee, enabling
greater focus on material risks to the Group, aligned with the
Group’s medium-term strategy. The Committee challenged
the governance process to ensure there was appropriate
monitoring of the risk appetite metrics within the wider
governance framework and timely escalation of issues to
the Committee.
The Committee has focused on operational resilience,
particularly the Group’s project to test the resilience and
recovery of important business services in line with the new
regulatory requirements. The Committee has also overseen
project and change risk, especially in light of the changes to
the Group’s operating model and ensuring that risks arising
from the changes were managed effectively.
Looking ahead, there will be continued focus on the
macroeconomic environment, particularly the UK’s growth and
interest rates and the potential impacts on our customers and
the business. Legal and regulatory developments will continue
to be a key priority, with further clarity anticipated about motor
finance commissions from the FCA and the outcome of the
UK Supreme Court appeal later in 2025. We will continue
to monitor other regulatory developments including the
implementation of Basel 3.1 and the Small Domestic Deposit
Takers framework, the implementation of which in the UK has
been delayed. Operational resilience, particularly cybersecurity
and information security, and the risks and opportunities arising
from artificial intelligence, will be at the forefront of our agenda
as we navigate a rapidly evolving risk landscape.
Further information on the activities of the Committee during
the year is provided in the following report and additional
information about risk-related matters can be found in the
Principal risks and uncertainties section on pages 30 to 39.
Finally, I would like to thank my Committee and Board
colleagues and the management team for their hard work
and dedication during what has been another busy year for
the Committee.
Paul Myers
Chair of the Risk Committee
“The Committee has focused on
the Group’s collections capability
and performance, in particular
for the Vehicle Finance business.”
Paul Myers
Chair of the Risk Committee
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
90
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Risk Committee report
Statement by the Chair of the Risk Committee
Committee Governance
The Committee met six times during the year and members’
attendance is summarised in the table on page 68.
Meetings of the Committee were regularly attended during
the year by the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer,
Chief Risk Officer and Chief Internal Auditor. In addition,
the Chief Operating Officer, Chief Compliance Officer,
Head of Enterprise-Wide Risk, Head of Financial Crime
and other senior managers attended meetings to present
their reports and answer questions from the Committee.
Risk Committee meetings were also attended, on occasion,
by other Non-Executive Directors including the Chair of the
Board. The Committee maintains a close and open dialogue
with the Chief Risk Officer, routinely holding private sessions
with him following Committee meetings and as required
between meetings.
The Chair of the Risk Committee reports to the Board on the
outcome of Committee meetings and any recommendations
arising from the Committee. The Company Secretary,
or their alternate, acts as Secretary to the Committee.
All Committee materials and minutes from the meetings are
made available, as appropriate, to all Board members.
The Code states that, where a company has a separate Risk
Committee, it should be comprised of Independent Non-
Executive Directors. The Committee membership complied
with the Code provision for independence throughout 2024.
Key responsibilities
The purpose of the Risk Committee is to assist the Board in
its oversight of management’s responsibility to implement an
effective risk management framework reasonably designed
to identify, assess and manage the Group’s strategic,
credit, market, conduct and operational risks. It considers,
recommends and monitors the Group’s risk appetite in
relation to the current and future strategy of the Group and
oversees the Group’s compliance framework and processes.
The Committee’s responsibilities also include approval of
prudential risk-related documentation, risk policies and the
review of associated frameworks, analysis and reporting.
Items considered by the Committee during
the reporting period
The Risk Committee has a 12-month forward looking agenda
that details agenda items for discussion at each of the
scheduled meetings. It is updated in real time to include any
new or emerging issues pertinent to the Group.
At each meeting the Committee receives reports from the Chief
Risk Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Head of Enterprise-Wide
Risk, Chief Operating Officer, Chief Compliance Officer and
the Head of Financial Crime providing updates relevant to their
responsibilities and within the Committee’s remit. The Group’s
Executive Risk Committee and Assets and Liabilities Committee
report to the Committee on their activities at each meeting.
The principal matters discussed during the year, and up to the
date of this report, are detailed in the table below.
Items considered
Outcomes
Group risk appetite statement
and key risk indicators
The Group’s risk appetite statement and risk appetite metrics are reviewed annually by the Committee and recommended to the Board for approval.
While there were no changes to the Group’s risk appetite statements, the Committee challenged some of the proposed changes to the risk appetite metrics
and the applicable thresholds. In addition, the risk appetite metrics were classified into three tiers, with appropriate monitoring by the Committee, the Executive
Risk Committee and the first line accordingly. The Committee challenged the governance process for monitoring the lower level risk appetite metrics and how
this would be escalated through the governance framework. The changes have enabled the Committee to focus on principal risks and key metrics aligned to
the medium-term strategy. The Committee recommended the risk appetite statement, subject to a small number of changes, which were implemented before
presentation to the Board.
Throughout the year, the Committee reviewed performance against the risk appetite statements by reference to the risk appetite metrics and management
information provided to each meeting.
Enterprise-Wide Risk
Management Framework
The Committee is responsible for reviewing the Enterprise-Wide Risk Management Framework (‘EWRMF’) on an annual basis. A number of changes were
proposed this year to ensure appropriate monitoring of risks throughout the governance framework aligned to the changes to the classification of the risk
appetite statement metrics as described above. The Committee agreed with the proposed changes and approved the EWRMF.
Risk culture
The Committee considered an assessment of the risk culture in place across the Group, which was prepared by the second-line functions. The assessment
demonstrated there was a strong risk culture in place throughout the Group.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
91
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Risk Committee report
Items considered
Outcomes
Strategic and operational risks
The Committee oversees the management of strategic and operational risk across the Group. The Head of Enterprise-Wide Risk presented the outcomes of the
Strategic and Operational Risk Review to the Committee, which included the results of the annual Risk and Control Self-Assessment (‘RCSA’). The Committee
noted the reduction in the number of identified risks and improvements in the control environment primarily driven by the simplification of the business,
implementation of control findings by management and harmonisation of controls across functions.
Strategic risks were discussed and challenged throughout the year. In assessing strategic risks, the Committee considers the existing process and internal controls
in operation and reviews the recommendations from the Risk and Compliance functions on how to adapt the controls to mitigate those risks. When reviewing the
strategic and operational risks the Committee also considered emerging risks, including the likelihood and impact upon the Group.
A Chief Operating Officer Report has been introduced at each meeting, which provides the Committee with a first-line view of operational risk, particularly within
IT and Change and updates the Committee on any matters relevant to its remit.
Climate risk
The Committee received reports from management on the Group’s direct and indirect exposure to climate risk. Risk appetite thresholds, such as flood risk for
the Real Estate Finance business and vehicle age for the Vehicle Finance business, have been monitored and challenged by the Committee during the year.
For further information on the Group’s response to climate risk, see the Group’s Climate-related financial disclosures on pages 54 to 65.
Macro risk
Updates from the Chief Risk Officer were provided to the Committee on the wider macro risk particularly arising from the change in UK Government and 2024
Budget, economic outlook and potential monetary and fiscal policy on the Group. The Committee considered potential impacts on our customers including
customer affordability and potential changes to customer sentiment.
Credit risk
The Committee has continued to focus on credit risk across the Group and receives reports on key risk indicators for credit risk, together with quarterly
assessments of each portfolio’s credit profile, including impairments, bad debts, watch-lists, collections data and any policy exceptions. Credit risk performance
for all business units was kept under regular scrutiny and the changing trading environment of businesses was considered along with concentration risk.
The Committee has received regular reports on the Group’s collection strategy and collection performance within Vehicle Finance, following the FCA’s BiFD
review. The Committee has welcomed the progress in developing the collections strategy, including the centralisation of the function and increased use of digital
communications, with the levels of early arrears reducing over the year. However, work to recover value from the excess defaulted balances will continue to be a
key area of focus during 2025.
Operational resilience and risk,
including cyber, information
security resilience risk and
business continuity
The Committee oversees the operational risk framework, including appropriate reporting of metrics, key risk indicators and the output from the annual RCSA
undertaken by individual business units and functions.
To assist in understanding how the risk framework is embedded within the Group and to challenge the effectiveness of the risk management function, the
Committee receives a quarterly review of material operational risk events/losses, performance against the key operational risk appetite metrics, together with
the key findings from annual RCSAs.
The Committee has focused on operational resilience during the year, particularly the project to test the resilience of important business services to ensure
that these can be recovered within our impact tolerances and considered the Internal Audit review of this project. The Committee has reviewed progress in
addressing the actions identified, including the development of further testing scenarios.
The Committee receives regular updates from the Chief Operating Officer on the strategies undertaken within the Group to understand, identify, monitor and
respond to current and upcoming cyber threats and the Group’s cyber resilience profile. This included a revised Information Security strategy that introduced
centralised system management and advanced tooling.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
92
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Risk Committee report
Items considered
Outcomes
Capital and liquidity risk
The Committee has continued to monitor capital and liquidity risk and receives updates on these items at each meeting. The Committee has primary
responsibility for reviewing and making a recommendation to the Board on the Group’s ICAAP, ILAAP and the Recovery Plan and Resolution Pack.
The Committee reviewed key assumptions, stress test scenarios and outputs used in these processes in advance of considering the final documents
for recommendation to the Board. The Committee also considered the output of Internal Audit’s reviews of the documents and the policies followed.
Enhanced early warning mechanisms and adjustments to key recovery indicators were implemented to better align with the Group’s risk appetite.
The Committee also reviewed and approved the Group’s annual Pillar 3 disclosures, which were recommended to the Board.
Regulatory and conduct risk
The Committee receives reports at each meeting on key risk indicators for regulatory, reputational and conduct risk, regulatory incidents and key advisory
activities of note, engagement with regulators, horizon scanning, actions to implement new and revised regulations or legislation and the outputs of the
Compliance Monitoring Plan. The Committee also considered and questioned the effectiveness, robustness and resourcing of the Compliance function.
The Committee has considered the legal and regulatory risks arising from the FCA’s review of discretionary commission arrangements within the motor finance
sector and the Court of Appeal’s judgment on three cases with motor finance commission payments and their potential impact on the Group. The Committee
challenged the changes introduced to the Group’s systems and processes to address the Court of Appeal’s judgment to ensure these were sufficiently robust.
The Committee reviewed the Data Protection Officer’s Report and requested a review of the Group’s compliance with its internal Data Retention Policy.
The Committee reviewed and approved the Compliance Monitoring Plan for 2025 and considered the interaction of this plan with the Internal Audit plan to
provide appropriate coverage of the Group’s risk profile.
As detailed above, the Committee regularly received and considered reports and updates from the Chief Operating Officer, Chief Risk Officer and Chief
Compliance Officer following the FCA’s BiFD review and the progress against the project including second and third-line assurance.
Financial crime
The Committee received reports at each meeting from the Head of Financial Crime, including updates on key risk areas such as sanctions, Authorised Push
Payment (‘APP’) fraud and facilitation of tax evasion risk. The Committee reviewed the Annual Report from the Money Laundering Reporting Officer and the
annual anti-bribery and corruption management information report. The Committee received updates on the progress of the Financial Crime Transformation
Programme and has been pleased with the progress made, with the programme being closed in early 2024. The Committee has also approved the Financial
Crime Monitoring Plan for 2025, as part of the wider Compliance Monitoring Plan.
Governance
During the year, the Risk Committee reviewed its Terms of Reference and various policies. A full copy of the Terms of Reference for the Risk Committee can be
obtained via the Group’s website (
www.securetrustbank.com/corpgov
).
The Committee undertook an internal review of its performance in 2024 and further information on the process followed can be found on page 78. The result
of the performance review demonstrated that the Committee was performing effectively and that there had been good progress from the previous year’s
performance review, particularly around a holistic view of risks across the organisation, improvements in the quality of Committee papers and enhancements to
the risk framework. The review indicated there were a number of areas which the Committee should focus on in 2025 including:
• Arranging deep-dives on specific areas relevant to the Committee’s responsibilities and which have been impacted by recent organisational changes including
IT, Data, Credit risk and a review of emerging risks, especially in light of legal and regulatory developments.
• To continue to drive improvements in MI and papers received by the Committee with a focus on operational matters following the organisation restructure
and to review and enhance the Committee’s forward agenda.
This table is not a complete list of matters considered by the Committee but highlights the most significant matters for the period in the opinion of the Risk Committee. For more information on the
framework for managing risks within the business see the Principal risks and uncertainties section on pages 30 to 39.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
93
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Risk Committee report
The Committee has carefully
considered the Company’s financial
and risk management performance,
strategic progress and the experience
of our stakeholders, together with the
need to reward performance and have
appropriate retention in place.
Julie Hopes
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
On behalf of the Remuneration Committee, I am pleased
to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report (‘DRR’) for
the year ended 31 December 2024, my first as Chair of the
Remuneration Committee.
As outlined in the Strategic Report, the Company has faced
a number of challenges during the year which have impacted
the Company’s performance and share price and, in turn, our
stakeholders’ experience. This has included our shareholders
and our employees, many of whom own shares in the
Company and have elements of their compensation paid via
share-based awards. The Committee has carefully considered
the Company’s financial and risk management performance,
strategic progress and the experience of our stakeholders,
together with the need to reward performance and have
appropriate retention in place.
Performance and incentive outturns for 2024
Performance
While the financial performance of the Company was below
expectations for the year, primarily due to the level of
impairments in our Vehicle Finance business, management
delivered adjusted profit before tax of £39.1 million
representing an 8.2% decrease from the 2023 outturn of
£42.6 million. Adjusted profit before tax pre-impairments
increased from £85.5 million in 2023 to £100.9 million in 2024,
an 18% increase. There has been further progress towards
our medium-term targets, including our net lending target
of £4 billion, with net lending as at 31 December 2024 of
£3.6 billion (2023: £3.3 billion) and a rigorous approach to
cost management, resulting in an adjusted cost income ratio
of 50.9% (2023: 54.0%). Management have focused on areas
of strategic importance during the year, including further
investment in our Vehicle Finance collections activities,
following the FCA’s BiFD review, and the centralisation of our
operating model. Further information on the performance of
the Group can be found within our Strategic Report.
Bonus outturn
The Executive Directors’ annual bonus scorecard is based on
financial metrics, which account for 65% of the weighting and
35% on strategicmetrics.
Based on a formulaic assessment of performance in the period,
the outturn for the financial metrics amounted to 11.7% out of a
maximum of 65%. We carefully considered this outcome within
the context of a range of factors including the performance of
the business against budget and the experience of shareholders
during the year. The Committee determined it was appropriate
to exercise downward discretion to the formulaic outcome and
reduced the outturn of the financial metrics to 0%.
The Committee then assessed management’s performance
against the strategic elements of the bonus scorecard, which
included the effective delivery of various strategic objectives
and additional issues addressed by management during the
period. This assessment resulted in a total bonus outturn of
17.5% for the Chief Executive Officer (‘CEO’) and 25% for the
Chief Financial Officer (‘CFO’). A full disclosure of the bonus
determination process and the scorecard outcomes is provided
on pages 102 and 103. In line with the Directors’ Remuneration
Policy, 50% of the bonus is deferred into shares under the
Company’s Deferred Bonus Plan (‘DBP’).
Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’) outturn
The performance period for the 2022 LTIP award, in which both
of the Executive Directors participate, ended on 31 December
2024 and awards are due to vest in April 2025. The Committee
assessed the performance conditions attached to the 2022 LTIP,
which were primarily based on Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’)
metrics, which totalled 75% of the award and 25% on a risk
management metric. The assessment of the TSR performance
conditions resulted in 0% vesting for these elements.
The Committee noted the material impact on TSR, following
the Court of Appeal’s judgment on motor finance commissions,
which resulted in a material fall in the Company’s share price
towards the end of the performance period when relevant TSR
measurements are made. The Committee considered the risk
management performance condition, including how different
risk types had been managed during the period, management’s
responses to risk events and the risk culture and behaviours in
evidence throughout the performance period.
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Statement by Chair of the Remuneration Committee
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
94
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
This review was supported by reporting from the Group’s
Chief Risk Officer and after due consideration the Committee
approved a vesting level of 15% out of a maximum of 25%.
This resulted in an overall vesting level of 15% for the 2022 LTIP.
Wider workforce
As part of the annual deep dive of remuneration for the
wider workforce, we considered the performance linkage to
bonus assessments and pay reviews for those employees
outside of Senior Management. The Committee reviewed and
agreed the overall bonus pool for the Group. In addition, the
Committee received updates on the Gender Pay Gap actions
and Equity, Diversity and Inclusion progress and initiatives
being undertaken across the Group.
2025 remuneration
Following the year-end, the Committee reviewed pay increases
for the employee population as well as Senior Management,
including the Executive Directors. Average salary increases
across the Group for 2025 will be 3%, which will also be applied
to the Executive Directors.
We have approved annual grants under the Company’s
executive share schemes, which will be made to participants
after the release of the Company’s annual results in March
2025. When approving the grant we considered the fall in the
Company’s share price, the impact this would have on grant
levels and whether this created share plan dilution issues and
the potential for windfall gains.
The Committee discussed the uncertainty across the industry,
caused by the Court of Appeal’s judgment and the need
to ensure appropriate incentivisation and retention for the
Executive team. It was, therefore, agreed that awards would
not be scaled at grant but the Committee would consider the
outcomes at vesting and, in the event of windfall gains, would
exercise its discretion to reduce the level of vesting. This will
be highlighted to participants in the grant documentation.
No share plan dilution issue will impact the Company as, earlier
in 2024, the Company committed to using its Employee Benefit
Trust (‘EBT’) to purchase shares for the 2025 share plan awards.
The Committee has also decided to defer setting the
performance conditions for the 2025 LTIP grants until H2
2025. In the first half of this year, the Company is undertaking
a Group-wide review to define a fresh ambition to scale the
business and accelerate growth in returns for our shareholders.
Ensuring the performance conditions for the LTIP, which
have a three-year performance period, are aligned to our
new ambition is of key importance in driving delivery of the
refreshed plan and aligning remuneration to the desired
performance outcomes, which will benefit our stakeholders.
Appropriate disclosure regarding the performance metrics for
the 2025 LTIP awards will be made retrospectively in our DRR
for 2025.
Forward look
Our current policy, approved by shareholders in 2023 with
95.88% support, will be due for renewal at the 2026 AGM.
This will be a key focus for the Committee during 2025 and I
look forward to engaging with our shareholders over the year
to understand their views when developing the revised policy.
In addition, the Committee will consider the appropriate
performance metrics for the 2025 LTIP grant, once the strategy
refresh has been undertaken in H1 2025 as explained above.
Concluding thoughts
I would like to thank all of the Committee members for their
contributions and particularly to extend my thanks to Victoria
Stewart for her support and generosity with her time during
the transition of Chairship. I would also like to thank all those
who have supported the work of the Committee and helped
to ensure a smooth handover of responsibilities.
The Committee welcomes all input on remuneration and I
am looking forward to engaging with shareholders at the
2025 AGM and hearing your views directly. Alternatively,
if you are not able to attend the AGM, you can email me
any comments or questions on the DRR via the Company
Secretary at companysecretariat@securetrustbank.co.uk.
Julie Hopes
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Statement by Chair of the Remuneration Committee
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
95
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Executive Directors: Remuneration at a glance
Salary
Pension and benefits
Annual bonus
LTIP
Minimum Shareholding
Requirement (‘MSR’)
Malus and clawback
Purpose
Supports attraction
and retention of
Executive Directors
to deliver the key
strategic objectives.
Supports
retention
of Executive
Directors.
Incentivises the
delivery of key financial
and non-financial
strategic objectives.
Incentivises delivery
of the long-term
sustainable success
of the Company
for shareholders.
Alignment of Executive
Directors’ and
shareholders’ interests.
Ensuring alignment of
Executive Directors’
and shareholders’
interests.
Ensuring that the Company can reduce
variable compensation should material adverse
events occur or come to light that impact the
appropriate quantum of the original award.
Key features of
current policy
Reviewed annually
and takes into
account a range of
factors including:
• skills and experience
of the individual;
• benchmarking of
peer data;
• wider market and
economic conditions;
and
• the level of salary
increases in the
wider employee
population.
Provision of
benefits that
are competitive
and linked to
market practice.
The maximum
Company pension
contribution is 5%
of salary.
Maximum opportunity
of 100% of salary.
Balanced scorecard
approach based on
financial and non-
financial metrics
approved by
the Remuneration
Committee.
50% of total bonus
deferred in to share
options and vesting
over three years in
annual tranches.
Payments are subject
to risk assessment
and subject to
the Remuneration
Committee’s discretion.
Malus and clawback
provisions also apply.
Maximum
opportunity of 100%
of salary for both the
Executive Directors.
Awards are subject
to performance
conditions assessed
over a three-year
performance period
and are subject to an
additional two-year
holding period
post-vesting.
Vesting is subject
to risk assessment.
Malus and clawback
provisions apply.
Executive Directors
are required to
build a minimum
shareholding
equivalent to 200%
of base salary.
Post-employment
shareholding
requirement for
Executive Directors
for two years.
Malus and clawback provisions apply to all
variable remuneration.
Awards under the discretionary share plans are
subject to the clawback provision up to the fifth
anniversary of the grant date. Bonus payments are
subject to clawback from three years of payment and
one year from vesting for the deferred elements.
The Committee believes, in light of the Company’s
business, that the majority of issues would be
identified within this period. In addition, the
Committee retain the right to extend this period in
the event of an investigation by the Company or a
regulator, until the conclusion of the investigation.
Circumstances under which the malus and clawback
provisions may be invoked include, among
other matters:
• material misstatement of financial results;
• assessment of performance condition or target
being based on material error or materially
inaccurate or misleading information;
• the action or conduct of the participant
amounting to fraud or gross misconduct;
• participant being subject to regulatory censure
in respect of a material failure in control;
• a material failure of risk management and/or
regulatory non-compliance resulting in damage
to the Company’s business or reputation; and
• any circumstances that the Remuneration Committee
consider to have a similar impact to the above.
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
96
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Salary
Pension and benefits
Annual bonus
LTIP
Minimum Shareholding
Requirement (‘MSR’)
Malus and clawback
Planned
implementation
for the year ending
31 December 2025
CEO: £731,581 p.a.
3% increase
No change from
prior year.
100% of salary
max opportunity
100% of salary
annual award
MSR will continue to
be monitored in 2025.
In line with the Directors’ Remuneration Policy.
CFO: £509,850 p.a.
3% increase
Implementation
for the year ended
31 December 2024
CEO: £710,273 p.a.
No change from
prior year.
Pension
contribution
remains at 5% of
base salary.
Bonus outcomes (%
of max)
CEO: 17.50%
CFO: 25%
Vesting of 2022 LTIP
at 15% for both
CEO and CFO in
April 2025.
Neither Executive
Director has achieved
the minimum
shareholding
requirement, which
has been impacted
by the recent fall in
the Company’s share
price. Details on the
Executive Directors’
shareholdings can be
found on page 105.
In line with the Directors’ Remuneration Policy.
CFO: £495,000 p.a.
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Committee governance
The Remuneration Committee met five times during the year and members’ attendance is summarised in the table on page 68. The Committee membership complied with the Code provision for
independence throughout 2024. The Board Chair was also a member of the Committee, as he was considered independent on appointment as Chair.
Meetings of the Committee were regularly attended during the year by the Chief Executive Officer, Chief People Officer, Company Secretary, Chief Risk Officer, the external remuneration consultant
and senior members of the Reward team, as well as other members of the Board at the invitation of the Committee.
The Chair of the Remuneration Committee reports to the Board on the outcome of Committee meetings and any recommendations arising from the Committee. The Company Secretary, or their
alternate, acts as Secretary to the Remuneration Committee. Committee materials and minutes from the meetings are made available, as appropriate, to all Board members.
A copy of the Committee’s Terms of Reference can be obtained via the Group’s website (
www.securetrustbank.com/corpgov
).
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
97
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Role of the Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee assists the Board in fulfilling its responsibilities for remuneration including, among other matters, determining the policy for the individual remuneration and benefits
packages of the Executive Directors and the Group’s Material Risk Takers (‘MRTs’). The Committee also reviews workforce remuneration, related policies and how executive and wider workforce pay
are aligned to the culture of the Group.
Key matters considered by the Committee during the year, and up to the date of this report, were:
Items considered
Outcomes
Executive Directors’ remuneration
The Committee agreed the annual bonus outcomes for both the CFO and CEO for the 2024 performance year, as well as their respective salary increases
for 2025. The Committee considered the Executive Directors’ performance, Group performance, progress against strategic objectives, stakeholder
experience and benchmarking for each role. Further information on the outcomes can be found from page 102.
The Committee approved the grant of LTIP options to each Executive Director in line with the DRR and elected to defer setting of the performance
conditions (as outlined on page 95), to ensure that the performance conditions are aligned to the Group’s ambitions over the performance period.
Senior Managers’ remuneration
The Committee considered and approved remuneration for individual MRTs, using benchmarking data, and assessed the outcomes of scorecards to
assess performance for bonuses. The Committee approved the quantum of awards used for the LTIP and DBP grants.
As part of the focus in 2024 on simplifying the Group’s target operating model, the Committee reviewed and approved remuneration packages for a
number of individuals stepping into MRT roles within the business. When considering MRT remuneration packages, the Committee balances the need
for packages to remain competitive, promote equity, diversity and inclusion, while remaining appropriate for a group the size of Secure Trust Bank PLC.
For senior individuals leaving the Group, the Committee considered and approved their redundancy packages and treatment of share-based awards.
Chair’s remuneration
The Committee considered the Chair’s fee during the year. While a mechanical process was implemented in 2019 to increase the Chair’s and Non-
Executive Directors’ fees in line with employees’ average salary increases in the prior year, the Committee resolved that, given that the Chair was
appointed in the year, it was not appropriate to apply an increase to the Chair’s fee from 1 January 2025.
Wider workforce remuneration
In March 2025, the Committee reviewed the proposed Group bonus pool to be paid in April 2025 in respect of performance for the 2024 financial year
and the proposed average salary increase to be effective from April 2025.
The Committee, having regard to the guidelines issued by institutional investors regarding reward, regulatory requirements and guidance, the review
of the going concern and viability assessments conducted by the Audit Committee and conduct review by the Chief Risk Officer, concluded that the
payment of a bonus to all employees who met the individual performance criteria was appropriate and in the best interests of the Group. The Committee
reviewed and agreed the proposed distribution and quantum of the Group bonus pool and also approved an average 3% salary increase for employees.
The Committee reviewed dashboard information, processes and guidelines for annual remuneration for the entire employee workforce, including more
granular information on the Compliance and Risk functions to ensure remuneration for these key control functions was appropriate and would not
promote excessive risk taking. The Committee reviewed the Group’s benefits package, which included additional digital health benefits rolled out to all
employees. The Committee also reviewed the outcomes of the Group’s Gender Pay Gap reporting, which has continued to improve year on year.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
98
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Items considered
Outcomes
Discretionary share plans
and dilution
The Committee reviewed the outcome of the performance metrics for the 2022 LTIP grant, which will mature in April 2025 with a 15% vesting level.
The Committee elected not to utilise its discretion to modify the formulaic outcome of the vesting of the awards, which was considered to be aligned to
the shareholder experience over the full performance period.
The Committee has reviewed and agreed the participants and quantum for the 2025 LTIP grant. As highlighted in my opening letter, the performance
conditions attached to this grant will be agreed during 2025, with further detail provided in the 2025 DRR, and the grants will be made using an average
share price in the three days immediately prior to grant.
The Committee reviewed and approved the participants under the 2025 DBP grant and agreed the quantum of share options to be granted relative to
the portion of bonus to be deferred into shares. The Committee further agreed the vesting of tranches of the DBP under the 2022, 2023 and 2024 grants.
Malus and clawback provisions were reviewed, with relevant clauses being included in all LTIP and DBP standard documentation.
The Committee discussed the dilution impact to shareholders as a result of settling awards via issuance of new shares. Following creation of the EBT in
October 2022, exercises under discretionary awards can be satisfied from shares purchased in the market by the EBT, which will not impact dilution levels.
The Committee agreed to increase the use of market purchase shares through the Company’s EBT for discretionary share plans and the grants made
in 2025 will all be satisfied by market purchase shares. The Committee will continue to monitor share plan dilution levels which, for discretionary plans,
currently stand at 2.13% of the issued share capital and manage these appropriately.
All-Employee Sharesave (‘SAYE’) plan
and dilution
The Committee reviewed and approved the 2024 SAYE plan invitation to all eligible employees, once again reducing the maximum savings contribution
for the year to £250, to continue to manage potential dilution impacts to existing shareholders. The SAYE plan is popular across the Group and dilution
under this all-employee plan, which includes all outstanding awards, stands at 4.06% of the issued share capital. We strongly support the SAYE plan, which
provides all employees with the opportunity to purchase shares in the Company and helps to align all employees’ interests with that of our shareholders
and creates a culture of ownership.
The 2021 SAYE grant matured in November 2024 and as the option price was below the share price, no participants exercised their options.
DRR and other disclosures in the Annual
Report and Accounts
The Committee considered the disclosures required in the Annual Report and Accounts and recommended its approval to the Board. The Committee
received advice from the Company Secretary, Chief People Officer and FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP (‘FIT’) when compiling the DRR and the
additional disclosures in the Annual Report and Accounts.
Governance matters
The Committee reviewed the outcomes of the annual internal audit review of the implementation of the remuneration policy. During the reporting period,
an externally facilitated internal assessment considered the Committee’s performance as part of the wider Board effectiveness review. Please see page
78 for further information on the process followed. The result of the performance review confirmed that the Committee was considered to be performing
effectively and highlighted the transition in Chair of the Committee. Following the performance review there are a number of areas identified for the
Committee’s focus in 2025, particularly to ensure appropriate alignment of pay and performance, which supports the refreshed strategy, a holistic review
of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy and the need to drive improvements in MI and reports provided to the Committee.
The Committee has also reviewed a number of workforce policies, including the Application of Proportionality and Material Risk Takers policies, as well as
the All-Employee Remuneration Policy and the Remuneration Policy Statement.
This table is not a complete list of matters considered by the Committee but highlights the most significant matters for the period in the opinion of the Remuneration Committee.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
99
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Remuneration consultant and Committee advice
During the year, the Committee received external advice
from FIT. The appointment of FIT to advise the Committee
was made in September 2020 following a competitive
tender process.
FIT has no other significant connection with the Group or
its Directors other than the provision of advice on executive
and employee remuneration, and related matters. FIT is a
member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and abides
by its code of conduct that requires remuneration advice to
be given objectively and independently. The total fee paid for
the provision of advice to the Committee during the year was
£71,076 (excluding VAT) (2023: £105,442). FIT also provided
support to the People Team, Company Secretary and Legal
teams on remuneration implementation. The Committee
is satisfied that the advice provided in the year by FIT on
remuneration matters is objective and independent.
The Committee received advice on specific matters
from internal advisers, management and the Company
Secretary and is satisfied that the Committee has exercised
independent judgement when evaluating the advice
received from all its advisers.
Directors’ Remuneration Report
The information contained in the Directors’ Remuneration
Report is subject to audit, where indicated in the report, in
accordance with The Large and Medium-sized Companies
and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (as
amended). The Directors’ Remuneration Report contains the
Annual Remuneration Report, which explains the operation of
remuneration-related arrangements for 2024.
A full copy of the existing Directors’ Remuneration Policy, which
was approved by shareholders at the 2023 AGM, can be found
on the Group’s website as part of our 2022 Annual Report
and Accounts.
How we link executive remuneration to
our strategy
The key principles behind the Directors’ Remuneration Policy
are to:
• be simple and transparent in order to reflect the
Group’s purpose;
• promote the long-term sustainable success of the Group,
with transparent and demanding performance conditions;
• provide alignment between executive reward and the
Group’s values, risk appetite and shareholder returns; and
• have a competitive mix of base salary and short and long-term
incentives, with an appropriate proportion of the package
linked to the delivery of sustainable long-term returns.
In developing and implementing the Directors’
Remuneration Policy, we have also had regard to regulatory
requirements for senior managers under the Senior Manager
Regime. The Group is currently a Level 3 firm within the
classifications applied by the financial regulators for regulated
entities. This means that the Group is not required to satisfy
in full all elements of the FCA and Prudential Regulation
Authority (‘PRA’) remuneration codes.
Notwithstanding this, in formulating and applying the
Directors’ Remuneration Policy the Committee has had
regard to the remuneration codes when considering existing
and proposed remuneration and also the remuneration-related
provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
100
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Single figure table (audited information)
The following table sets out total remuneration earned for each Director in respect of the year ended 31 December 2024 and the prior year.
Salary and fees
1
Benefits
Annual bonus
2
Pension
Shares
3, 4
Total remuneration
Total fixed remuneration
Total variable remuneration
2024
£’000
2023
£’000
2024
£’000
2023
£’000
2024
£’000
2023
£’000
2024
£’000
2023
£’000
2024
£’000
2023
£’000
2024
£’000
2023
£’000
2024
£’000
2023
£’000
2024
£’000
2023
£’000
Executive Directors
D McCreadie
705
685
2
1
124
283
35
35
43
75
909
1,079
742
721
167
358
R Lawrence
479
430
23
22
124
183
24
21
28
57
678
713
526
473
152
240
Non-Executive Directors
5
J Brown
174
174
174
A Berresford
122
120
2
1
124
121
124
121
V Mitchell
6
82
13
82
13
82
13
P Myers
107
105
107
105
107
105
F Williamson
92
90
2
1
94
91
94
91
J Hopes
7
15
15
15
Former Directors
M Forsyth
8
70
230
3
3
73
233
73
233
V Stewart
9
102
100
2
1
104
101
104
101
Total
1,948
1,773
34
29
248
466
59
56
71
132
2,358
2,456
2,041
1,858
319
598
1.
The 2024 base salary figures are based on three months of salaries approved in April 2023 (David McCreadie £689,585 and Rachel Lawrence £432,847), and nine months of salaries approved in April 2024 (David McCreadie £710,273 and Rachel Lawrence £495,000). The 2023 base salary figures
are based on three months of salaries approved in April 2022 (David McCreadie £669,500 and Rachel Lawrence £420,240), and nine months of salaries approved in April 2023 (David McCreadie £689,585and Rachel Lawrence £432,847).
2.
In respect of the 2024 financial year, David McCreadie received an annual bonus of £124,298, of which £62,149 will be deferred into share awards and Rachel Lawrence received an annual bonus of £123,750 of which £61,875 will be deferred into share awards.
3.
The shares values for David McCreadie and Rachel Lawrence reflect the performance vesting of the 21 April 2022 LTIP award where performance was measured to 31 December 2024. This award partially vested giving David McCreadie 7,959 vested shares and Rachel Lawrence 4,996 vested
shares, which for the purpose of providing an estimated value for this table, was multiplied by the average share price in the three month period to 31 December 2024 (521.4p). No element of the values shown represent share price growth as the share prices at 31 December 2024 were lower
than the share prices at the respective dates of award (5 April 2022: 1240p). Details of awards made under the LTIP and DBP can be found on page 104.
4.
This includes the value of the SAYE options granted to David McCreadie and Rachel Lawrence on 26 September 2024 (calculating the number of shares in the option (1,326 shares) multiplied by the difference in the option price (699.0p) and the market value of the shares on 26 September
2024 (814.0p)).
5.
Non-Executive Directors are reimbursed expenses that are incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by the Company. These expenses and the related tax have not been included in benefits listed in the table above.
6.
Victoria Mitchell was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 1 November 2023 and was appointed to the Remuneration and Nomination Committees. She was appointed to the Risk Committee effective 24 October 2024.
7.
Julie Hopes was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 24 October 2024 and was appointed as a member of the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees. She was appointed Chair of the Remuneration Committee on 31 December 2024.
8.
Michael Forsyth stepped down as Chairman of the Board on 16 May 2024.
9.
Victoria Stewart stepped down from the Board from 31 December 2024.
The figures in the single figure tables above are derived from the following:
Salary and fees
The amount of salary/fees received in the year.
Benefits
The taxable value of benefits received in the year. These are principally private medical health insurance and travel allowances.
Annual bonus
The value of the bonus earned in respect of the financial year (including the proportion of the amount earned that is subject to deferral).
Pension
The amount of payments in lieu of Company pension contributions received in the year.
Shares
The value of LTIP awards vesting in relation to performance periods ending in 2024 and also the value of SAYE options granted during the year.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
101
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Additional disclosures in respect of the single figure table (audited information)
Base salary and fees
Base salaries for the Executive Directors in respect of the year ended 31 December 2023 and 31 December 2024 are as follows:
2024
base salary
£’000
2023
base salary
£’000
D McCreadie
710
690
R Lawrence
495
433
The Executive Director base salaries are the annual salaries as agreed by the Remuneration Committee for each year.
Bonus arrangements
For the financial year ended 31 December 2024, Executive Directors were eligible for an annual bonus award of up to 100% of salary; 65% of the bonus was subject to financial metrics and risk
performance metrics and 35% of the bonus was subject to a mixture of strategic, stakeholder, operational and employee performance (‘Non-financial’) metrics.
Financial and risk performance metrics
The financial and risk performance metrics were based on the delivery of Board agreed key performance indicators in accordance with the schedule below. For 2024, in consideration of the financial
performance of the Company and the shareholder experience the Committee exercised its discretion to reduce the bonus payable under the financial metrics to 0%.
Objective
1
Threshold
(0% payable)
On-target
(50% payable)
Stretch
(100% payable)
Achieved
Weight
Percentage
achieved
Bonus payable
Group underlying continuing profit before tax
2
£49.59m
£55.10m
£60.61m
£39.1m
25%
0%
0%
Group underlying, continuing cost:income ratio
2
53.66%
51.16%
48.66%
50.93%
10%
5.5%
0%
Group net interest margin
5.16%
5.41%
5.66%
5.42%
10%
5.1%
0%
Cost of risk
1.47%
1.34%
1.24%
1.81%
10%
0%
0%
Adjusted Common Equity Tier 1 (‘CET 1’) ratio
3
12.58%
12.87%
13.22%
12.62%
10%
1.2%
0%
Total
65%
11.7%
0%
1.
Please refer to the key performance indicators on pages 07 and 08 for an explanation of why these are measured and how they are linked to our strategy.
2.
Figures include continuing operations only, which exclude exceptional items (see Note 8 to the Financial Statements).
3.
Adjusted for exceptional items, discontinued operations, and own shares.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
102
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Non-financial metrics
Objective
Targets (summary)
Achievement
Weight
Bonus payable
CEO
Bonus payable
CFO
CEO
Group
operating
model review
• Design and implement a simpler, more focused operating model.
• Implement a plan to deliver effective leadership changes in the
Group’s business units.
• Simplify governance arrangements across the Group.
• Centralised operating and governance models implemented
during 2024, resulting in a more consistent service to customers,
reduced complexity, cost reductions and increased agility.
• Succession plans have been successfully implemented for
leadership changes.
10%
5%
N/A
Stakeholder
engagement
• Maintain effective and constructive relationships with the
Group’s stakeholders including shareholders and regulators.
• Communicate progress against the Group’s Environmental,
Social and Governance (‘ESG’) strategy.
• Customer satisfaction - maintain Feefo ratings at targeted levels
in Retail Finance, Vehicle Finance and Savings.
• Develop an action plan following feedback from the employee
survey and maintain the Colleague Trust score.
• Significant increase in engagement with the Group’s stakeholders.
• Dedicated ESG team briefings held across the Group.
• Consumer product customer satisfaction ratings maintained at
4.7 stars (Feefo).
• Colleague Trust score reduced to 74% (2023: 83%) driven by
organisational design change. Action plan has been developed
and approved.
10%
5%
N/A
CFO
Group
Finance
Function
• Develop a plan and implement changes to enhance the Finance
and Treasury structure, including increased automation.
• Oversee the plan for delivery of planned repayment of TFSME.
• The Finance function has been effectively restructured delivering
improved performance and reduced costs.
• TFSME repayment is ahead of plan with £160.0 million repaid.
20%
N/A
17.5%
Shared
objectives
Strategic
development
• Oversight and leadership of initiatives to deliver medium-term
financial targets both through growth initiatives and cost savings.
• Net lending growth increased 8.8% to £3.6 billion.
• Annualised cost savings of £5 million delivered and additional
annualised cost savings of £3 million identified.
10%
5%
5%
Diversity and
inclusion
• Develop and implement effective strategies to recruit and attract
a more diverse applicant pool for all role vacancies.
• Develop plans to improve diverse talent pipeline for senior levels.
• Recruitment processes ensure diverse long and short lists for all
vacancies. ENEI Silver TIDEMark retained.
• 44% of potential successors for Executive Committee members
are women (increased from 34% in 2023).
5%
2.5%
2.5%
Total:
35%
17.5%
25%
2022 LTIP awards maturing by reference to 2024 performance
LTIP awards were granted on 5 April 2022 and performance conditions were measured to 31 December 2024. Awards are subject to a further two-year holding period from vesting. The 2022 awards
were subject to four metrics, which are detailed in the table below together with the vesting levels:
Performance condition
Weighting
Vesting level
Relative TSR vs FTSE SmallCap (excluding investment trusts)
25%
0%
Relative TSR vs selected banks
25%
0%
Absolute TSR growth of 20% to 40% Compound Annual Growth Rate (‘CAGR’)
25%
0%
Risk Management
25%
15%
Total:
15%
Recipient
Date of grant
Basis of award
Number of shares
Vested
Performance period
D McCreadie
5 April 2022
100% of salary
53,065
7,959
1 January 2022 – 31 December 2024
R Lawrence
5 April 2022
100% of salary
33,308
4,996
1 January 2022 – 31 December 2024
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
103
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Awards exercised during the financial year (audited information)
On 25 April 2024, David McCreadie exercised 18,613 Deferred Bonus Plan (‘DBP’) share options and Rachel Lawrence exercised 11,682 DBP share options at an exercise price of 40 pence per share.
Both Executive Directors elected to sell sufficient shares to cover the transaction costs arising.
Awards granted during the financial year (audited information)
2017 LTIP
Nominal-cost share options were granted to Executive Directors on 16 April 2024 in accordance with the rules of the LTIP as follows:
Recipient
Date of grant
Basis of award
Number of shares
Face value of award
£’000
1
Performance period
D McCreadie
16 April 2024
100% of salary
101,322
710
1 January 2024 – 31 December 2026
R Lawrence
16 April 2024
100% of salary
70,613
495
1 January 2024 – 31 December 2026
1.
Based on a share price of £7.01 being the average mid-market price determined between 11 April 2024 – 15 April 2024.
Vesting of the LTIP awards granted in April 2024 is subject to a blend of a TSR, Return on Average Equity (‘ROAE’), Earnings per ordinary share (‘EPS’) and risk management performance metrics,
assessed over a three-year performance period as summarised below.
Measurement basis
and % weighting
Underlying Continued EPS (25%)
Relative TSR vs FTSE SmallCap
(ex. investment trusts) (25%)
ROAE (25%)
Risk management (25%)
Target range
Underlying continued diluted EPS
of the Company for the relevant
financial year of the Group as
determined by the Board. There is
a range of 20% to 30% CAGR over
three financial years.
Median to upper quartile
vesting range. Measured
against constituents of
FTSE SmallCap (excluding
investment trusts).
ROAE for the financial year
ending 31 December 2026.
There is a range of 14% to
16% ROAE.
Maintaining appropriate risk practices over the performance period
reflecting the longer-term strategic risk management of the Group,
including consideration of:
• the number of customer complaints received;
• the number and nature of material risk events within the Group;
• credit losses compared to the Board’s assessment of the Group’s risk
appetite; and
• management of regulatory capital limits.
Underpin
Vesting for each of the elements is also subject to an underpin as follows:
(a) the Board’s assessment of the Group’s general financial performance and shareholder experience over the performance period;
(b) the Board’s assessment of the Group’s risk management performance over the performance period; and
(c) the Board’s assessment of progress against strategy, in particular, growth in responsible lending, progress on balance sheet management and customer satisfaction.
For each metric, threshold attainment is 25% of that part, with vesting on a straight-line basis to 100% for maximum attainment.
For the TSR element, TSR will be measured using a market normal three-month average TSR to the beginning and end of the performance period (which is the three-year period from 1 January 2024).
Awards vest to the extent that the performance metrics are achieved and are subject to a further two-year holding period.
2017 Deferred Bonus Plan (‘DBP’)
Nominal-cost share options were granted to Executive Directors on 16 April 2024 in accordance with the rules of the DBP as follows:
Recipient
Date of grant
Number of shares
Tranche 1
Tranche 2
Tranche 3
Face value of award
£’000
1
D McCreadie
16 April 2024
20,185
6,728
6,728
6,729
141
R Lawrence
16 April 2024
13,056
4,352
4,352
4,352
92
1.
Based on a share price of £7.01 being the average mid-market price determined between 11 April 2024 - 15 April 2024.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
104
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Statement of Directors’ shareholding and share interests (audited information)
A formal shareholding guideline requires Executive Directors to build up and maintain a shareholding of at least 200% of base salary, over time, by retaining shares from awards granted under the
Group’s share plans that vest (net of Income Tax and National Insurance).
The interests of the Directors and their connected persons in the Company’s ordinary shares as at 31 December 2024 were as set out below. Any changes to a Director’s shareholding are set out in
the notes below the table.
Directors’ shareholding and share interests
Director
Type
Total as at
1 January
2024
Shares
purchased
during
the year
Options
granted
during the year
1
Options
(exercised)
during the year
Options
(lapsed)
during the year
Total as at
31 December
2024
2
Owned
outright
Vested but
unexercised
Unvested,
not subject to
performance
conditions
Unvested, subject
to performance
conditions
D McCreadie
3,4
Shares
5
39,434
32,393
71,827
71,827
2017 LTIP
174,690
101,322
(43,564)
232,448
11,755
220,693
2017 DBP
36,626
20,185
(18,613)
38,198
38,198
2017 SAYE
6
1,683
1,326
3,009
1,683
1,326
R Lawrence
3,4
Shares
7
7,148
13,316
20,464
20,464
2017 LTIP
111,180
70,613
(27,345)
154,448
8,908
145,540
2017 DBP
22,990
13,056
(11,682)
24,364
24,364
2017 SAYE
6
5,096
1,326
(3,388)
3,034
3,034
M Forsyth
Shares
7,500
7,500
7,500
J Brown
Shares
8
29,600
29,600
29,600
A Berresford
Shares
J Hopes
Shares
V Mitchell
Shares
P Myers
Shares
8,966
8,966
8,966
V Stewart
Shares
F Williamson
Shares
415,313
75,309
207,828
(33,683)
(70,909)
593,858
138,357
22,346
66,922
366,233
1.
Awards granted under LTIP and DBP rules on 16 April 2024 are set out on page 104.
2.
31 December 2024 or as at the time of stepping down from the Board.
3.
Executive Directors are required to hold shares not purchased on the open market post their employment in line with the minimum shareholding requirements policy.
4.
Neither David McCreadie nor Rachel Lawrence have achieved the required 200% of base salary shareholding requirement based on shares owned outright. Both are calculated using the number of shares owned outright, the Group’s SAYE and 53% of unvested and vested share awards that
are not subject to performance conditions (2017 DBP and vested 2017 LTIP)). Shares held by David McCreadie (105,529 shares), are worth £382,016 when using the 2024 year-end share price of £3.62 (53.78% of 2024 annual base salary). Shares held by Rachel Lawrence (43,780 shares) are worth
£158,484 when using the 2024 year-end share price of £3.62 (32.02% of base salary).
5.
On 25 April 2024, David McCreadie exercised 18,613 DBP options and retained 8,772 of these. David McCreadie ,or a person closely associated with him, purchased 8,857 shares on 3 May 2024, 2,882 shares on 7 May 2024 and 11,882 shares on 15 August 2024.
6.
David McCreadie and Rachel Lawrence participated in the 2024 SAYE plan, granted on 26 September 2024, to the maximum monthly saving amount.
7. On 25 April 2024, Rachel Lawrence exercised 3,388 SAYE and 11,682 DBP options, retaining all of her SAYE shares and 5,834 of the shares arising from the DBP exercise. She purchased a further 4,094 shares on 1 November 2024.
8. Jim Brown or a person closely associated with him purchased 17,000 shares on 15 August 2024 and 12,600 shares on 20 August 2024.
There have not been any changes to the above interests since 31 December 2024 and the date of this report.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
105
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Payments made to former Directors during the year (audited information)
No payments were made to former Directors during 2024.
Payments for loss of office made during the year (audited information)
No payments for loss of office were made in the year to any Director of the Company.
Performance graph and historical CEO remuneration outcomes
Total shareholder return (‘TSR’)
The graph below shows the TSR performance for the Company’s shares in comparison to the FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts) for the period from 1 January 2015 to 31 December
2024. For the purpose of the graph, TSR has been calculated as the percentage change during the period in the market price of the shares, assuming that dividends are reinvested. The graph shows
the value, by 31 December 2024, of £100 invested in the Group over the period compared with £100 invested in the FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts). The FTSE SmallCap Index
(excluding investment trusts) has been chosen as a comparator as this is the most appropriate reference point given the market capitalisation of the Company.
0
50
100
150
200
250
Source: Datastream
31.12.2015
31.12.2023
31.12.2024
31.12.2022
31.12.2021
31.12.2020
31.12.2019
31.12.2016
31.12.2018
31.12.2017
31.12.2014
TSR Index
Date
Secure Trust Bank
FTSE SmallCap (excluding investment trusts)
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
106
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
The table below shows details of the total remuneration, bonus and share options vesting (as a percentage of the maximum opportunity) for the CEO over the last 10 financial years.
Total
remuneration
£’000
Bonus as a
% of maximum
opportunity
1
LTIP as a
% of maximum
opportunity
2
2024
3
909
17.5
15
2023
3
1,079
41.04
21.25
2022
3
1,060
53.1
N/A
2021
3
1,170
74.6
N/A
2020
1,045
nil
nil
2019
1,804
45
15
2018
1,857
50
N/A
2017
1,657
33.3
N/A
2016
5,542
N/A
100
2015
1,459
N/A
N/A
2014
3,671
N/A
100
1.
Pre Main Market admission, bonuses were determined by the Committee on a discretionary basis taking into account Group financial and individual performance during the financial year.
2.
No LTIP shares were eligible to vest in respect of the years 2015, 2017, 2018, 2021 and 2022.
3.
2021, 2022, 2023 and 2024 reflects David McCreadie as CEO.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
107
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Directors’ pay increase in relation to all employees
The table below shows the percentage change in remuneration of the Directors and employees of the business between 2020, 2021, 2022, 2023 and 2024 financial years.
2024
Salary or
base fee
%
2024
Benefits
%
2024
Bonus
%
2023
Salary or
base fee
%
2023
Benefits
%
2023
Bonus
%
2022
Salary or
base fee
%
2022
Benefits
%
2022
Bonus
%
2021
Salary or
base fee
%
2021
Benefits
%
2021
Bonus
%
Employees
1
3.2
0
6.3
4.9
2
0
7.6
2.9
0
(3.3)
2.9
0
6.9
Executive Directors:
3
D McCreadie
4
3.0
100
7
(56.1)
3.0
0
(21.9)
3.0
0
(25.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
R Lawrence
5
14.4
4.5
(32.4)
3.0
0
(19.5)
3.0
0
(25.3)
2.0
N/A
N/A
Non-Executive Directors:
3,6
J Brown
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
M Forsyth
3.0
0
N/A
3.0
50
7
N/A
2.9
0
N/A
3.0
0
N/A
A Berresford
3.0
100
7
N/A
3.0
0
N/A
2.9
0
N/A
3.0
0
N/A
V Mitchell
3.0
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
P Myers
3.0
0
N/A
3.0
0
N/A
2.9
0
N/A
3.0
0
N/A
V Stewart
3.0
100
7
N/A
3.0
0
N/A
2.9
0
N/A
3.0
0
N/A
F Williamson
3.0
0
N/A
3.0
0
N/A
2.9
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
J Hopes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1.
The strict legal requirement is only to provide details of employees of Secure Trust Bank PLC, however, we have decided voluntarily to disclose in respect of all Group employees.
2.
The calculation is prepared on a full-time equivalent basis.
3.
Where figures are shown as N/A it reflects that the individual commenced a role part way through the relevant year or left during the relevant year; and accordingly, there is no comparable previous year figure. In addition, N/A is also stated as Non-Executive Directors are not eligible
for bonuses.
4.
David McCreadie was appointed as CEO with effect from 5 January 2021, therefore, no increase in salary, benefits or bonus was awarded for 2021.
5.
Rachel Lawrence received an increase to salary in line with employees for 2021, adjusted to reflect her joining the Group part way through the year.
6.
Each of the Non-Executive Directors received a 3% increase to their base fee with effect from 1 January 2024.
7.
Represents an increase in the cost of renewing existing private medical insurance.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
108
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
2024 CEO pay ratio
Our finalised CEO pay ratio for 2024 is set out in the table below. These figures are on a Group-wide basis, as per the regulations:
Year
Method
25th percentile
pay ratio
Median
pay ratio
75th percentile
pay ratio
2024
Option A
37:1
27:1
16:1
2023
Option A
35:1
26:1
17:1
2022
Option A
40:1
29:1
17:1
2021
Option A
43:1
31:1
17:1
2020
Option A
47:1
36:1
19:1
2019
Option A
96:1
71:1
36:1
Total UK employee pay and benefits figures used to calculate the CEO pay ratio for 2024:
25th percentile
pay ratio
Median
pay ratio
75th percentile
pay ratio
Salary
26:1
20:1
12:1
Total pay and benefits
37:1
27:1
16:1
The Company has chosen Option A methodology to prepare the CEO pay ratio calculation as this is the most statistically robust method and is in line with the general preference of institutional
investors. The value of each employee’s total pay and benefits, as at 31 December 2024, was calculated using the single figure methodology consistent with the CEO. No elements of pay have been
omitted. Where required, remuneration was approximately adjusted to be full-time and full-year equivalent basis based on the employee’s average full-time equivalent hours for the year and the
proportion of the year they were employed.
The Committee considers that the median pay ratio for 2024 that is disclosed in the above table is consistent with the pay, reward and progression policies for the Group’s UK employees taken as a whole.
Spend on pay
The following table sets out the percentage change (from the financial year ended 31 December 2023) in dividends and the overall expenditure on pay (as a whole across the organisation).
2024
£million
2023
£million
Change
%
Dividends, excluding special dividends, and share buybacks
4.2
6.1
(31.1)
Dividends, including special dividends, and share buybacks
4.2
6.1
(31.1)
Overall expenditure on pay¹
60.2
56.9
5.8
1.
Further information can be found in Note 6 to the Financial Statements.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
109
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Service agreements and letters of appointment
Details of the Directors’ service agreements, letters of appointment and notice periods are set out below:
Name
Commencement of current service agreement/letter of appointment
1,2,3
Notice period
D McCreadie
5 January 2021
12 months
R Lawrence
11 May 2020
12 months
J Brown
31 March 2024
6 months
A Berresford
22 November 2016
6 months
P Myers
28 November 2018
6 months
F Williamson
30 June 2021
6 months
V Mitchell
1 November 2023
6 months
J Hopes
24 October 2024
6 months
1.
Each of the Non-Executive Directors’ letter of appointment was amended in 2024 by a side letter confirming their respective Committee membership and their total fee. No other changes were made to their existing letter of appointment.
2.
All Directors are subject to annual re-election by shareholders.
3.
Those Non-Executive Directors who are members of the Remuneration Committee are set out on page 68.
Implementation of Directors’ Remuneration Policy for the financial year ending 31 December 2025
Details on how Secure Trust Bank intends to implement the 2023 Directors’ Remuneration Policy for the financial year ending 31 December 2025 are set out as follows.
Salary
As at the date of this report, David McCreadie receives an annual base salary of £710,273. Rachel Lawrence receives an annual base salary of £495,000. In line with the firm-wide employee
salary increases both Executive Directors will receive a salary increase of 3% effective 1 April 2025.
Pensions
David McCreadie and Rachel Lawrence will each receive a 5% of base salary pension contribution, being aligned to the rate of pensions contribution for Group employees.
Fees
The following table sets out the Non-Executive Director fee structure effective from 1 January 2025.
Role
2025 fee
£’000
Chair
1
250
Non-Executive Director (basic fee)
2
79
Senior Independent Director and Committee Chair
20
Member of Audit, Risk or Remuneration Committee
5
Designated Non-Executive Director with responsibility for workforce engagement
5
Consumer Duty Champion
5
1.
The Chair does not receive any additional fees for his membership of any of the Board’s Committees.
2.
With effect from 2020, the base fee payable to the Chair and the Non-Executive Directors increases in line with the average increase of remuneration for employees implemented within the annual review of remuneration in the previous year. The increase takes effect from 1 January each year
in respect of the preceding employee level salary increase. However, no increase will apply to the Chair’s fee in 2025.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
110
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Annual bonus
The proposed maximum annual bonus opportunity for the year ending 31 December 2025 will be equal to 100% of salary.
The bonus will be subject to stretching performance metrics based on a balanced scorecard. The selected balance of performance metrics for 2025 will be substantially similar to the balance of
metrics for 2024 (65% financial and risk performance; 35% non-financial) with precise weightings for individual measures reflecting the Company’s in-year priorities.
The Committee considers that the targets for annual bonus metrics are commercially sensitive. A description of the performance metrics, their weighting and the related targets will be disclosed in
the Annual Report on Remuneration for the year ending 31 December 2025 (or in respect of targets, at such time when the targets are no longer considered commercially sensitive).
50% of any bonus earned will be deferred into shares under the DBP. Deferred shares will vest in equal tranches after one, two and three years following deferral.
The Committee can consider corporate performance on ESG issues when setting Executive Director remuneration and has considered whether the incentive structure for senior management raises
ESG risks by inadvertently motivating irresponsible behaviour.
LTIP and DBP
The Company proposes to grant LTIP awards to the Executive Directors in the form of nil-cost share options at the level of up to 100% of salary for the CEO and CFO. Further details for the
proposed terms for these awards are summarised in the statement by the Chair of the Remuneration Committee introducing the DRR.
The Company proposes to grant DBP awards to the Executive Directors in the form of nil-cost share options.
Statement of voting at AGM
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the AGM in 2023. The most recent Directors’ Remuneration Report was approved at the AGM in 2024; the votes cast were as
detailed below.
Resolution
Proxy votes for
% of proxy votes cast
Proxy votes against
% of proxy votes cast
Votes withheld
To approve the Directors’ Remuneration Policy (2023 AGM)
15,157,928
95.88
650,863
4.12
1,055
To receive and approve the Directors’ Remuneration Report (2024 AGM)
12,469,069
98.85
145,450
1.15
541,531
Approval
This report was approved by the Board on 12 March 2025 and signed on its behalf by:
Julie Hopes
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
111
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
The Directors submit their report, the related Strategic Report and Corporate Governance Report, and the audited Financial Statements of Secure Trust Bank PLC
and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) for the year ended 31 December 2024.
Business performance
Principal activities
The Company’s principal activity is to provide banking services, including deposit taking and secured and unsecured lending. Our business model is based on
helping customers fulfil their ambitions and is explained in the Strategic Report. The Group operates in the United Kingdom and the Company is incorporated
and domiciled in England and Wales with company number 00541132.
Development and performance
Commentary on the development and performance in the year ended 31 December 2024, and likely future developments in the Group’s business, is included in
the Strategic Report on pages 01 to 67.
Financial risk
Descriptions of the Group’s financial risk management objectives and policies, and its exposure to risks arising from its use of financial instruments, are set out in
Note 5 to the Financial Statements on pages 140 to 142.
Directors’ remuneration
Information concerning Directors’ contractual arrangements and entitlements under share-based remuneration arrangements is given in the Remuneration report
on pages 96 to 111.
Environmental performance
The Group’s environmental performance data, including the Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions for 2024 and the Group’s TCFD report can be found on pages 54 to 65.
Employees in the business
The Group has processes in place for communicating with its employees. Employee communications include information about the performance of the Group,
on major matters affecting their work, employment or workplace and to encourage employees to get involved in social or community events. We have a
formal Employee Council to help facilitate engagement and listen to the views of our employees. Further information on how the Group communicates with its
employees is set out on pages 43.
The Group is an inclusive and equal opportunities employer and opposes all forms of discrimination. Applications from people with disabilities will be considered
fairly, and if existing employees become disabled, every effort is made to retain them within the workforce wherever reasonable and practicable. The Group also
endeavours to provide equal opportunities in the training, promotion and general career development of disabled employees.
Group policies seek to create a workplace that has an open atmosphere of trust, honesty and respect. Harassment or discrimination of any kind is not tolerated.
This principle applies to all aspects of employment from recruitment and promotion, through to termination and all other terms and conditions of employment.
Stakeholder interests
How we considered stakeholder interests in key decisions can be found on page 77, and our s.172 statement and our engagement practices can be found on
pages 42 to 44.
Important events affecting the
Company since the end of the year
There have been no significant events between 31 December 2024 and the date of approval of these financial statements, which would require a change to or
additional disclosure in the financial statements.
Political donations
The Group made no political donations and incurred no political expenditure during the year (2023: £nil).
Directors’ report
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
112
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Listing Rules and Disclosure Guidance and Transparency
Rules disclosures
DTR 4.1.5R, DTR 4.1.8R and DTR
4.1.11R
Information, which is the required content of the Management Report, can be found in the Strategic Report and in this Directors’ report.
LR 6.6.1 R
Information
Location
Interest capitalised
Not applicable
Shareholder waiver of dividends
Note 12
Shareholder waiver of future dividends
Note 12
Agreements with controlling shareholders
Not applicable
Provision of services by a controlling shareholder
Not applicable
Details of long-term incentive schemes
Not applicable
Waiver of emoluments by a Director
Not applicable
Waiver of future emoluments by a Director
Not applicable
Significant contracts
Not applicable
Non pre-emptive issues of equity for cash
Note 32 and page 114
Non pre-emptive issues of equity for cash in relation to major subsidiary
Not applicable
Participation by parent of a placing by a listed subsidiary
Not applicable
Publication of unaudited financial information
Page 118
Compliance statement – DTR 7.2
This statement can be found in our Governance section on page 68 and is deemed to form part of this Directors’ report.
Internal control and risk
management systems – DTR 7.2.5
A description of the Company’s financial reporting, internal control and risk management processes can be found on pages 30 to 39 and 89.
Structure of capital and voting
rights – DTR 7.2.6
As at 31 December 2024 and 12 March 2025, there were 19,071,408 fully paid ordinary shares of 40 pence, amounting to £7,628,563.20. Each share in issue is
listed on the Official List maintained by the FCA in its capacity as the UK Listing Authority. The Company has one class of ordinary shares, which rank equally in
all respects and there are no special rights to dividends or in relation to control of the Company. All shares carry the right to attend, speak and vote at general
meetings of the Company and to participate in dividends and other distributions according to their respective rights and interests in the profits of the Company
and a return of capital on a winding up of the Company. Full details regarding the exercise of voting rights in respect of the resolutions to be considered at the
Annual General Meeting (‘AGM’) to be held on 15 May 2025 are set out in the Notice of Annual General Meeting. To be valid, the appointment of a proxy to vote
at a general meeting must be received not less than 48 hours before the time appointed for holding the meeting. Full details on how to submit the proxy can be
found in the AGM Notice.
Directors’ report
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
113
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Shares and shareholders
Powers to issue shares
The Directors were granted authority at the 2024 AGM to allot shares in the Company and to grant rights to subscribe for, or convert, any securities into shares in
the Company up to an aggregate nominal amount of £2,538,674 in any circumstances. This amount represented approximately one-third of the Company’s issued
share capital prior to that meeting. The Directors were also authorised to allot shares and to grant rights up to an aggregate nominal amount of £5,077,348 in
connection with a fully pre-emptive offer (but such amount to be reduced by any allotments made under the first limb of the authority). This amount represented
approximately two-thirds of the Company’s issued share capital prior to the meeting.
At the same time, the Directors were also granted authority to allot shares in the Company and to grant rights to subscribe for or convert any securities into shares
up to an aggregate nominal amount of £2,538,674 in relation to any issue of Additional Tier 1 Securities. This amount represented approximately one-third of the
Company’s issued share capital prior to that meeting.
The Directors were also empowered at the 2024 AGM to allot shares for cash on a non-pre-emptive basis, both in connection with a rights issue or similar
pre-emptive issue and, otherwise than in connection with any such issue, up to a maximum aggregate nominal amount of £761,602 of the Company’s issued
share capital (representing approximately 10% of the Company’s issued share capital prior to the meeting).
The Directors were further empowered to allot shares for cash on a non-pre-emptive basis representing approximately 2% of issued ordinary share capital, to
be used only for the purposes of a follow-on offer as prescribed by the most recent version of the Pre-Emption Group’s Statement of Principles. As permitted by
those Principles, the Directors were also empowered to allot shares for cash on a non-pre-emptive basis up to the same amount for use only in connection with
an acquisition or specified capital investment. The Directors were also empowered to allot shares for cash on a non-pre-emptive basis specifically in relation to
the issue of Additional Tier 1 Securities.
These share capital authorities and powers are due to lapse from the conclusion of the 2025 AGM, and the Board intends to seek approval to renew these
authorities and powers at the 2025 AGM.
Share issuances
An additional 53,613 ordinary shares of 40 pence each were issued during 2024 (2023: 326,361) subsequent to requests to exercise under the Group’s employee
share schemes and as authorised by shareholders at the 2024 Annual General Meeting. Since 1 January 2025 and until the date of the report, no further ordinary
shares of 40 pence each were issued in the Company.
Powers to buy back shares
The Directors were also authorised at the 2024 AGM to repurchase shares in the capital of the Company up to a maximum aggregate number of 1,904,005 shares.
This represented approximately 10% of the Company’s issued share capital prior to the meeting.
No shares have been repurchased under this authority during the year-ended 31 December 2024, nor since this date up to the 12 March 2025.
The authority to repurchase shares is due to lapse from the conclusion of the 2025 AGM, and the Board intends to seek approval to renew this authority at the
2025 AGM.
Restrictions on transfer of shares
Shareholders may transfer all or any of their certificated or uncertificated shares in the Company. All such rights are subject to certain exceptions and restrictions
provided in the Company’s Articles and in any applicable legislation. These include where rights are suspended for non-disclosure of an interest in shares, where
share transfers do not comply with specific requirements, and where any amounts on shares owing by a shareholder to the Company remain unpaid.
The rights and obligations of shareholders, and restrictions on transfer, are set out in full in the Articles. The Company is not aware of any agreements between
shareholders that may result in restrictions on the transfer of securities and/or voting rights.
CREST
The Company’s ordinary shares are in CREST, the settlement system for stocks and shares traded on the London Stock Exchange.
Directors’ report
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
114
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Shares held in Employee
Benefit Trusts
Ocorian Limited (the ‘EBT Trustee’), as trustee of the Secure Trust Bank PLC Employee Benefit Trust (the ‘EBT’), holds ordinary shares in trust for the benefit of
the Group’s employees. The purchase of shares by the EBT is funded by way of a loan from the Company. Where the EBT Trustee has allocated shares held in
the trust in respect of specific awards granted under the Company’s share plans, the holders of such awards may recommend to the EBT Trustee how it should
exercise voting rights relating to such shares. To the extent that a participant does not make such recommendations, no vote is registered. In addition, the
EBT Trustee does not vote on any unallocated shares held in the trust. As at 12 March 2025, the EBT Trustee held 2.3% of the Company’s issued share capital.
Full details of the EBT’s holdings are outlined in Note 33.1.
Annual General Meeting
The AGM will take place on 15 May 2025. The Notice of the AGM will be circulated to all shareholders at least 20 working days before the meeting and the
details of the resolutions to be proposed will be set out in that Notice.
This document will be available on the Company’s website at
www.securetrustbank.com/agm
.
Dividends and dividend policy
The Board recommends the payment of a final dividend of 22.5 pence per share, which represents total dividends for the year of 33.8 pence per share
(2023: 32.2 pence per share). The final dividend, if approved by shareholders at the AGM, will be paid on 22 May 2025 to shareholders on the register at the
close of business on 25 April 2025.
The Board adopted a new progressive dividend policy, which means dividends will not reduce from the previous year and was effective from the 2024 Annual
General Meeting. Under the new dividend policy, the Directors will have regard to current and projected capital, liquidity, earnings and market expectations in
determining the amount of the dividend. On occasion, the Company may declare and pay a special dividend resulting from special circumstances, however, no
such special dividend is currently envisaged.
Substantial share interests
As at 31 December 2024, the Company had been notified of the following voting interests in the ordinary share capital of the Company in accordance with DTR 5
of the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules. It should be noted that these holdings may have changed since notified to the Company Percentages
are shown as notified, calculated with reference to the Company’s disclosed share capital as at the date of the movement triggering the notification.
Substantial shareholders
No. of shares
%
Wellington Management
1,808,374
9.48
Mr Steven Cohen
1,510,412
7.94
Ennismore Fund Management Ltd
1,191,222
6.26
Invesco Ltd
1,802,696
9.67
IG Markets Limited
580,773
3.04
Between 1 January 2025 to 12 March 2025 the following notifications have been received by the Company:
• IG Markets Limited reduced their holding to 562,506 (2.95%)
• Premier Miton Group plc increased their holding to1,138,991 (5.97%)
• The Diverse Income Trust PLC increased their holding to 757,759 (3.97%)
• Invesco Ltd reduced their holding to 832,247 (4.36%)
Articles of Association
Changes to the Company’s Articles of Association must be approved by shareholders by way of a special resolution and must comply with the Companies Act
2006 and other regulatory requirements, as applicable.
Directors’ report
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
115
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors
Board of Directors
The Directors of the Company who served during the year, and up to the date of signing the Financial Statements were:
• Ann Berresford
• Jim Brown (from 31 March 2024)
• Lord Forsyth (until 16 May 2024)
• Julie Hopes (from 23 October 2024)
• Rachel Lawrence
• David McCreadie
• Victoria Mitchell
• Paul Myers
• Finlay Williamson
• Victoria Stewart (until 31 December 2024)
Directors’ interests
The Directors’ interests in the Company’s shares are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration report on page 105. No Director had a material interest in any
significant contract (other than a service contract or contract for services) with the Company at any time during the year. The Directors are advised of their statutory
duty to avoid conflicts of interest with the interests of the Company. All actual and potential conflicts are brought to the attention of the Board. The operation of
the Company’s policy on conflicts of interest is described in the Governance section on page 82.
Appointment and replacement
of Directors
The Company’s Articles of Association empower the Board to appoint as a Director any person who is willing to act as such. Such person shall hold office only until
the next AGM, but shall then be eligible for reappointment by the shareholders. The Articles also provide that the Company may fill any vacancies on the Board.
The Articles provide that the Company may by ordinary resolution of which special notice is given, remove any Director from office and elect another person in
their place. The Articles also set out the specific circumstances in which a Director shall vacate office.
The Articles require that at each AGM one-third of the Directors (or, if their number is not a multiple of three, the number nearest to but not exceeding one-third)
shall retire from office by rotation. Notwithstanding the provisions of the Articles, it is the Company’s practice that all Directors retire and stand for reappointment
in accordance with the recommendations of the UK Corporate Governance Code.
Powers of the Directors
The Directors’ powers are conferred on them by UK legislation and the Company’s Articles of Association and include the ability to issue or buy back shares (as
detailed in the Shares and Shareholder section on page 114).
Directors’ report
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
116
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Change of control
With reference to Schedule 7 of the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (paragraph 13(2)(k)), the
Company does not have agreements with any Director or employee that would provide compensation for loss of office or employment resulting from a change
of control following a takeover bid, except that provisions of the Company’s share schemes may cause options and awards granted under such schemes to vest in
those circumstances.
There are no significant agreements to which the Company is party that take effect, alter or terminate upon a change of control following a takeover bid for
the Company.
Directors’ indemnities
The Company’s Articles of Association provide that, subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, any Director or Officer of the Company, or any
associated company, shall be identified by the Company against any liability. This indemnity, which applies to all Directors, has been in force throughout the year
up to and including the date of signing this report. The Group has also maintained Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance throughout 2024.
Directors’ service agreements
Each Executive Director, at the time of this report, has a written service agreement, which may be terminated by either party on not less than 12 months’ notice.
Non-Executive Directors’ letters
of appointment
The letters of appointment of the Non-Executive Directors are issued for an initial period of three years, which may be renewed for further terms as appropriate.
All appointments are subject to a review by the Nomination Committee upon the third anniversary and on extension a further review is undertaken at the sixth
anniversary at which the Board’s succession plans and the need to refresh the Board’s skills and experiences are carefully considered. The role and responsibilities
of each Director are clearly set out and include the duties of a Director as provided in the Companies Act 2006. It is made clear that these duties do not include
any management function but an indication that the Director is expected to support and challenge management and help in the development of the Group’s
strategy. Six months’ notice is required to be served by either party to terminate the appointment. The Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment are
available for inspection at the Company’s registered office during normal business hours and at the AGM (for 15 minutes prior to, and during, the Meeting).
Related party transactions
Note 42, page 174.
Auditors and Audit
Independent Auditors and
audit information
Deloitte LLP was reappointed as Auditor at the Annual General Meeting held in 2024. As detailed in the Audit Committee report on page 88, the Board is
recommending the reappointment of Deloitte LLP as Auditor at the 2025 Annual General Meeting.
Each Director in office at the date of this Directors’ report confirms that so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the
Company’s Auditor is unaware and each Director has taken all reasonable steps that they ought to have taken as a Director to make themselves aware of any
relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s Auditor is aware of that information.
This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.
Directors’ report
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
117
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Directors’ report
Statements
Directors’ responsibility statements
The statement of Directors’ responsibility for preparing the Annual Report and Accounts is set out on page 119 and is deemed to form part of the Directors’
report. Within this, the Directors have included a statement that the Annual Report and Accounts presents a fair, balanced and understandable assessment of
the Group’s position and prospects. To help the Board discharge its responsibilities in this area, the Board consulted the Audit Committee and following the
Committee’s advice, the Board considered and concluded that:
• the business model and strategy were clearly described;
• the assessment of performance was balanced;
• KPIs were used consistently;
• the language used was concise, with good linkages to different parts of the document; and
• an appropriate forward-looking orientation had been adopted.
Internal control and
risk management
The Directors confirm that they have carried out a robust assessment of the principal and emerging risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten its
business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity. The Board considers that the information it receives enables it to review the effectiveness of the Group’s
internal controls in accordance with the FRC’s Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting. Areas where
financial control can be improved are identified and appropriate actions agreed as part of our internal control systems. Senior management, the Board and the
Risk Committee regularly monitor progress towards completion of these actions. The Board considers that none of the identified areas for improvement constitute
a significant failing or weakness.
Going concern
The Strategic Report discusses the Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position.
In addition, it sets out the Group’s financial position, cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities. The financial risk management note to the Financial
Statements sets out the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing capital and its financial risk management objectives, together with details of
financial instruments and exposure to credit and liquidity risk.
The Group has access to the financial resources required to run the business efficiently and has a strong gross cash position. The Group’s forecasts and projections,
including rigorous stress testing, show that the Group will be able to operate within its available resources for at least 12 months from the date of this report.
This has included a detailed focus on the wider macroeconomic and geopolitical environment, legal and regulatory risks and the potential for multiple risks to
occur simultaneously. As a consequence, the Directors consider it appropriate to prepare the annual Financial Statements on a going concern basis of accounting.
For further information, please see page 40.
Statement of viability
In accordance with Provision 31 of the Code, the Directors have assessed the prospects of the Group over a longer period than the 12 months as required by the
Going Concern provision. Details of the assessment can be found on pages 40 and 41.
Publication of unaudited
financial information
On 1 November 2024 the Company published a trading statement which contained the following profit forecast:
“As a result, the Board now expects the Group’s underlying, continuing profit before tax for FY24 to fall materially below market expectations by between £10m
and £15m.”
This provided a forecast for underlying, continuing profit before tax of between £36.6 million to £41.6 million. The audited underlying, continuing profit before tax
for 2024 was £39.1 million.
The Directors’ Report was approved by the Board of Directors on 12 March 2025 and is signed on its behalf by:
Lisa Daniels
Company Secretary
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
118
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
The Directors are responsible for preparing the
Annual Report and the Financial Statements in
accordance with applicable law and regulations.
Company law requires the Directors to prepare Financial
Statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors
are required to prepare the Group Financial Statements
in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting
standards. The Financial Statements also comply with
International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRSs’) as issued
by the IASB. The Directors have also chosen to prepare the
Parent Company Financial Statements under UK-adopted
international accounting standards. Under company law the
Directors must not approve the Financial Statements unless
they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the
state of affairs of the Company and of the profit or loss of
the Company for that period.
In preparing these Financial Statements, International
Accounting Standard 1 requires that directors:
• properly select and apply accounting policies;
• present information, including accounting policies, in a
manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and
understandable information;
• provide additional disclosures when compliance with the
specific requirements of the financial reporting framework
are insufficient to enable users to understand the impact of
particular transactions, other events and conditions on the
entity’s financial position and financial performance; and
• make an assessment of the Company’s ability to
continue as a going concern.
The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting
records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any
time the financial position of the Company and enable
them to ensure that the Financial Statements comply with
the Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for
safeguarding the assets of the Company and hence for taking
reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud
and other irregularities.
The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and
integrity of the corporate and financial information included
on the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom
governing the preparation and dissemination of financial
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.
Responsibility statement
Each of the Directors who are in office at the date of this report
and whose names and roles are listed on pages 71 to 73 of this
Annual Report confirm that to the best of their knowledge:
• the Financial Statements, prepared in accordance with the
relevant financial reporting framework, give a true and fair
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or
loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the
consolidation taken as a whole;
• the Management Report includes a fair review of the
development and performance of the business and the
position of the Company and the undertakings included
in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a
description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they
face; and
• the Annual Report and Financial Statements, taken as a
whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and provide
the information necessary for shareholders to assess the
Company’s position and performance, business model
and strategy.
This responsibility statement was approved by the Board of
Directors on 12 March and is signed on its behalf by:
Jim Brown
David McCreadie
Chair
Chief Executive Officer
Directors’ responsibility statement
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
119
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
Report on the audit of the Financial Statements
1. Opinion
In our opinion:
• the Financial Statements of Secure Trust Bank PLC (the ‘Parent Company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s
affairs as at 31 December 2024 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;
• the Group Financial Statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted international accounting standards and IFRS Accounting Standards as issued
by the International Accounting Standards Board (‘IASB’);
• the Parent Company Financial Statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted international accounting standards and as applied in accordance
with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and
• the Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
We have audited the Financial Statements which comprise:
• the Consolidated statement of comprehensive income;
• the Statement of financial position for Group and Company;
• the Statement of changes in equity for Group and Company;
• the Consolidated and Company statements of cash flows; and
• the related Notes 1 to 45 (excluding Note 40).
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom adopted international accounting standards
and IFRS Accounting Standards as issued by the IASB. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Parent Company financial statements is applicable law
and United Kingdom adopted international accounting standards.
2. Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the auditor’s
responsibilities for the audit of the Financial Statements section of our report.
We are independent of the Group and the Parent Company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the Financial Statements in the UK, including the Financial
Reporting Council’s (the ‘FRC’s’) Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. The
non-audit services provided to the Group and Parent Company for the year are disclosed in Note 6 to the Financial Statements. We confirm that we have not provided any non-audit services
prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard to the Group or the Parent Company.
We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
120
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
3. Summary of our audit approach
Key audit matters
The key audit matters that we identified in the current year were:
• impairment of loans and advances to customers; and
• regulatory and litigation matters.
Within this report, key audit matters are identified as follows:
Increased level of risk
Materiality
The materiality that we used for the Group Financial Statements was £2.7 million. This was determined on the basis of 0.75% of net assets.
Scoping
We have audited the entire financial information of the Parent Company. For the remaining entities, we have performed specified audit procedures on specific
account balances and class of transactions.
Significant changes in
our approach
There has been no significant change in our audit approach in the current year.
4. Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the Financial Statements, we have concluded that the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the Financial Statements is appropriate.
Our evaluation of the Directors’ assessment of the Group’s and Parent Company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included:
• obtaining an understanding of relevant controls around the going concern assessment including Board approval;
• with the involvement of prudential regulation specialists, we read the most recent Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process and Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process documents,
assessed the capital and liquidity projections, assessed the results of the capital and liquidity stress testing, evaluating key assumptions and methods used in the capital and liquidity stress testing
models, and tested the mechanical accuracy of the forecasts;
• inspecting correspondence with regulators to assess the capital and liquidity requirements imposed by the Group’s regulators during the year;
• obtaining the capital and liquidity forecasts and assessing key assumptions and their projected impact on capital and liquidity ratios, particularly with respect to loan book growth and potential
credit losses;
• evaluating the impact of the regulatory matters outlined in section 5.2 on the Group’s capital and liquidity positions over the planning horizon as part of our stress testing;
• assessing the historical accuracy of forecasts; and
• assessing the appropriateness of the disclosures made in the Financial Statements.
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group’s
and Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least 12 months from when the Financial Statements are authorised for issue.
In relation to the reporting on how the Group has applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to the Directors’ statement in the
Financial Statements about whether the Directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
121
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
5. Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the Financial Statements of the current period and include the most significant
assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on the overall audit strategy; the allocation of
resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team.
These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the Financial Statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
5.1. Impairment of loans and advances to customers
Key audit
matter
description
The Group held allowances for impairment of loans and advances to customers of £111.8 million (2023: £88.1 million) against loans and advances to customers of £3,720.3 million
(2023: £3,403.4 million).
For financial assets measured at amortised cost, IFRS 9 Financial Instruments requires the carrying value to be assessed for impairment using unbiased forward-looking
information. The measurement of expected credit losses (‘ECL’) is complex and involves judgements and estimates relating to probability of default (‘PD’), exposure at default
(‘EAD’), loss given default (‘LGD’) collateral valuations, significant increases in credit risk (‘SICR’) and macroeconomic scenario modelling. Where model or other limitations exist,
Expert Credit Judgements (‘ECJs’) are applied to the model output. These assumptions are prepared using historical behaviour and the Directors’ judgement, in particular with
respect to the incorporation of forward-looking information and identifying significant increases in credit risk.
We identified three specific areas in relation to the ECL that require significant judgement or relate to assumptions to which the overall ECL provision is particularly sensitive:
• the accuracy of the LGD on the Vehicle Finance portfolio, including the impact of the Financial Conduct Authority’s (‘FCA’) review on Borrowers in Financial Difficulty (‘BiFD’);
• the appropriateness of the PD rates applied to the Retail Finance portfolio; and
• the appropriateness of the approach and assumptions used in calculating the Real Estate Finance Stage 3 ECL allowance for the largest and most complex stage 3 exposure.
Given the material effect of the significant judgements taken in deriving the above, we also considered that there is a potential for fraud through possible manipulation of
this balance.
There is an increased level of risk this year mainly due to the implementation of the new PD model for Retail Finance and increased subjectivity in the components of the LGD
assumptions for Vehicle Finance given the impact of the FCA’s review on BiFD.
Impairment of loans and advances to customers, including associated accounting policies is included in Note 16 of the Financial Statements. The corresponding area in the Audit
Committee report is on page 86.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
122
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
How the scope
of our audit
responded
to the
key audit matter
Our audit procedures included obtaining an understanding of the relevant controls over the impairment provision with particular focus on controls over significant assumptions
and judgements used in the calculation of ECL. To challenge the accuracy of the LGD on the Vehicle Finance portfolio, with the involvement of credit risk specialists, we:
• assessed historical and external market data used to determine the LGD assumptions used within the ECL model, and assessed how the historical data may be impacted by
both internal and external factors; and
• assessed the adjustments made to the LGD assumptions to reflect the impact that the FCA’s discussions on BiFD has had on historical LGD data and will have on future
collection projections.
To assess the appropriateness of the PD rates applied to the Retail Finance portfolio, with the involvement of credit risk specialists, we:
• performed a full methodology review and independent re-code of the new Retail Finance PD model;
• evaluated whether there are any limitations in the new model which require an ECJ; and
• assessed whether the SICR quantitative thresholds remain appropriate as a result of new model implementation.
To challenge the appropriateness of the approach and assumptions used in calculating the Real Estate Finance Stage 3 ECL allowance for the largest and most complex stage 3
exposure, we:
• inquired with Management and others within the Group to understand the latest status of the exposure;
• inspected minutes of the Impairment Decision Committee and other risk related minutes to corroborate the inquiries performed;
• assessed the appropriateness of the assumptions used in the discounted cash flow computation and whether they are reasonable considering the latest economic environment
and the appropriateness of the relevant cash flows used specific to the latest development;
• assessed the reasonableness of the discounted cash flow computations, specifically the scenarios and their assigned weightings. Our assessment involved corroborating these
inputs with other audit evidence obtained during the course of our audit; and
• engaged our real estate valuation specialists to undertake an independent assessment of the value of the collateral used in the cash flow computations.
As part of our wider assessment of impairment of loans and advances to customers we:
• assessed the accuracy and completeness of source data and report logic used to extract source data from the underlying lending systems for input into the impairment models;
• with support from our real estate valuation specialists, assessed a sample of collateral valuations used in the LGD calculation for the Real Estate Finance portfolio;
• reconciled the impairment models to the general ledger and tested a sample of loans to assess whether the data used in the provision calculation was complete and accurate;
• with support from our economic specialists we have independently assessed the economic forecasts by benchmarking to the alternate forecasts and scenarios weightings used
by Management in their ECL models;
• assessed the quantitative and qualitative factors used in the SICR assessment by reference to standard validation metrics including the proportion of transfers to stage 2 driven
solely by being 30 days past due, the volatility of loans in stage 2 and the proportion of loans that spend little or no time in stage 2 before moving to stage 3;
• evaluated the Group’s SICR policy including the curing criteria and assessed whether it complies with IFRS 9;
• tested the completeness and accuracy of data used in applying the quantitative and qualitative criteria in the SICR assessment on whether loans are assigned to the correct
stage; and
• as a stand back test, considered potential contradictory evidence, assessed changes in the overall coverage ratios and the completeness of key judgements and ECJs adopted
by the Directors through comparison to industry peers.
Key
observations
Based on the evidence obtained, we found that the judgements and assumptions underpinning the allowances for impairment of loans and advances to customers are
determined and applied appropriately, and therefore that the recognised provision is reasonable.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
123
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
5.2. Regulatory and litigation matters
Key audit
matter
description
The Group is exposed to regulatory and litigation matters in relation to historical motor commission arrangements. As reported in Note 29, the Group’s provision for these
matters is £6.4 million at 31 December 2024 (2023: £nil).
Significant judgement is required by the Group in determining whether, taking account of IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets, the amount recorded
is representative of the Group’s best estimate to settle the probable obligation based on the information available to the Group, where there is significant uncertainty around the
final outcome as a result of the recent Court of Appeal decisions, appeal to the Supreme Court and other related legal developments and the impact of the ongoing review by
the FCA. This has also resulted in an increased level of risk this year.
Details of the provision and accounting estimate is included in Note 29. The corresponding area in the Audit Committee report is on page 86.
How the scope
of our audit
responded
to the
key audit matter
Our audit procedures included obtaining an understanding of the relevant controls around determining an appropriate provision.
With the involvement of regulatory specialists we have performed the following procedures:
• evaluated the assessment of the provision, associated probabilities, and potential outcomes in accordance with IAS 37;
• tested the mathematical accuracy of the provision including the completeness and accuracy of data used in the provision;
• assessed the methodology and assumptions applied to determine the provision;
• inspected correspondence with the Group’s regulators to challenge the completeness of the provisions;
• evaluated whether the disclosures made in the Financial Statements appropriately reflect the facts and key sources of estimation uncertainty; and
• performed the stand back assessment on the appropriateness of the provision recognised with reference to the conclusions reached across the industry.
Key
observations
Based on the evidence obtained, we found that the judgements and assumptions underpinning the conclusions in relation to regulatory and litigation matters and related
disclosures were appropriate.
6. Our application of materiality
6.1. Materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the Financial Statements that makes it probable that the economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or
influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work.
Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the Financial Statements as a whole as follows:
Group Financial Statements
Parent Company Financial Statements
Materiality
£2.7 million (2023: £2.6 million)
£2.7 million (2023: £2.4 million)
Basis for
determining
materiality
0.75% of net assets (2023: 0.75% of
net assets)
0.75% of net assets (2023: 0.75% of
net assets)
Rationale for
the benchmark
applied
Net assets have been used as the basis for determining materiality as it
is considered a key metric for users of the Financial Statements given the
capital requirements which arise from being a regulated bank. As most of
the Group’s operations are carried out by the Parent Company, the same
materiality basis was used for both.
Parent
Company
£1.9 million
Audit Committee
reporting threshold
£0.1 million
Group materiality
£2.7 million
Net assets
£360.5 million
Net assets
Group materiality
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
124
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
6.2. Performance materiality
We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceed the materiality for the Financial
Statements as a whole.
Group Financial Statements
Parent Company Financial Statements
Performance
materiality
70% (2023: 70%) of Group materiality
70% (2023: 70%) of Parent Company materiality
Basis and
rationale
for determining
performance
materiality
In determining performance materiality, we considered a number of factors, including:
• our overall risk assessment, including our assessment of the Group’s overall control environment and whether we were able to rely on controls;
• our understanding of the business; and
• the number of corrected and uncorrected misstatements identified in the prior year.
6.3. Error reporting threshold
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of £0.1 million (2023: £0.1 million), as well as differences below that threshold that, in our
view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the overall presentation of the Financial Statements.
7. An overview of the scope of our audit
7.1. Identification and scoping of components
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group and its environment, including Group–wide controls, and assessing the risks of material misstatement at the Group level.
Our Group audit was mainly focused on audit of the Parent Company which represents 99% of the Group’s revenue; 100% of the Group’s profit before tax, and 98% of the Group’s net assets. We have
audited the entire financial information of the Parent Company, for which we applied a component performance materiality equal to £1.9 million. For the remaining entities, we have performed
specified audit procedures of the specific account balances and class of transactions.
Audit testing to respond to the risks of material misstatement was performed directly by the Group audit engagement team. We have also performed testing over the consolidation process of
Group entities.
7.2. Our consideration of the control environment
We identified relevant IT systems for the Group in respect of the financial reporting system, lending systems for Vehicle Finance, Real Estate Finance, Commercial Finance, Retail Finance, and the
deposits system. With involvement of our IT specialists, we performed testing of the general IT controls associated with these systems and relied upon IT controls in respect of these systems.
In the current year, we relied on controls in relation to both the lending and deposits business cycles. We obtained an understanding of the relevant controls related to the financial reporting process
that address the risk of material misstatement. We tested relevant automated and manual controls for these business cycles and were able to adopt a controls reliance approach. We did not rely on
controls for impairment of loans and advances with customers or regulatory and litigation matters.
7.3. Our consideration of climate-related risks
We have obtained an understanding of the process for considering the impact of climate-related risks and controls and assessed whether the risks identified are complete and consistent with our
understanding of the entity as part of our own risk assessment procedures. These risks and Task Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures are contained within pages 54 to 65 of the Annual
Report and Accounts.
In conjunction with our climate risk specialists, we have held discussions with the Group to understand the process for identifying affected operations, including the governance and controls over this
process, and the subsequent effect on the financial reporting for the Group and the long-term strategy to respond to climate change risks as they evolve.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
125
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
Our audit work has involved reviewing Management’s assessment of the physical and transition risks identified and considered in the Group’s climate risk assessment.
As set out in Note 16 to the Financial Statements, the Directors do not consider that climate change risk is currently a key source of estimation uncertainty nor that it presents a material impact to the
judgements made in the Financial Statements.
We performed our own risk assessment of the potential impact of climate change on the Group’s account balances and classes of transactions and did not identify any additional risks of material
misstatement. We also read the Annual report to consider whether the climate related disclosures are materially consistent with the Financial Statements and our knowledge obtained in the audit and
also evaluated the appropriateness of disclosures included in the Financial Statements in Note 16.
8. Other information
The other information comprises the information included in the Annual Report, other than the Financial Statements and our Auditor’s Report thereon. The Directors are responsible for the other
information contained within the Annual Report.
Our opinion on the Financial Statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance
conclusion thereon.
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the Financial Statements, or our knowledge obtained in the
course of the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.
If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the Financial Statements themselves.
If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.
9. Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibility statement, the Directors are responsible for the preparation of the Financial Statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view,
and for such internal control as the Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of Financial Statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the Financial Statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing as applicable, matters
related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic
alternative but to do so.
10. Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the Financial Statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the Financial Statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an Auditor’s
Report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic
decisions of users taken on the basis of these Financial Statements.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the Financial Statements is located on the FRC’s website at:
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities
. This description forms part of our
Auditor’s Report.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
126
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
11. Extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined section 10, to detect material misstatements
in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below.
11.1. Identifying and assessing potential risks related to irregularities
In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud and non-compliance with laws and regulations, we considered the following:
• the nature of the industry and sector, control environment and business performance including the design of the Group’s remuneration policies, key drivers for Directors’ remuneration, bonus levels
and performance targets;
• the Group’s own assessment of the risk that irregularities may occur either as a result of fraud or error;
• results of our enquiries of management, Internal Audit, the Directors and the Audit Committee about their own identification and assessment of the risks of irregularities, including those that are
specific to the Group’s sector;
• any matters we identified having obtained and reviewed the Group’s documentation of their policies and procedures relating to:
-
identifying, evaluating and complying with laws and regulations and whether they were aware of any instances of non-compliance;
-
detecting and responding to the risks of fraud and whether they have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud, including the Group’s internal fraud risk assessment for the current
financial period;
-
the internal controls established to mitigate risks of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations;
• the matters discussed among the audit engagement team and relevant internal specialists, including tax, real estate valuation, financial instruments, economic advisory, climate risk, regulatory
risk, share based payments, data analytics, IT, prudential regulatory and credit risk specialists regarding how and where fraud might occur in the Financial Statements and any potential indicators
of fraud.
As a result of these procedures, we considered the opportunities and incentives that may exist within the organisation for fraud and identified the greatest potential for fraud in the following area:
impairment of loans and advances to customers. In common with all audits under ISAs (UK), we are also required to perform specific procedures to respond to the risk of management override.
We also obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework that the Group operates in, focusing on provisions of those laws and regulations that had a direct effect on the
determination of material amounts and disclosures in the Financial Statements. The key laws and regulations we considered in this context included the UK Companies Act, Listing Rules and
tax legislation.
In addition, we considered provisions of other laws and regulations that do not have a direct effect on the Financial Statements but compliance with which may be fundamental to the Group’s ability
to operate or to avoid a material penalty. These included the regulation set by the FCA and Prudential Regulation Authority (‘PRA’) relating to regulatory capital and liquidity requirements.
11.2. Audit response to risks identified
As a result of performing the above, we identified impairment of loans and advances to customers as a key audit matter related to the potential risk of fraud. The key audit matters section of our
report explains the matter in more detail and also describes the specific procedures we performed in response to that key audit matter.
In addition to the above, our procedures to respond to risks identified included the following:
• reviewing the Financial Statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation to assess compliance with provisions of relevant laws and regulations described as having a direct effect on
the Financial Statements;
• enquiring of management, the Directors, the Audit Committee and in-house legal counsel concerning actual and potential litigation and claims;
• performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that may indicate risks of material misstatement due to fraud;
• reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, reviewing internal audit reports and reviewing correspondence with HMRC, FCA and PRA as well as holding discussions with the
PRA; and
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
127
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
• in addressing the risk of fraud through management override of controls, testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments; assessing whether the judgements made in making
accounting estimates are indicative of a potential bias; and evaluating the business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or outside the normal course of business.
We also communicated relevant identified laws and regulations and potential fraud risks to all engagement team members including internal specialists and remained alert to any indications of fraud
or non-compliance with laws and regulations throughout the audit.
Report on other legal and regulatory requirements
12. Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion the part of the Directors’ Remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
• the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ report for the financial year for which the Financial Statements are prepared is consistent with the Financial Statements; and
• the Strategic Report and the Directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the Parent Company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified any material
misstatements in the Strategic Report or the Directors’ report.
13. Opinion on other matter prescribed by the Capital Requirements (Country-by-Country Reporting) Regulations 2013
In our opinion the information given in Note 44 to the Financial Statements for the financial year ended 31 December 2024 has been properly prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with
the Capital Requirements (Country-by Country Reporting) Regulations 2013.
14. Corporate Governance Statement
The Listing Rules require us to review the Directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Group’s
compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review.
Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the Corporate Governance Statement is materially consistent with the Financial
Statements and our knowledge obtained during the audit:
• the Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of accounting and any material uncertainties identified set out on pages 40 and 41;
• the Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the Group’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the period is appropriate set out on pages 40 and 41;
• the Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 119;
• the Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks set out on pages 30 to 39;
• the section of the Annual Report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems set out on page 89; and
• the section describing the work of the Audit Committee set out on pages 83 to 89.
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
128
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
15. Matters on which we are required to report by exception
15.1. Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
• we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
• adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or
• the Parent Company Financial Statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.
We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.
15.2. Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration have not been made or the part of the Directors’ Remuneration report to
be audited is not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.
We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.
16. Other matters which we are required to address
16.1. Auditor tenure
Following the recommendation of the Audit Committee, we were appointed by the Board of Directors on 16 May 2018 to audit the Financial Statements for the year ending 31 December 2018 and
subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement including previous renewals and reappointments of the firm is seven years, covering the years ending 31 December 2018
to 31 December 2024.
16.2. Consistency of the audit report with the additional report to the Audit Committee
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit Committee we are required to provide in accordance with ISAs (UK).
17. Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state
to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an Auditor’s Report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume
responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.
As required by the FCA Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rule (‘DTR’) 4.1.15R – DTR 4.1.18R, these Financial Statements will form part of the Electronic Format Annual Financial Report filed on
the National Storage Mechanism of the FCA in accordance with DTR 4.1.15R – DTR 4.1.18R. This Auditor’s Report provides no assurance over whether the Electronic Format Annual Financial Report
has been prepared in compliance with DTR 4.1.15R – DTR 4.1.18R.
Neil Reed FCA (Senior statutory auditor)
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Statutory Auditor
Birmingham, United Kingdom
12 March 2025
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Secure Trust Bank PLC
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
129
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Note
2024
£million
2023
£million
Income statement
Continuing operations
Interest income and similar income
4.1
366.0
304.0
Interest expense and similar charges
4.1
(181.1)
(136.5)
Net interest income
4.1
184.9
167.5
Fee and commission income
4.2
19.2
17.3
Fee and commission expense
4.2
(0.2)
(0.1)
Net fee and commission income
4.2
19.0
17.2
Operating income
203.9
184.7
Net impairment charge on loans and advances to customers
16
(61.9)
(43.2)
Other (losses)/gains
(0.3)
0.3
Fair value and other gains on financial instruments
5
1.2
0.5
Operating expenses
6
(103.8)
(99.7)
Profit before income tax from continuing
operations before exceptional items
39.1
42.6
Exceptional items
8
(9.9)
(6.5)
Profit before income tax from continuing operations
29.2
36.1
Income tax expense
9
(9.5)
(9.7)
Profit for the year from continuing operations
19.7
26.4
Discontinued operations
Loss before income tax from discontinued operations
10
(2.7)
Income tax credit
10
0.6
Loss for the year from discontinued operations
10
(2.1)
Profit for the year
19.7
24.3
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the year ended 31 December 2024
The Notes on pages 135 to 174 are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
Note
2024
£million
2023
£million
Other comprehensive income
Items that may be reclassified to the income statement
Cash flow hedge reserve movements
(0.8)
Reclassification to the income statement
1.3
0.6
Taxation
(0.2)
(0.1)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of income tax
0.3
0.5
Total other comprehensive income
20.0
24.8
Profit attributable to equity holders of the Company
19.7
24.3
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders
of the Company
20.0
24.8
Earnings per share for profit attributable to the equity
holders of the Company during the year (pence per share)
Basic earnings per ordinary share
11.1
103.4
129.6
Diluted earnings per ordinary share
11.2
101.4
126.1
Basic earnings per ordinary share – continuing operations
103.4
140.8
Diluted earnings per ordinary share – continuing operations
101.4
137.0
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
130
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Group
Company
Note
2024
£million
2023
£million
2024
£million
2023
£million
ASSETS
Cash and Bank of England reserve account
445.0
351.6
445.0
351.6
Loans and advances to banks
13
24.0
53.7
23.6
53.0
Loans and advances to customers
14, 15
3,608.5
3,315.3
3,608.5
3,315.3
Fair value adjustment for portfolio hedged risk
17
(6.8)
(3.9)
(6.8)
(3.9)
Derivative financial instruments
17
14.3
25.5
14.3
25.5
Investment property
18
0.9
0.9
Property, plant and equipment
19
9.9
10.8
6.0
6.3
Right-of-use assets
20
1.6
1.8
1.4
1.6
Intangible assets
21
5.0
5.9
2.9
3.5
Investments in group undertakings
22
6.1
5.9
Current tax assets
0.2
0.1
1.0
Deferred tax assets
23
3.3
4.3
3.3
4.3
Other assets
24
11.7
12.9
13.0
14.4
Total assets
4,116.7
3,778.0
4,119.2
3,778.4
LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
Liabilities
Due to banks
25
365.8
402.0
365.8
402.0
Deposits from customers
26
3,244.9
2,871.8
3,244.9
2,871.8
Fair value adjustment for portfolio hedged risk
17
(3.4)
(1.4)
(3.4)
(1.4)
Derivative financial instruments
17
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
Current tax liabilities
0.3
Lease liabilities
27
1.8
2.3
1.6
2.1
Other liabilities
28
32.5
37.7
41.1
44.7
Provisions for liabilities and charges
29
11.3
6.0
11.3
5.6
Subordinated liabilities
30
93.3
93.1
93.3
93.1
Total liabilities
3,756.2
3,433.5
3,764.6
3,440.2
Equity attributable to owners of the parent
Share capital
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
Share premium
84.0
83.8
84.0
83.8
Other reserves
(2.2)
(1.7)
(2.2)
(1.7)
Retained earnings
271.1
254.8
265.2
248.5
Total equity
360.5
344.5
354.6
338.2
Total liabilities and equity
4,116.7
3,778.0
4,119.2
3,778.4
Consolidated and Company statement of financial position
As at 31 December 2024
The Company has elected to take the exemption under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006
to not present the parent company income statement. The profit for the parent company for the
year of £20.1 million is presented in the Company statement of changes in equity.
The consolidated and company financial statements on pages 130 to 174 were approved by the
Board of Directors on 12 March 2025 and were signed on its behalf by:
Jim Brown
David McCreadie
Chair
Chief Executive Officer
The Notes on pages 135 to 174 are an integral part of these consolidated
financial statements.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
131
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Consolidated and Company statement of changes in equity
Group
Company
Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent
Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent
Share
capital
£million
Share
premium
£million
Other reserves
Retained
earnings
£million
Total
£million
Share
capital
£million
Share
premium
£million
Other reserves
Retained
earnings
£million
Total
£million
Cash flow
hedge
reserve
£million
Own
shares
£million
Cash flow
hedge
reserve
£million
Own
shares
£million
Balance at 1 January 2024
7.6
83.8
(0.3)
(1.4)
254.8
344.5
7.6
83.8
(0.3)
(1.4)
248.5
338.2
Profit for 2024
19.7
19.7
20.1
20.1
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of income tax
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Total comprehensive income for the year
0.3
19.7
20.0
0.3
20.1
20.4
Purchase of own shares
(1.4)
(1.4)
(1.4)
(1.4)
Sale of own shares
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
Loss on sale of own shares
(0.5)
(0.5)
(0.5)
(0.5)
Issue of shares
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
Dividends paid
(5.2)
(5.2)
(5.2)
(5.2)
Share-based payments
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
Balance at 31 December 2024
7.6
84.0
(2.2)
271.1
360.5
7.6
84.0
(2.2)
265.2
354.6
Balance at 1 January 2023
7.5
82.2
(0.8)
(0.3)
237.8
326.4
7.5
82.2
(0.8)
(0.3)
230.2
318.8
Profit for 2023
24.3
24.3
25.6
25.6
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of income tax
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Total comprehensive income for the year
0.5
24.3
24.8
0.5
25.6
26.1
Purchase of own shares
(1.2)
(1.2)
(1.2)
(1.2)
Sale of own shares
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Issue of shares
0.1
1.6
1.7
0.1
1.6
1.7
Dividends paid
(8.4)
(8.4)
(8.4)
(8.4)
Share-based payments
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
Balance at 31 December 2023
7.6
83.8
(0.3)
(1.4)
254.8
344.5
7.6
83.8
(0.3)
(1.4)
248.5
338.2
The Notes on pages 135 to 174 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
132
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Consolidated statement of cash flows
For the year ended 31 December 2024
Note
2024
£million
2023
£million
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit for the year
19.7
24.3
Adjustments for:
Income tax expense
9
9.5
9.1
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
19
1.0
0.9
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
20
1.0
0.7
Amortisation of intangible assets
21
1.4
1.2
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment,
right-of-use assets and intangible assets
0.2
Impairment charge on loans and advances to customers
61.9
43.2
Share-based compensation
34
2.3
1.1
Provisions for liabilities and charges
29
9.8
8.5
Other non-cash items included in profit before tax
(0.6)
(0.8)
Cash flows from operating profits before changes in
operating assets and liabilities
106.0
88.4
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
Loans and advances to customers
(354.8)
(439.0)
Loans and advances to banks
5.0
(1.3)
Other assets
1.4
0.4
Deposits from customers
373.1
357.2
Provisions for liabilities and charges utilisation
(4.7)
(4.7)
Other liabilities
(5.5)
(37.8)
Income tax paid
(8.8)
(8.6)
Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities
111.7
(45.4)
Note
2024
£million
2023
£million
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
and intangible assets
19,21
(1.0)
(2.7)
Net cash outflow from investing activities
(1.0)
(2.7)
Cash flows from financing activities
Issue of subordinated debt
30
70.0
Redemption of subordinated debt
30
(28.8)
Drawdown/(repayment) of amounts due to banks
0.8
(0.9)
Drawdown of Index Long-Term Repos
125.0
Repayment of Term Funding
Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs
(160.0)
Purchase of own shares
(1.4)
(1.2)
Issue of shares
0.2
1.7
Dividends paid
12
(5.2)
(8.4)
Repayment of lease liabilities
27
(1.4)
(0.9)
Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities
(42.0)
31.5
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
68.7
(16.6)
Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January
400.3
416.9
Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December
35
469.0
400.3
The Notes on pages 135 to 174 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
133
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Company statement of cash flows
For the year ended 31 December 2024
Note
2024
£million
2023
£million
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit for the year
20.1
25.6
Adjustments for:
Income tax expense
9
6.2
6.7
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
19
0.6
0.6
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
20
0.8
0.6
Amortisation of intangible assets
21
1.1
1.0
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
0.1
Impairment charge on loans and advances to customers
62.0
43.2
Share-based compensation
34
2.1
0.9
Dividends received from subsidiaries
(9.5)
(10.2)
Provisions for liabilities and charges
29
10.1
7.2
Other non-cash items included in profit before tax
(1.2)
1.4
Cash flows from operating profits before changes in
operating assets and liabilities
92.3
77.1
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
Loans and advances to customers
(354.9)
(439.0)
Loans and advances to banks
5.0
(1.3)
Other assets
11.3
8.7
Deposits from customers
373.1
357.2
Provisions for liabilities and charges utilisation
(4.6)
(3.3)
Other liabilities
(3.9)
(38.6)
Income tax paid
(6.7)
(5.9)
Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities
111.6
(45.1)
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
and intangible assets
19, 21
(0.8)
(2.2)
Net cash outflow from investing activities
(0.8)
(2.2)
Note
2024
£million
2023
£million
Cash flows from financing activities
Issue of subordinated debt
30
70.0
Redemption of subordinated debt
30
(28.8)
Drawdown/(repayment) of amounts due to banks
0.8
(0.9)
Drawdown of Index Long-Term Repos
125.0
Repayment of Term Funding Scheme with additional
incentives for SMEs
(160.0)
Purchase of own shares
(1.4)
(1.2)
Issue of shares
0.2
1.7
Dividends paid
12
(5.2)
(8.4)
Repayment of lease liabilities
27
(1.2)
(0.8)
Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities
(41.8)
31.6
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
69.0
(15.7)
Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January
399.6
415.3
Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December
35
468.6
399.6
The Notes on pages 135 to 174 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
134
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
135
1. Accounting policies
The material accounting policies applied in the preparation of these consolidated financial
statements are set out below, and if applicable, directly under the relevant note to the
consolidated financial statements. These policies have been consistently applied to all of the
years presented, unless otherwise stated.
1.1. Reporting entity
Secure Trust Bank PLC is a public limited company incorporated in England and Wales in
the United Kingdom (referred to as the ‘Company’) and is limited by shares. The Company
is registered in England and Wales and has the registered number 00541132. The registered
address of the Company is Yorke House, Arleston Way, Solihull B90 4LH. The consolidated
financial statements of the Company as at, and for, the year ended 31 December 2024 comprise
Secure Trust Bank PLC and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the ‘Group’ and individually as
‘subsidiaries’). The Group is primarily involved in the provision of banking and financial services.
1.2. Basis of presentation
The Group’s consolidated financial statements and the Company’s financial statements have
been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards in conformity
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and UK-adopted International Financial
Reporting Standards. The consolidated financial statements also comply with International
Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRSs’) as issued by the IASB, including interpretations issued
by the IFRS Interpretations Committee. They have been prepared under the historical cost
convention, as modified by the valuation of derivative financial instruments and investment
properties. The consolidated financial statements are presented in pounds Sterling, which is the
functional and presentational currency of the entities within the Group.
There are no IFRSs that are issued but not yet effective that will have a material impact on
the Group.
The preparation of consolidated financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use
of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires management to exercise its judgement
in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas involving a higher degree
of judgement or complexity or areas where assumptions and estimates are significant to the
consolidated financial statements are disclosed in Note 2.
The Directors have assessed, in the light of current and anticipated economic conditions, the
Group’s ability to continue as a going concern. The Directors confirm they are satisfied that the
Company and the Group have adequate resources to continue in business for the foreseeable
future. For this reason, they continue to adopt the ‘going concern’ basis for preparing accounts,
as set out in the Viability and going concern section of the Strategic Report, starting on page 40.
The consolidated financial statements were authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on
12 March 2025.
1.3. Consolidation
Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are all investees controlled by the Group. The Group controls an investee when
it is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee, and has
the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee. Subsidiaries are fully
consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group.
The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries by
the Group. The cost of an acquisition is measured as the fair value of the assets given, equity
instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of exchange, plus costs
directly attributable to the acquisition. Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent
liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair values at the
acquisition date, irrespective of the extent of any non-controlling interest. The excess of the cost
of acquisition, excluding directly attributable costs, over the fair value of the Group’s share of the
identifiable net assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. If the cost of acquisition is less than the
fair value of the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, the difference is recognised directly in the
income statement.
The parent company’s investments in subsidiaries are recorded at cost less, where appropriate,
provision for impairment. The fair value of the underlying business of the Company’s only
material investment was significantly higher than carrying value, and, therefore, no impairment
was required.
Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains and losses on transactions between
Group companies are eliminated.
Accounting policies of subsidiaries have been changed, where necessary, to ensure consistency
with the policies adopted by the Group.
Subsidiaries are de-consolidated from the date that control ceases.
Discontinued operations
Discontinued operations are a component of an entity that has been disposed of and represents
a major line of business and/or is part of a single co-ordinated disposal plan.
1.4. Financial assets and financial liabilities accounting policy
Financial assets (with the exception of derivative financial instruments) accounting policy
The Group classifies its financial assets at inception into three measurement categories;
‘amortised cost’, ‘Fair Value Through Other Comprehensive Income’ (‘FVOCI’) and ‘Fair Value
Through Profit or Loss’ (‘FVTPL’). A financial asset is measured at amortised cost if both the
following conditions are met and it has not been designated as at FVTPL:
• the asset is held within a business model whose objective is to hold the asset to collect its
contractual cash flows; and
• the contractual terms of the financial asset give rise to cash flows on specified dates that
are Solely Payments of Principal and Interest (‘SPPI’).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1. Accounting policies
continued
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
136
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
1.4. Financial assets and financial liabilities accounting policy
continued
The Group’s current business model for all financial assets, with the exception of derivative
financial instruments, is to hold to collect contractual cash flows, and all assets held give rise to
cash flows on specified dates that represent SPPI on the outstanding principal amount. All of the
Group’s financial assets are, therefore, currently classified as amortised cost, except for derivative
financial instruments. Loans are recognised when funds are advanced to customers and are
carried at amortised cost using the Effective Interest Rate (‘EIR’) method.
A debt instrument would be measured at FVOCI only if both the below conditions are met
and it has not been designated as FVTPL:
• the asset is held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting its
contractual cash flows and selling the financial asset; and
• the contractual terms of the financial asset give rise to cash flows on specified dates that
represent SPPI on the outstanding principal amount.
The Group currently has no financial instruments classified as FVOCI.
See below for further details of the business model assessment and the SPPI test.
On initial recognition of an equity investment that is not held for trading, the Group may
irrevocably elect to present subsequent changes in fair value in other comprehensive income.
This election would be made on an investment-by-investment basis. The Group currently holds
no such investments.
All other assets are classified as FVTPL.
Financial assets are not reclassified subsequent to their initial recognition, except in the period
after the Group changes its business model for managing financial assets. The Group has not
reclassified any financial assets during the reporting period.
Assessment whether contractual cash flows are SPPI
For the purposes of this assessment, ‘principal’ is defined as the fair value of the financial asset on
initial recognition. ‘Interest’ is defined as consideration for the cost of funds and for the credit risk
associated with the principal amount outstanding during a particular period of time and for other
basic lending risks and costs (e.g. administrative costs), as well as profit margin.
In assessing whether the contractual cash flows are SPPI, the Group considers the contractual
terms of the instrument. This includes assessing whether the financial asset contains a contractual
term that could change the timing or amount of contractual cash flows such that it would not
meet the condition.
In making the assessment, the Group considers:
• contingent events that would change the amount and timing of cash flows;
• prepayments and extension terms;
• terms that limit the Group’s claim to cash flows from specific assets (e.g. non-recourse asset
arrangements); and
• features that modify consideration of the time value of money (e.g. periodical reset of interest rate).
Business model assessment
The Group makes an assessment of the objective of a business model in which an asset is held
at a portfolio level because this best reflects the way the business is managed and information is
provided to management. The information considered includes:
• the stated policies and objectives for the portfolio and the operation of those policies in
practice. In particular, whether management’s strategy focuses on managing the portfolio in
order to collect contractual cash flows or whether it is managed in order to trade to realise fair
value changes;
• how the performance of the portfolio is evaluated and reports to management;
• the risks that affect the performance of the business model (and the financial assets held within
that business model) and how those risks are managed; and
• the frequency, volume and timing of sales in prior periods, the reasons for such sales and
its expectations about future sales activity. However, information about sales activity is not
considered in isolation, but as part of an overall assessment of how the Group’s stated
objective for managing the financial assets is achieved and how cash flows are realised.
Financial assets that are held for trading or managed and whose performance is evaluated on a
fair value basis are classified as FVTPL because they are neither held to collect contractual cash
flows nor held both to collect contractual cash flows and to sell financial assets.
The Group currently has no financial instruments classified as FVTPL.
Amortised cost measurement
The amortised cost of a financial asset or financial liability is the amount at which the financial
asset or financial liability is measured at initial recognition, plus or minus the cumulative
amortisation using the EIR, which is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash
payments or receipts through the expected life of the financial instrument, minus any reduction
for impairment.
Derecognition of financial assets
Financial assets are derecognised when the rights to receive cash flows from the financial assets
have expired or where the Group has transferred substantially all of the risks and rewards of
ownership or in the event of a substantial modification. There have not been any instances
where assets have only been partially derecognised.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
137
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
1. Accounting policies
continued
1.4. Financial assets and financial liabilities accounting policy
continued
Modification of loans
A customer’s account may be modified to assist customers who are in, or have recently overcome,
financial difficulties and have demonstrated both the ability and willingness to meet the current
or modified loan contractual payments. Substantial loan modifications result in the derecognition
of the existing loan, and the recognition of a new loan at the new origination EIR based on the
expected future cash flows at origination. Determination of the origination Probability of Default
(‘PD’) for the new loan is required, based on the PD as at the date of the modification, which is
used for the calculation of the impairment provision against the new loan. Any deferred fees or
deferred interest, and any difference between the carrying value of the derecognised loan and
the new loan, is written-off to the income statement on recognition of the new loan.
Where the modification is not considered to be substantial, neither the origination EIR nor the
origination probability of default for the modified loan changes. The net present value of changes
to the future contractual cash flows adjusts the carrying amount of the original asset with the
difference immediately being recognised in profit or loss. The adjusted carrying amount is then
amortised over the remaining term of the modified loan using the original EIR.
Financial liabilities (with the exception of derivative financial instruments)
The Group classifies its financial liabilities as measured at amortised cost. Such financial liabilities
are recognised when cash is received from depositors and carried at amortised cost using the
EIR method. Financial liabilities are derecognised when they are extinguished (i.e. when the
obligation specified in the contract is discharged, cancelled or expires).
Offsetting of financial assets and financial liabilities
Financial assets and financial liabilities are not offset in the consolidated financial statements
unless the Group has both a legally enforceable right and intention to offset.
1.5. Foreign currencies
Transactions in foreign currencies are initially recorded at the rates of exchange prevailing on the
dates of the transactions. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are
retranslated into the Company’s functional currency at the rates prevailing on the consolidated
statement of financial position date. Exchange differences arising on the settlement of monetary
items, and on the retranslation of monetary items, are included in the income statement for
the period.
2. Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
2.1. Judgements
No critical judgements have been identified.
2.2. Key sources of estimation uncertainty
Estimations that could have a material impact on the Group’s financial results, and, are
therefore, considered to be key sources of estimation uncertainty. Key sources of estimation
can be found in:
• Note 16. Allowances for impairment of loans and advances to customers;
• Note 29. Provisions for liabilities and charges.
3. Operating segments
The Group is organised into four operating segments, which consist of the different products
available, as disclosed below.
Consumer Finance
• Retail Finance: a market-leading online e-commerce service to retailers, providing unsecured
lending products to prime UK customers to facilitate the purchase of a wide range of consumer
products, including bicycles, musical instruments and equipment, furniture, outdoor/leisure,
electronics, dental, jewellery, home improvements and football season tickets.
• Vehicle Finance: hire purchase lending for used cars to prime and near-prime customers and
Personal Contract Purchase lending into the consumer prime credit market, both secured
against the vehicle financed. In addition, a Stocking Funding product is also offered, whereby
funds are advanced and secured against dealer forecourt used car stock, sourced from
auctions, part exchanges or trade sources.
Business Finance
• Real Estate Finance: lending secured against property assets to a maximum 70% loan-to-value
ratio, on fixed or variable rates over a term of up to five years.
• Commercial Finance: lending is predominantly against receivables, typically releasing 90% of
qualifying invoices under invoice discounting facilities. Other assets can also be funded either
long or short term and for a range of loan-to-value ratios alongside these services.
Other
This principally includes interest receivable from central banks, interest receivable and
payable on derivatives and interest payable on deposits from customers, amounts due to
banks and subordinated liabilities, and operating expenses, which are not recharged to the
operating segments.
The Group’s chief operating decision maker, the Executive Committee, regularly reviews these
segments by looking at the operating income, size of the loan books and impairments.
Interest expense is charged to the operating segments in accordance with the Group’s internal
funds transfer pricing policy. Operating expenses reflect costs incurred directly, and costs incurred
centrally that are reallocated to the operating segment to which they can be directly attributed.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
138
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
3. Operating segments
continued
Additionally, no balance sheet items are allocated to segments other than loans and advances
to customers.
All of the Group’s operations are conducted wholly within the United Kingdom and geographical
information is, therefore, not presented.
Retail
Vehicle
Real Estate
Commercial
Finance
Finance
Finance
Finance
Other
Group
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
31 December 2024
Interest income and similar income
140.7
69.2
87.1
29.8
39.2
366.0
Interest expense and similar charges
(53.9)
(21.6)
(54.5)
(17.6)
(33.5)
(181.1)
Net interest income
86.8
47.6
32.6
12.2
5.7
184.9
Fee and commission income
3.2
0.9
0.4
14.6
0.1
19.2
Fee and commission expense
(0.1)
(0.1)
(0.2)
Net fee and commission income
3.2
0.8
0.4
14.5
0.1
19.0
Operating income
90.0
48.4
33.0
26.7
5.8
203.9
Net impairment charge on
loans and advances to customers
(13.3)
(38.7)
(4.0)
(5.9)
(61.9)
Other gains/(losses)
0.1
(0.4)
(0.3)
Fair value gains
on financial instruments
1.2
1.2
Operating expenses
(26.1)
(31.6)
(10.0)
(8.1)
(28.0)
(103.8)
Profit/(loss) before income
tax before exceptional items
50.6
(21.8)
19.0
12.7
(21.4)
39.1
Exceptional items
(9.9)
(9.9)
Profit/(loss) before income tax
50.6
(21.8)
19.0
12.7
(31.3)
29.2
Loans and advances to customers
1,357.8
558.3 1,341.4
351.0
– 3,608.5
A new presentation layout for operating segments has been adopted in the current
year to provide information in a format aligned to the layout of the primary financial statements. 
Prior year data is also presented using the same format to aid comparability. This is intended to
provide more clear analysis of how each segment contributes to the Group’s performance.
Retail
Vehicle
Real Estate
Commercial
Finance
Finance
Finance
Finance
Other
Group
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
31 December 2023
Interest income and similar income
106.5
59.1
74.4
27.2
36.8
304.0
Interest expense and similar charges
(33.4)
(15.0)
(44.7)
(14.0)
(29.4)
(136.5)
Net interest income
73.1
44.1
29.7
13.2
7.4
167.5
Fee and commission income
3.2
1.8
0.9
11.4
17.3
Fee and commission expense
(0.1)
(0.1)
Net fee and commission income
3.2
1.8
0.9
11.3
17.2
Operating income
76.3
45.9
30.6
24.5
7.4
184.7
Net impairment charge on
loans and advances to customers
(15.9)
(14.8)
(4.5)
(8.0)
(43.2)
Other gains
0.3
0.3
Fair value gains
on financial instruments
0.5
0.5
Operating expenses
(26.7)
(28.2)
(10.2)
(7.7)
(26.9)
(99.7)
Profit/(loss) before income
tax before exceptional items
33.7
3.2
15.9
8.8
(19.0)
42.6
Exceptional items
(6.5)
(6.5)
Profit/(loss) before income tax
33.7
3.2
15.9
8.8
(25.5)
36.1
Loans and advances to customers
1,223.2
467.2 1,243.8
381.1
– 3,315.3
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
139
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
4. Operating income
All items below arise from financial instruments measured at amortised cost unless
otherwise stated.
4.1. Net interest income
2024
2023
£million
£million
Loans and advances to customers
326.7
267.0
Cash and Bank of England reserve account
22.5
17.5
349.2
284.5
Income on financial instruments hedging assets
16.8
19.5
Interest income and similar income
366.0
304.0
Deposits from customers
(136.0)
(88.2)
Due to banks
(18.5)
(18.7)
Subordinated liabilities
(11.9)
(10.7)
Other
(0.1)
(0.1)
(166.5)
(117.7)
Expense on financial instruments hedging liabilities
(14.6)
(18.8)
Interest expense and similar charges
(181.1)
(136.5)
Interest income and expense accounting policy
For all financial instruments measured at amortised cost, the EIR method is used to
measure the carrying value and allocate interest income or expense. The EIR is the rate that
exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts through the expected life of
the financial instrument to:
• the gross carrying amount of the financial asset; or
• the amortised cost of the financial liability.
In calculating the EIR for financial instruments, other than assets that were credit impaired
on initial recognition, the Group estimates cash flows considering all contractual
terms of the financial instrument (for example, early redemption penalty charges and
broker commissions) and anticipated customer behaviour but does not consider future
credit losses.
The calculation of the EIR includes all fees received and paid that are an integral part
of the loan, transaction costs and all other premiums or discounts. Transaction costs
include incremental costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition or issue of a
financial instrument.
For financial assets that are not considered to be credit-impaired (‘Stage 1’ and ‘Stage 2’
assets), interest income is recognised by applying the EIR to the gross carrying amount of
the financial asset. For financial assets that become credit-impaired subsequent to initial
recognition (‘Stage 3’ assets), from the next reporting period onwards interest income is
recognised by applying the EIR to the amortised cost of the financial asset. The credit risk
of financial assets that become credit-impaired are not expected to improve such that they
are no longer considered credit-impaired, however, if this were to occur, the calculation
of interest income would revert back to the gross basis. The Group’s definition of Stage 1,
Stage 2 and Stage 3 assets is set out in Note 16.
For financial assets that were credit-impaired on initial recognition (‘POCI’ assets),
income is calculated by applying the credit adjusted EIR to the amortised cost of the
asset. Collection activity costs are not included in the amortised cost of the assets, but
are included in operating expenses in the income statement, and are recognised as
incurred, in common with other businesses in the sector. For such financial assets the
calculation of interest income will never revert to a gross basis, even if the credit risk of the
asset improves.
Further details regarding when an asset becomes credit-impaired subsequent to initial
recognition is provided within Note 16.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
140
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
4. Operating income
continued
4.2. Net fee and commission income
2024
2023
£million
£million
Fee and disbursement income
18.1
16.4
Commission income
1.1
0.9
Fee and commission income
19.2
17.3
Other expenses
(0.2)
(0.1)
Fee and commission expense
(0.2)
(0.1)
Fees and commission income is all recognised under IFRS 15 Revenue from contracts to
customers and consists principally of the following:
• Commercial Finance – discounting, service and arrangement fees.
• Retail Finance – principally comprises of account management fees received from customers
and referral fees received from third parties.
• Vehicle Finance – primarily relates to vehicle collection and damage charges made
to customers and loan administration fees charged to dealers in respect of the Stock
Funding product.
Fee and commission accounting policy
Fees and commission income that is not considered an integral part of the EIR of a
financial instrument are recognised under IFRS 15 when the Group satisfies performance
obligations by transferring promised services to customers and presented in the income
statement as fee and commission income. All of the Group’s fees and commissions relate
to performance obligations that are recognised at a point in time.
Fees and commission income and expenses that are an integral part of the EIR of a financial
instrument are included in the EIR and presented in the income statement as interest
income or expense.
No significant judgements are made in evaluating when a customer obtains control of
promised goods or services.
5. Fair value and other gains on financial instruments
2024
2023
£million
£million
Fair value movement during the year – Interest rate derivatives
1.6
(6.1)
Fair value movement during the year – Hedged items
(1.5)
6.2
Hedge ineffectiveness recognised in the income statement
0.1
0.1
Inception and amortisation adjustment
1
0.6
Gains/(losses) recognised on derivatives not in hedge relationships
0.5
(0.8)
Extinguishment gain on redemption of subordinated debt
1.2
1.2
0.5
1.
The inception and amortisation adjustment relates to amortisation of macro fair value hedge accounting relationships derecognised and
the amortisation of the fair value adjustment of underlying hedged items at the time hedge accounting relationships commenced or were
redesignated. Over the life of the hedged items these adjustments are expected to off-set gains/losses on derivatives taken for hedging
purposes before and after they are designated in hedge relationships.
The extinguishment gain on redemption of subordinated debt relates to the redemption during
2023 at a discount to par of the £50 million 6.75% Fixed Rate Reset Callable Subordinated Notes
due in 2028.
As a part of its risk management strategy, the Group uses derivatives to economically hedge
financial assets and liabilities. For further information on the Group’s risk management strategy
for market risk see page 35 of the Group’s Strategic Report.
Hedge accounting is employed by the Group to minimise the accounting volatility associated
with the change in fair value of derivative financial instruments. This volatility does not reflect
the economic reality of the Group’s hedging strategy, the Group only uses derivatives for the
hedging of risks.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
141
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
5. Fair value and other gains on financial instruments
continued
5.1. Fair value gain recognised in other comprehensive income
2024
2023
£million
£million
Cash flow hedges
Fair value movement in year – Interest rate derivatives
(0.8)
Interest reclassified to the income statement during the year
1.3
0.6
Fair value gain recognised in other comprehensive income
0.5
0.6
Although the Group uses interest rate derivatives exclusively to hedge interest rate risk
exposures, income statement volatility can still arise due to hedge accounting ineffectiveness or
because hedge accounting is not achievable. Where such volatility arises, it will net to zero over
the life of the hedging relationship. All derivatives held by the Group have been highly effective
in the year, resulting in minimal hedge accounting ineffectiveness recognised in the income
statement. Future ineffectiveness may arise as a result of:
• differences between the expected and actual volume of prepayments, as the Group hedges
to the expected repayment date taking into account expected prepayments based on past
experience; or
• differences in the timing of cash flows for the hedged item and the hedging instrument.
How fair value and cash flow hedge accounting affect the consolidated financial statements
and the main sources of the residual hedge ineffectiveness remaining in the income statement
are set out below. Further information on the current derivative portfolio and the allocation to
hedge accounting types is included in Note 17.
Derivative financial instruments accounting policy
The Group enters into derivatives to manage exposures to fluctuations in interest rates.
Derivatives are not used for speculative purposes. Derivatives are carried at fair value,
with movements in fair value recognised in the income statement or other comprehensive
income. Derivatives are valued by discounted cash flow models using yield curves based
on Overnight Indexed Swap (‘OIS’) rates. All derivatives are carried as assets where fair
value is positive and as liabilities when fair value is negative. Derivatives are not offset in the
consolidated financial statements unless the Group has both a legally enforceable right and
intention to offset. The Group does not hold contracts containing embedded derivatives.
Where cash collateral is received, to mitigate the risk inherent in the amounts due to
the Group, it is included as a liability within the due to banks line within the statement of
financial position. Where cash collateral is given, to mitigate the risk inherent in amounts
due from the Group, it is included as an asset in the loans and advances to banks line
within the statement of financial position.
Hedge accounting
Following the implementation of IFRS 9, the Group elected to apply IAS 39 for all of its
hedge accounting requirements. When transactions meet specified criteria the Group
can apply two types of hedge accounting:
• hedges of the fair value of recognised assets or liabilities or firm commitments (fair value
hedges); and
• hedges of highly probable future cash flows attributable to a recognised asset or liability
(cash flow hedges).
The Group does not have hedges of net investments.
At inception of a hedge, the Group formally documents the relationship between the
hedged items and hedging instruments, as well as its risk management objective and
strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. The Group also documents its
assessment, both at hedge inception and on an ongoing basis, of whether the derivatives
that are used in hedging transactions are highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values
of the hedged items (i.e. the fair value offset between the hedged item and hedging
instrument is within the 80%–125% range).
When the European Union adopted IAS 39 in 2004, it removed certain hedge accounting
requirements, commonly referred to as the EU carve-out. The relaxed requirements under
the carve-out allow the Group to apply the ‘bottom up’ method when calculating macro-
hedge ineffectiveness. This option is not allowed under full IFRS. The Group has applied
the EU carve-out accordingly.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
142
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
5. Fair value and other gains on financial instruments
continued
Fair value hedge accounting
Fair value hedge accounting results in the carrying value of the hedged item being
adjusted to reflect changes in fair value attributable to the hedged risk, thereby offsetting
the effect of the related movement in the fair value of the derivative. Changes in the fair
value of derivatives and hedged items that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges
are recorded in the income statement.
In a one-to-one hedging relationship, in which a single derivative hedges a single hedged
item, the carrying value of the underlying asset or liability (the hedged item) is adjusted
for the hedged risk to offset the fair value movement of the related derivative. In the case
of a portfolio hedge, an adjustment is included in the fair value adjustments for portfolio
hedged risk line in the statement of financial position to offset the fair value movements in
the related derivative. The Group currently only designates portfolio hedges.
If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, expires or is terminated,
the cumulative fair value adjustment to the carrying amount of a hedged item is amortised
to the income statement over the period to maturity of the previously designated hedge
relationship and recorded as net interest income. If the underlying item is sold or repaid,
the unamortised fair value adjustment is immediately recognised in the income statement.
Cash flow hedge accounting
The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and
qualify as cash flow hedges are recognised in other comprehensive income and presented
in the cash flow hedge reserve in equity. Any ineffective portion of changes in the fair value
of the derivative is recognised immediately in the income statement. Amounts recognised
in the cash flow hedge reserve are subsequently reclassified to the income statement when
the underlying asset or liability being hedged impacts the income statement, for example,
when interest payments are recognised, and are recorded in the same income statement
line in which the income or expense associated with the related hedged item is reported.
When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the
criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that
time remains in equity and is recognised in the periods when the hedged item affects
the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur
(for example, the recognised hedged item is disposed of), the cumulative gain or loss
previously recognised in other comprehensive income is immediately reclassified to the
income statement.
The cash flow hedge reserve represents the cumulative amount of gains and losses on
hedging instruments deemed effective in cash flow hedges. The cumulative deferred
gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in profit or loss only when the
hedged transaction impacts the profit or loss, or is included directly in the initial cost
or other carrying amount of the hedged non-financial items (basis adjustment).
6. Operating expenses
2024
2023
£million
£million
Employee costs, including those of Directors:
Wages and salaries
52.5
49.5
Social security costs
5.7
5.6
Pension costs
2.0
1.8
Share-based payment transactions
2.3
1.1
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (Note 19)
1.0
0.9
Depreciation of lease right-of-use assets (Note 20)
1.0
0.7
Amortisation of intangible assets (Note 21)
1.4
1.2
Operating lease rentals
0.8
0.7
Other administrative expenses
37.1
40.9
Total operating expenses
103.8
102.4
Of which:
Continuing
103.8
99.7
Discontinued (Note 10)
2.7
Post-retirement obligations accounting policy
The Group contributes to defined contribution schemes for the benefit of certain
employees. The schemes are funded through payments to insurance companies or
trustee-administered funds at the contribution rates agreed with individual employees.
The Group has no further payment obligations once the contributions have been paid.
The contributions are recognised as an employee benefit expense when they are due.
There are no post-retirement benefits other than pensions.
Remuneration of the Auditor and its associates, excluding VAT, was as follows:
2024
2023
£million
£million
Fees payable to the Company’s Auditor for the audit of the
Company’s annual accounts
1.3
1.0
Fees payable to the Company’s Auditor for other services:
Other assurance services
0.1
0.2
1.4
1.2
Other assurance services related to the interim independent review report and profit certification
(2023: interim independent review report, profit certification and a comfort letter in relation to the
Tier 2 capital issuance).
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
143
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
7. Average number of employees
2024
2023
Number
Number
Directors
2
2
Other senior management
23
23
Other employees
890
849
915
874
8. Exceptional items
2024
2023
£million
£million
Motor finance commissions
Redress
5.2
Costs
1.7
6.9
BiFD Vehicle Finance collections review
Redress
0.2
2.0
Costs
1.3
2.7
1.5
4.7
Organisational redesign
1.5
Corporate activity
1.8
Total exceptional items
9.9
6.5
Costs associated with these activities are outside the normal course of business and are treated
as exceptional.
Motor finance commissions
During 2024, the Group recognised costs of £6.9 million (2023: £nil), of which £6.4 million was
recognised as a provision. Further details about the provision can be found in Note 29.
Organisational redesign
During 2024, the Group undertook an organisational redesign where product-specific teams
were amalgamated under a single management structure. In addition, there were changes
within Finance and the Risk functions to ensure they were configured to support the business in
the most effective way. As a consequence, the Group incurred redundancy costs of £1.5 million
(2023: £nil).
Borrowers in Financial Difficulty (‘BiFD’) Vehicle Finance collections review
Following the Financial Conduct Authority’s review of BiFD across the industry, and in response to
the specific feedback we received on our own collection activities, in 2023, we engaged external
support to assist us and, where necessary, enhanced our approach, which included offering a
wider range of forbearance options to our customers. In 2023, we incurred or provided for costs
of £4.7 million relating to processes, procedures and policies in our Vehicle Finance collections
operations. In 2024, a further £1.5 million was incurred or provided.
Income tax on exceptional items
Income tax on exceptional items amount to £1.0 million credit (2023: £0.6 million credit).
Exceptional items accounting policy
Exceptional items are expenses that do not relate to the Group’s core activities, which are
material in the context of the Group’s performance.
9. Income tax expense
2024
2023
£million
£million
Current taxation
Corporation tax charge – current year
8.4
8.0
Corporation tax charge/(credit) – prior year adjustments
0.3
(0.1)
8.7
7.9
Deferred taxation
Deferred tax charge – current year
1.2
1.3
Deferred tax credit – prior year adjustments
(0.4)
(0.1)
0.8
1.2
Income tax expense
9.5
9.1
Of which:
Continuing
9.5
9.7
Discontinued (Note 10)
(0.6)
Tax reconciliation
Profit before tax
29.2
33.4
Tax at 25.00% (2023: 23.50%)
7.3
7.8
Permanent differences on exceptional items
1.5
0.9
Other permanent differences
0.1
0.3
Rate change on deferred tax assets
0.5
0.1
Other adjustments including prior year adjustments
0.1
Income tax expense for the year
9.5
9.1
The tax has been calculated at the current statutory rate, which is 25.0% for the year ended
31 December 2024 (2023: 23.5%). For the year ended 31 December 2023, the Corporation Tax
rate increased from 19% to 25%, with effect from 1 April 2023. At the same time, the banking
surcharge reduced from 8% to 3% and the surcharge allowance available to a banking group
increased from £25 million to £100 million. These changes were enacted prior to the start of 2023,
and so opening and closing deferred asset values were calculated from expected future tax relief
based on these enacted rates.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
144
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
9. Income tax expense
continued
Income tax accounting policy
Current income tax, which is payable on taxable profits, is recognised as an expense in the
period in which the profits arise.
Deferred tax is provided in full on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of
assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements.
Deferred tax is determined using tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantially
enacted by the statement of financial position date and are expected to apply when the
related deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled.
10. Discontinued operations
The Group sold Debt Managers (Services) Limited’s portfolio of loans during 2022. As the Group
has exited this market, the results of the Debt Management business have been presented as
discontinued operations.
2024
2023
Income statement
£million
£million
Operating expenses
(2.7)
Loss before income tax from discontinued operations
(2.7)
Income tax credit
0.6
Loss for the year from discontinued operations
(2.1)
Basic earnings per ordinary share – discontinued operations
(11.2)
Diluted earnings per ordinary share – discontinued operations
(10.9)
Operating expenses above relate to the costs of winding down the business.
2024
2023
Net cash flows
£million
£million
Operating
(2.7)
Net cash outflow
(2.7)
11. Earnings per ordinary share
11.1. Basic
Basic earnings per ordinary share are calculated by dividing the profit attributable to equity
holders of the parent by the weighted average number of ordinary shares as follows:
2024
2023
Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent (£million)
19.7
24.3
Weighted average number of ordinary shares (number)
19,057,161
18,751,059
Earnings per share (pence)
103.4
129.6
11.2. Diluted
Diluted earnings per ordinary share are calculated by dividing the profit attributable to equity
holders of the parent by the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the
year, as noted above, as well as the number of dilutive share options in issue during the year,
as follows:
2024
2023
Weighted average number of ordinary shares
19,057,161
18,751,059
Number of dilutive shares in issue at the year-end
363,751
515,782
Fully diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares
19,420,912
19,266,841
Dilutive shares being based on:
Number of options outstanding at the year-end
1,395,045
1,210,544
Weighted average exercise price (pence)
215
225
Average share price during the year (pence)
525
719
Diluted earnings per share (pence)
101.4
126.1
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
145
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
12. Dividends
2024
2023
Paid
£million
£million
2024 interim dividend – 11.3 pence per share
Sep-24
2.1
2023 final dividend – 16.2 pence per share
May-24
3.1
2023 interim dividend – 16.0 pence per share
Sep-23
3.0
2022 final dividend – 29.1 pence per share
May-23
5.4
5.2
8.4
The Directors recommend the payment of a final dividend of 22.5 pence per share
(2023: 16.2 pence per share). The final dividend, if approved by members at the Annual
General Meeting, will be paid on 22 May 2025, with an associated record date of
25 April 2025.
The EBT has waived its right to receive future dividends on shares held in the trust.
Dividends waived on shares held in the EBT in 2024 were £0.1 million (2023: £nil).
Dividends accounting policy
Final dividends on ordinary shares are recognised in equity in the period in which they are
approved by shareholders. Interim dividends on ordinary shares are recognised in equity in
the period in which they are paid.
13. Loans and advances to banks
Moody’s long-term ratings are as follows:
Group
Group
Company
Company
2024
2023
2024
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
Aaa–Aa3
4.8
4.8
A1
24.0
48.9
23.6
48.2
24.0
53.7
23.6
53.0
None of the loans and advances to banks are either past due or impaired.
Loans and advances to banks includes £nil (2023: £5.0 million), which the Group and Company
does not have access to.
Where the Group and Company does not have access to cash, it is excluded from cash
and cash equivalents. See Note 35.1 for a reconciliation to cash and cash equivalents.
14. Loans and advances to customers
Group and Company
2024
2023
£million
£million
Gross loans and advances
3,720.3
3,403.4
Less: allowances for impairment of loans and advances (Note 16)
(111.8)
(88.1)
3,608.5
3,315.3
The fair value of loans and advances to customers is shown in Note 41. Loans and advances to
customers includes finance lease receivables of £548.4 million (2023: £450.3 million). See Note 15
for further details.
Retail Finance assets of £1,088.2 million (2023: £1,004.9 million) were pre-positioned under
the Bank of England’s liquidity support operations and Term Funding Scheme with additional
incentives for SMEs and are available for use as collateral within the schemes.
The Real Estate Finance loan book of £1,341.4 million (2023: £1,243.8 million) is secured upon real
estate, which had a loan-to-value of 56% at 31 December 2024 (2023: 57%).
Under its credit policy, the Real Estate Finance business lends to a maximum loan-to-value of:
• 70% for investment loans;
• 60% for residential development loans
1
;
• 65% for certain residential higher leveraged development loans
1
, which is subject to an overall
cap on such lending agreed by management according to risk appetite; and
• 65% for commercial development loans
1
.
All property valuations at loan inception, and the majority of development stage valuations, are
performed by independent Chartered Surveyors, who perform their work in accordance with the
Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors Valuation – Professional Standards.
Of cash collateral, £0.3 million has been received as at 31 December 2024 in respect of certain
loans and advances (2023: £1.7 million).
The accounting policy for loans and advances to customers is included in Note 1.4 Financial
assets and financial liabilities accounting policy.
1. Based on gross development value.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
146
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
15. Finance lease receivables
Group and Company
Loans and advances to customers include finance lease receivables as follows:
2024
2023
£million
£million
Gross investment in finance lease receivables:
Not more than one year
228.1
186.2
Later than one year but no later than five years
535.4
446.1
763.5
632.3
Unearned future finance income on finance leases
(215.1)
(182.0)
Net investment in finance leases
548.4
450.3
The net investment in finance leases may be analysed as follows:
Not more than one year
135.3
113.3
Later than one year but no later than five years
413.1
337.0
548.4
450.3
Finance lease receivables include Vehicle Finance loans to consumers.
Lessor accounting policy
The present value of the lease payments on assets leased to customers under agreements
that transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, with or without ultimate
legal title, are recognised as a receivable. The difference between the gross receivable
and the present value of the receivable is recognised as unearned finance income.
Lease income is recognised over the term of the lease using the net investment method,
which reflects a constant periodic rate of return.
16. Allowances for impairment of loans and advances
Group and Company
Credit-
Not credit-impaired
impaired
Stage 1:
Stage 2:
Stage 3:
Gross
Subject to
Subject to
Subject to
loans and
12-month
lifetime
lifetime
Total
advances to
Provision
ECL
ECL
ECL
provision
customers
coverage
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
%
31 December 2024
Consumer Finance:
Retail Finance
13.5
6.5
10.1
30.1 1,387.9
2.2%
Vehicle Finance:
Voluntary termination provision
5.4
1.5
6.9
Other impairment
9.8
7.4
44.3
61.5
15.2
8.9
44.3
68.4
626.7
10.9%
Business Finance:
Real Estate Finance
0.4
0.3
11.8
12.5 1,353.9
0.9%
Commercial Finance
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.8
351.8
0.2%
29.6
15.9
66.3
111.8 3,720.3
3.0%
Credit-
Not credit-impaired
impaired
Stage 1:
Gross
Subject to
Stage 2:
Stage 3:
loans and
12-month
Subject to
Subject to
Total
advances to
Provision
ECL
lifetime ECL
lifetime ECL
provision
customers
coverage
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
%
31 December 2023
Consumer Finance:
Retail Finance
12.0
11.8
8.3
32.1
1,255.3
2.6%
Vehicle Finance:
Voluntary termination provision
6.7
6.7
Other impairment
10.0
5.6
23.6
39.2
16.7
5.6
23.6
45.9
513.1
8.9%
Business Finance:
Real Estate Finance
0.3
0.7
7.0
8.0
1,251.8
0.6%
Commercial Finance
0.5
0.1
1.5
2.1
383.2
0.5%
29.5
18.2
40.4
88.1 3,403.4
2.6%
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
147
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
16. Allowances for impairment of loans and advances
continued
The impairment charge disclosed in the income statement can be analysed as follows:
2024
2023
£million
£million
Expected credit losses (‘ECL’): impairment charge
61.9
37.3
Charge/(credit) for off-balance sheet loan commitments (Note 29)
0.1
(0.3)
Loans written-off directly to the income statement
¹
0.7
6.2
Unwind of discount
(0.8)
61.9
43.2
1.
The impairment charge for 2023 included a £7.2 million charge relating to a single long-running debt case, of which £6.3 million was written
off directly to the income statement.
Total provisions above include expert credit judgements as follows:
2024
2023
£million
£million
Specific underlays held against credit-impaired secured assets held
within the Business Finance portfolio
(0.7)
(1.0)
Management judgement in respect of:
Vehicle Finance LGD
(4.5)
(2.1)
Other
(0.5)
1.9
Expert credit judgements over the IFRS 9 model results
(5.7)
(1.2)
The specific underlays for Business Finance have been estimated on an individual basis by
assessing the recoverability and condition of the secured asset, along with any other recoveries
that may be made.
Reconciliations of the opening to closing allowance for impairment of loans and advances are
presented below:
Not credit-impaired
Credit-impaired
Stage 1:
Stage 2:
Stage 3:
Subject to
Subject to
Subject to
12-month ECL
lifetime ECL
lifetime ECL
Total
£million
£million
£million
£million
At 1 January 2024
29.5
18.2
40.4
88.1
(Decrease)/increase due to change in
credit risk
Transfer to Stage 2
(11.7)
38.6
(1.4)
25.5
Transfer to Stage 3
(0.2)
(24.1)
48.8
24.5
Transfer to Stage 1
7.8
(20.8)
(13.0)
Passage of time
(6.3)
4.6
14.8
13.1
New loans originated
16.2
16.2
Matured and derecognised loans
(2.1)
(1.6)
(0.5)
(4.2)
Changes to credit risk parameters
(2.3)
(0.5)
(2.9)
(5.7)
Other adjustments
4.0
1.5
5.5
Charge/(credit) to income statement
5.4
(2.3)
58.8
61.9
Allowance utilised in respect of write-offs
(5.3)
(32.9)
(38.2)
31 December 2024
29.6
15.9
66.3
111.8
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
148
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
16. Allowances for impairment of loans and advances
continued
Not credit-impaired
Credit-impaired
Stage 1:
Stage 2:
Stage 3:
Subject to
Subject to
Subject to
12-month ECL
lifetime ECL
lifetime ECL
Total
£million
£million
£million
£million
At 1 January 2023
24.3
28.6
25.1
78.0
(Decrease)/increase due to change in
credit risk
Transfer to Stage 2
(10.4)
56.1
45.7
Transfer to Stage 3
(0.1)
(30.6)
41.9
11.2
Transfer to Stage 1
10.2
(35.3)
(25.1)
Passage of time
(9.1)
3.5
3.7
(1.9)
New loans originated
20.5
20.5
Matured and derecognised loans
(2.3)
(4.6)
(4.7)
(11.6)
Changes to credit risk parameters
(5.3)
0.5
0.3
(4.5)
Other adjustments
3.0
3.0
Charge/(credit) to income statement
6.5
(10.4)
41.2
37.3
Allowance utilised in respect of write-offs
(1.3)
(25.9)
(27.2)
31 December 2023
29.5
18.2
40.4
88.1
These tables have been prepared based on monthly movements in the ECL.
Passage of time represents the impact of accounts maturing through their contractual life, the
associated reduction in PDs and the unwind of the discount applied in calculating the ECL.
Changes to credit risk parameters represent movements that have occurred due to the
Group updating model inputs. This would include the impact of, for example, updating the
macroeconomic scenarios applied to the models.
Other adjustments represents the movement in the Vehicle Finance voluntary
termination provision.
Stage 1 write-offs arise on Vehicle Finance accounts where borrowers have exercised their right to
voluntarily terminate their agreements.
A breakdown of the gross receivable by internal credit risk rating is shown below:
2024
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£million
£million
£million
£million
Business Finance:
Strong
29.6
29.6
Good
1,051.5
54.2
1.4
1,107.1
Satisfactory
298.6
141.5
25.8
465.9
Weak
20.1
83.0
103.1
1,379.7
215.8
110.2
1,705.7
2023
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£million
£million
£million
£million
Business Finance:
Strong
57.9
57.9
Good
1,087.8
4.5
1,092.3
Satisfactory
236.5
82.0
28.8
347.3
Weak
59.3
78.2
137.5
1,382.2
145.8
107.0
1,635.0
2024
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£million
£million
£million
£million
Consumer Finance:
Good
921.6
4.9
926.5
Satisfactory
768.1
32.4
800.5
Weak
135.2
75.9
76.5
287.6
1,824.9
113.2
76.5
2,014.6
2023
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£million
£million
£million
£million
Consumer Finance:
Good
706.0
58.9
10.1
775.0
Satisfactory
596.5
54.4
18.4
669.3
Weak
266.8
38.7
18.6
324.1
1,569.3
152.0
47.1
1,768.4
Internal credit risk rating is based on the most recent credit risk score of a customer.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
149
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
16. Allowances for impairment of loans and advances
continued
Impairment of financial assets and loan commitments accounting policy
The Group recognises loss allowances for Expected Credit Losses (‘ECL’) on all financial assets
carried at amortised cost, including lease receivables and loan commitments. Credit loss
allowances on Stage 1 assets are measured as an amount equal to 12-month ECL and
credit loss allowances on Stage 2, and Stage 3 assets are measured as an amount equal to
lifetime ECL.
Stage 1 assets
Stage 1 assets comprise of the following.
• Financial assets determined to have low credit risk at the reporting date.
• Financial assets that have not experienced a significant increase in credit risk since their
initial recognition.
• Financial assets that have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since their
initial recognition, but have subsequently met the Group’s cure policy, as set out on the
following page.
A low credit risk asset is considered to have low credit risk when its credit risk rating is
equivalent to the widely understood definition of ‘investment grade’ assets. This is not
applicable to loans and advances to customers, but the Group has assessed all its debt
securities, which represents UK Treasury bills, to be low credit risk.
Stage 2 assets
Loans and advances to customers that have experienced a significant increase in credit risk
since their initial recognition and have not subsequently met the Group’s cure policy are
classified as Stage 2 assets.
The Group’s definitions of a significant increase in credit risk and default are set out on the
following page.
For Consumer Finance, the credit risk of a financial asset is considered to have experienced
a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition where there has been a significant
increase in the remaining lifetime probability of default of the asset. The Group may also use
its expert credit judgement, and where possible, relevant historical and current performance
data, including bureau data, to determine that an exposure has undergone a significant
increase in credit risk.
For Business Finance, the credit risk of a financial asset is considered to have experienced a
significant increase in credit risk where certain early warning indicators apply. These indicators
may include notification of county court judgements or, specifically for the Real Estate Finance
portfolio, cost over-runs and timing delays experienced by borrowers.
As a backstop, the Group considers that a significant increase in credit risk occurs no later than
when an asset is more than 30 days past due for all portfolios.
Stage 3 assets
At each reporting date, the Group assesses whether financial assets carried at amortised cost
are credit-impaired or defaulted (Stage 3). A financial asset is considered to be credit-impaired
when an event or events that have a detrimental impact on estimated future cash flows have
occurred, or have other specific unlikeliness to pay indicators. Evidence that a financial asset is
credit-impaired includes the following observable data.
• Initiation of bankruptcy proceedings.
• Notification of bereavement.
• Identification of loan meeting debt sale criteria.
• Initiation of repossession proceedings.
• Customer on an Individual Voluntary Arrangement or Debt Management Plan.
• A material covenant breach that has remained unremedied for more than 90 days.
In addition, a loan that is 90 days or more past due is considered credit-impaired for all
portfolios. The credit risk of financial assets that become credit-impaired will be monitored
in-line with the curing policy.
For Commercial Finance facilities that do not have a fixed-term or repayment structure,
evidence that a financial asset is credit-impaired includes:
• the client ceasing to trade; or
• unpaid debtor balances that are dated at least six months past their normal recourse period.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
150
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
16. Allowances for impairment of loans and advances
continued
Cure policy
The credit risk of a financial asset may improve such that it is no longer considered to have
experienced a significant increase in credit risk if it meets the Group’s cure policy. The Group’s
cure policy from stage 2 to stage 1 for all portfolios requires sufficient payments to be made
to bring an account back within less than 30 days past due and such payments need to be
maintained for six consecutive months in Vehicle Finance and three months in Retail Finance.
In addition, an account can cure from stage 2 to stage 1 if the significant increase in credit
risk since their initial recognition is not triggered anymore due to improvement in their credit
quality (e.g. loan credit bureau score).
The Group’s cure policy from stage 3 to 2 for all portfolios requires sufficient payments to be
made to bring an account back within less than 30 days past due. For Vehicle Finance and
Retail Finance such non-defaulted status need to be maintained for three consecutive months.
For Real Estate Finance such payments need to be maintained for 12 consecutive months.
Calculation of expected credit loss (‘ECL’)
ECL are probability weighted estimates of credit losses that are measured as the present value
of all cash shortfalls. Specifically, this is the difference between the contractual cash flows due
and the cash flows expected to be received, discounted at the original effective interest rate.
For undrawn loan commitments, ECL is measured as the difference between the contractual
cash flows due if the commitment is drawn and the cash flows expected to be received.
Lifetime ECL is the ECL that results from all possible default events over the expected life of a
financial asset.
12-month ECL is the portion of lifetime ECL that results from default events on a financial asset
that are possible within 12 months after the reporting date.
ECL are calculated by multiplying three main components: the Probability of Default (‘PD’),
Exposure At Default (‘EAD’) and Loss Given Default (‘LGD’) discounted at the original effective
interest rate of an asset. These variables are derived from internally developed statistical
models and historical data, adjusted to reflect forward-looking information and are discussed
in turn further below. Management adjustments are made to modelled output to account
for situations, where known, or expected risk factors that have not been reflected in the
modelled outcome.
Probability of Default (‘PD’) and credit risk grades
Credit risk grades are a primary input into the determination of the PD for exposures.
The Group allocates each exposure to a credit risk grade at origination and at each reporting
period to predict the risk of default. Credit risk grades are determined using qualitative and
quantitative factors that are indicative of the risk of default e.g. arrears status and loan credit
bureau score. These factors vary for each loan portfolio. Exposures are subject to ongoing
monitoring, which may result in an exposure being moved to a different credit risk grade.
In monitoring exposures information, such as payment records and forecast changes in
economic conditions are considered for Consumer Finance. Additionally, for Business Finance
portfolios information obtained during periodic client reviews, for example, audited financial
statements, management accounts, budgets and projections are considered, with particular
focus on key ratios, compliance with covenants and changes in senior management teams.
Emergence curves modelling is used in the production of forward-looking lifetime PDs.
This method defines the way that debt emerges for differing quality accounts and their time
on the books creating a clean relationship to best demonstrate the movement in default rates
as macroeconomic variables are changed. These models are extrapolated to provide PD
estimates for the future, based on forecasted economic scenarios.
Exposure at Default (‘EAD’)
EAD represents the expected exposure in the event of a default. EAD is derived from the
current exposure and potential changes to the current amount allowed under the terms of the
contract, including amortisation overpayments and early terminations. The EAD of a financial
asset is its gross carrying amount. For loan commitments, the EAD includes the amount
drawn, as well as potential future amounts that may be drawn under the terms of the contract,
estimated based on historical observations and forward-looking forecasts.
For Commercial Finance facilities that have no specific term, an assumption is made that
accounts close 36 months after the reporting date for the purposes of measuring lifetime ECL.
This assumption is based on industry experience of average client life. These facilities do not
have a fixed-term or repayment structure, but are revolving and increase or decrease to reflect
the value of the collateral i.e. receivables or inventory. The Group can cancel the facilities with
immediate effect, although this contractual right is not enforced in the normal day-to-day
management of the facility. Typically, demand would only be made on the failure of a client
business or in the event of a material event of default, such as a fraud. In the normal course
of events, the Group’s exposure is recovered through receipt of remittances from the client’s
debtors rather than from the client itself.
The ECL for such facilities is estimated taking into account the credit risk management
actions that the Group expects to take to mitigate against losses. These include a reduction
in advance rate and facility limits or application of reserves against a facility to improve the
likelihood of full recovery of exposure from the debtors.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
151
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
16. Allowances for impairment of loans and advances
continued
Alternative recovery routes mitigating ECL would include refinancing by another funding
provider, taking security over other asset classes or secured personal guarantees from the
client’s principals.
Loss Given Default (‘LGD’)
LGD is the magnitude of the likely loss in the event of default. This takes into account
recoveries either through curing or, where applicable, through the auction sale of repossessed
collateral and debt sale of the residual shortfall amount. For loans secured by real estate
property, loan-to-value ratios are key parameters in determining LGD. LGDs are calculated on
a discounted cash flow basis using the financial instrument’s origination effective interest rate
as the discount factor.
Incorporation of forward-looking data
The Group incorporates forward-looking information into both its assessment of whether
the credit risk of a financial asset has increased significantly since initial recognition and
its measurement of ECL. This is achieved by developing a number of potential economic
scenarios and modelling ECLs for each scenario. To ensure material non-linear relationships
between economic factors and credit losses are reflected in the calculation of ECL, a severe
stress scenario is used as one of these scenarios. The outputs from each scenario are
combined using the estimated likelihood of each scenario occurring to derive a probability
weighted expected credit loss. The four scenarios adopted and probability weighting applied
are set out on page 152.
The Group considers that the key drivers of credit risk and credit losses included in the
macroeconomic scenarios are annual unemployment rate growth, annual house price index
growth, consumer price index (‘CPI’), Bank of England Base Rate, and debt service ratio.
Base case assumptions applied for each of these variables have been sourced from external
consensus or Bank of England forecasts. Further details of the assumptions applied to other
scenarios are presented on page 152.
Expert credit judgements
The impairment charge comprises modelled ECLs and expert credit judgements. Where the
ECL modelled output does not reflect the level of credit risk, judgement is used to calculate
expert credit judgements, which are overlaid on to the output from the models.
Presentation of loss allowance
Loss allowances for ECLs and expert credit judgements are presented in the statement of
financial position as follows with the loss recognised in the income statement:
• Financial assets measured at amortised cost: as a deduction from the gross carrying amount
of the assets.
• Other loan commitments: generally, as a provision.
For the Real Estate Finance and Commercial Finance portfolios, where a loan facility is agreed
that includes both drawn and undrawn elements and the Group cannot identify the ECL on
the loan commitment separately, a combined loss allowance for both drawn and undrawn
components of the loan is presented as a deduction from the gross carrying amount of
the drawn component, with any excess of the loss allowance over the gross drawn amount
presented as a provision.
When a loan is uncollectible, it is written off against the related ECL allowance. Such loans are
written off after all necessary procedures have been completed and the amount of the loss has
been determined.
Vehicle Finance voluntary termination provision
In addition to recognising allowances for ECLs, the Group holds a provision for Voluntary
Terminations (‘VT’) for all Vehicle Finance financial assets. VT is a legal right provided to
customers who take out hire purchase agreements. The provision is calculated by multiplying
the probability of VT of an asset by the expected shortfall on VT discounted back at the
original effective interest rate of the asset. VT allowances are not held against loans in default
(Stage 3 loans).
The VT provision is presented in the statement of financial position as a deduction from
the gross carrying amount of Vehicle Finance assets with the loss recognised in the
income statement.
Write off
Loans and advances to customers are written off partially or in full when the Group has
exhausted all viable recovery options. The majority of write-offs arise from Debt Relief Orders,
insolvencies, Individual Voluntary Arrangements, deceased customers where there is no estate
and vulnerable customers in certain circumstances. Amounts subsequently recovered on
assets previously written off are recognised in the impairment charge in the income statement.
Intercompany receivables
The parent company’s expected credit loss on amounts due from related companies is
calculated by applying probability of default and loss given default to the amount outstanding
at the year-end. See Note 24 for further details.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
152
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
16. Allowances for impairment of loans and advances
continued
16.1. Key sources of estimation uncertainty
Estimations that could have a material impact on the Group’s financial results and are,
therefore, considered to be key sources of estimation uncertainty all relate to the impairment
charge on loans and advances to customers and are, therefore, set out below. The potential
impact of the current macroeconomic environment has been considered in determining
reasonably possible changes in key sources of estimation uncertainty that may occur in the
next 12 months. The determination of both the PD and LGD require estimation, which is
discussed further below.
16.1.1. Incorporation of forward-looking data
The Group incorporates forward-looking information into both its assessment of whether
the credit risk of a financial asset has increased significantly since initial recognition and
its measurement of expected credit loss by developing a number of potential economic
scenarios and modelling expected credit losses for each scenario. Further detail on this
process is provided on page 151. The macroeconomic scenarios used were provided by
external economic advisers. The scenarios and weightings applied are summarised below:
December 2024
UK unemployment rate – Annual Average
2025
2026
2027
5-Yr Average
Scenario
Weightings
%
%
%
%
Upside
20%
4.0
3.6
3.6
3.7
Base
50%
4.4
4.3
4.2
4.2
Downside
25%
5.1
6.0
6.7
6.2
Severe
5%
5.5
6.7
7.4
6.8
UK HPI – movement from December 2024
2025
2026
2027
5-Yr Average
Scenario
Weightings
%
%
%
%
Upside
20%
3.7
7.8
13.4
4.2
Base
50%
1.7
3.4
6.2
2.9
Downside
25%
(6.6)
(9.6)
(11.7)
(0.5)
Severe
5%
(12.3)
(18.9)
(24.7)
(3.4)
UK CPI – movement from December 2024
2025
2026
2027
5-Yr Average
Scenario
Weightings
%
%
%
%
Upside
20%
3.8
7.3
10.1
2.8
Base
50%
3.0
5.4
7.6
2.3
Downside
25%
1.9
2.9
4.6
1.7
Severe
5%
1.0
1.1
2.6
1.2
December 2024 (continued)
UK Base Rate – Annual Average
2025
2026
2027
5-Yr Average
Scenario
Weightings
%
%
%
%
Upside
20%
5.4
4.4
3.4
3.8
Base
50%
3.8
3.1
2.6
2.9
Downside
25%
3.0
1.8
1.8
2.0
Severe
5%
2.0
0.8
0.8
1.0
UK debt service ratio – Annual Average
2025
2026
2027
5-Yr Average
Scenario
Weightings
%
%
%
%
Upside
20%
5.6
5.3
4.8
4.9
Base
50%
4.9
4.6
4.5
4.5
Downside
25%
4.6
4.3
4.5
4.3
Severe
5%
4.6
3.6
3.8
3.8
December 2023
UK unemployment rate – Annual Average
2024
2025
2026
5-Yr Average
Scenario
Weightings
%
%
%
%
Upside
20%
4.2
3.9
3.8
3.9
Base
50%
4.5
4.4
4.1
4.1
Downside
25%
5.4
6.5
7.1
6.5
Severe
5%
5.7
7.0
7.6
7.0
UK HPI – movement from December 2023
2024
2025
2026
5-Yr Average
Scenario
Weightings
%
%
%
%
Upside
20%
(0.7)
2.4
9.4
3.7
Base
50%
(4.3)
(3.3)
0.9
2.1
Downside
25%
(10.4)
(13.8)
(14.3)
(0.9)
Severe
5%
(15.1)
(21.8)
(26.0)
(3.5)
UK CPI – movement from December 2023
2024
2025
2026
5-Yr Average
Scenario
Weightings
%
%
%
%
Upside
20%
4.0
6.8
8.9
2.5
Base
50%
3.2
4.9
6.6
2.0
Downside
25%
2.0
2.2
3.5
1.4
Severe
5%
1.0
0.6
1.8
1.0
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
153
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
16. Allowances for impairment of loans and advances
continued
16.1.1. Incorporation of forward-looking data
continued
UK Bank of England Base Rate and debt service ratio were implemented into the ECL
allowance modelling during the year ended 31 December 2024 and, therefore, do not have
comparatives for the year ended 31 December 2023.
The sensitivity of the ECL allowance to reasonably possible changes in scenario weighting
(an increase in downside case weighting from the upside case and an increase in severe
stress case weighting from the base case) has been assessed by the Group and computed
as not material.
The Group recognised a total impairment charge of £61.9 million (2023: £43.2 million).
Were each of the scenarios to be applied at 100%, rather than using the weightings set out
above, the increase/(decrease) in ECL provisions would be as follows:
2024
Vehicle Finance
Retail Finance
Business Finance
Total Group
Scenario
£million
£million
£million
£million
Upside
(0.6)
(0.3)
(1.3)
(2.2)
Base
(0.2)
(0.1)
(0.8)
(1.1)
Downside
0.6
0.4
1.8
2.8
Severe
1.2
0.8
4.1
6.1
2023
Vehicle Finance
Retail Finance
Business Finance
Total Group
Scenario
£million
£million
£million
£million
Upside
(0.4)
(1.2)
(0.3)
(1.9)
Base
(0.2)
(0.5)
(0.2)
(0.9)
Downside
0.5
1.5
0.4
2.4
Severe
0.6
2.2
1.1
3.9
16.1.2. ECL modelled output: Estimation of PDs
Sensitivity to reasonably possible changes in PD could potentially result in material changes
in the ECL allowance for Vehicle Finance and Retail Finance.
A 15% change in the PD for Vehicle Finance would immediately impact the ECL allowance
by £4.0 million (2023: a 15% change impacted the ECL allowance by £2.5 million).
A 15% change in the PD for Retail Finance would immediately impact the ECL allowance by
£3.4 million (2023: a 15% change impacted the ECL allowance by £4.4 million).
The above sensitivities reflect the levels of defaults observed during the year.
Due to the relatively low levels of provisions on the Business Finance books, sensitivity to
reasonably possible changes in PD are not considered material.
16.1.3. ECL modelled output: Vehicle Finance recovery rates
With the exception of the Vehicle Finance portfolio, the sensitivity of the ECL allowance to
reasonably possible changes in the LGD is not considered material. The Vehicle Finance
portfolio is particularly sensitive to changes in LGD due to the range of outcomes that
could crystallise, depending on whether the Group is able to recover the vehicle as security.
For the Vehicle Finance portfolio, a 20% (2023: 20%) change in the recovery rate assumption
in the LGD is considered reasonably possible due to delays in the vehicle collection
process. A 20% (2023: 20%) reduction in the vehicle recovery rate assumption element of
the LGD for Vehicle Finance would increase the ECL by £1.7 million (2023: £0.9 million).
There has been no change in the vehicle recovery rate assumption in the ECL model in
either the current or prior year.
16.1.4. Climate-risk impact
The Group considers the impact of climate-related risks on the financial statements on an
annual basis, in particular, climate change negatively impacting the value of the Group’s
Real Estate Finance business’ security due to the increased risk of flooding associated with
climate change.
While the effects of climate change represent a source of uncertainty (in respect of potential
transitional risks, such as those that may arise from changes in future government policy),
the impact of all of the climate change risks is considered to be low. Accordingly, the Group
does not consider there to be a material impact on its judgements and estimates from the
physical, transitional and other climate-related risks in the short term.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
154
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
17. Derivative financial instruments
Group and Company
Interest rate derivatives are held for risk mitigation purposes. The table below provides
an analysis of the notional amount and fair value of derivatives by hedge accounting
relationship. The amount of ineffectiveness recognised for each hedge type is shown in Note
5. Notional amount is the amount on which payment flows are derived and does not represent
amounts at risk.
Notional
Assets
Liabilities
Notional
Assets
Liabilities
2024
2024
2024
2023
2023
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
Interest rate derivatives designated
in fair value hedges
In less than one year
965.5
3.1
(2.5)
783.7
6.9
(3.0)
More than one year but less
than three years
941.4
10.1
(3.9)
859.4
13.2
(9.0)
More than three years but less
than five years
432.9
1.1
(3.3)
494.0
5.3
(9.3)
2,339.8
14.3
(9.7) 2,137.1
25.4
(21.3)
Interest rate derivatives designated
in cash flow hedges
In less than one year
9.4
(0.1)
4.7
(0.2)
More than one year but less
than three years
2.4
9.4
(0.4)
More than three years but less
than five years
2.4
0.1
11.8
(0.1)
16.5
0.1
(0.6)
Interest rate derivatives –
not hedged
1
In less than one year
15.0
More than one year but less
than three years
42.5
57.5
Foreign exchange derivatives
In less than one year
25.7
(0.2)
28.0
(0.1)
2,434.8
14.3
(10.0) 2,181.6
25.5
(22.0)
1.
Derivatives not in hedge relationships at the end of the reporting period are will either enter a hedge relationship in the following month, or
be in the final month of maturity.
In order to manage interest rate risk arising from fixed-rate financial instruments, the Group
monitors its interest rate mismatch regularly throughout each month, seeking to ‘match’ assets
and liabilities in the first instance and hedging residual risk using interest rate derivatives to
maintain adherence to risk appetites. Some residual risk remains due to timing differences.
The exposure from the portfolio frequently changes due to the origination of new instruments,
contractual repayments and early prepayments made in each period. As a result, the Group
adopts a dynamic hedging strategy (sometimes referred to as ‘macro’ or ‘portfolio’ hedge) to
hedge its exposure profile by closing and entering into new interest rate derivative agreements.
The Group establishes the hedging ratio by matching the derivatives with the principal of the
portfolio being hedged.
The following table sets out details of the hedged exposures covered by the Group’s
hedging strategies:
Accumulated
amount
Accumulated
of fair value
amount
adjustments
of fair value
Carry amount of
in the hedged
Carry amount of
adjustments
hedged item
items
hedged item
in the hedged items
asset/(liability)
(liability)/asset
asset/(liability)
(liability)/asset
2024
2024
2023
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
ASSETS
Interest rate fair value hedges
Loans and advances to customers
Fixed-rate Real Estate Finance loans
519.6
(5.2)
565.5
(3.5)
Fixed-rate Consumer Finance loans
723.4
(1.6)
523.5
(0.4)
1,243.0
(6.8)
1,089.0
(3.9)
Interest rate cash flow hedges
Cash and Bank of England reserve
account
Bank of England reserve
11.8
N/A
16.5
N/A
1,254.8
(6.8)
1,105.5
(3.9)
LIABILITIES
Interest rate fair value hedges
Deposits from customers
Fixed-rate customer deposits
(1,006.5)
3.1
(957.6)
3.6
Subordinated liabilities
Fixed-rate Tier 2 regulatory capital
(90.0)
0.3
(90.0)
(2.2)
(1,096.5)
3.4
(1,047.6)
1.4
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
155
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
17. Derivative financial instruments
continued
The following table shows the impact of financial assets and financial liabilities relating to
transactions where:
• there is an enforceable master netting agreement in place, but the offset criteria are not
otherwise satisfied; and
• financial collateral is paid and received.
Gross amount
Master
Net amounts
reported on
netting
Financial
after
balance sheet
arrangements
collateral
offsetting
£million
£million
£million
£million
31 December 2024
Derivative financial assets
Interest rate derivatives
14.3
(9.8)
(4.1)
0.4
14.3
(9.8)
(4.1)
0.4
Derivative financial liabilities
Interest rate derivatives
(9.8)
9.8
Foreign exchange derivatives
(0.2)
(0.2)
(10.0)
9.8
(0.2)
Gross amount
Master
reported on
netting
Financial
Net amounts
balance sheet
arrangements
collateral
after offsetting
£million
£million
£million
£million
31 December 2023
Derivative financial assets
Interest rate derivatives
25.5
(21.9)
(3.5)
0.1
25.5
(21.9)
(3.5)
0.1
Derivative financial liabilities
Interest rate derivatives
(21.9)
21.9
Foreign exchange derivatives
(0.1)
0.2
0.1
(22.0)
21.9
0.2
0.1
Master netting arrangements do not meet the criteria for offsetting in the statement of
financial position. This is because the arrangement creates an agreement for a right of set-off
of recognised amounts, which is enforceable only following an event of default, insolvency or
bankruptcy of the Group or counterparties. Furthermore, the Group and its counterparties do not
intend to settle on a net basis or realise the assets and settle the liabilities simultaneously.
Financial collateral consists of cash settled, typically daily or weekly, to mitigate the credit risk on
the fair value of derivatives.
18. Investment property
Company
£million
1 January 2023
1.0
Revaluation
(0.1)
At 31 December 2023
0.9
Revaluation
At 31 December 2024
0.9
The Company’s investment property comprises 25 and 26 Neptune Court, Vanguard Way, Cardiff
CF24 5PJ, which is occupied by one of the Company’s subsidiaries.
The Company’s investment property was stated at fair value as at 31 December 2024, based
on external valuations performed by professionally qualified valuers Knight Frank LLP.
These valuations have been undertaken in accordance with the current editions of RICS
Valuation – Global Standards, which incorporate the International Valuations Standards, and
the RICS UK National Supplement. The valuations were carried out using the comparative and
investment methods, and were arrived at by reference to market evidence of the transaction
prices paid for similar properties, together with evidence of demand within the vicinity of
the subject properties. In estimating the fair value of the properties, the valuers consider the
highest and best use of the properties. Knight Frank LLP were paid a fixed fee for the valuations.
Knight Frank LLP also undertakes some professional work in respect of the Group’s Real Estate
Finance business, although this is limited in relation to the activities of the Group as a whole.
Investment property accounting policy
Investment property, which is property held to earn rentals and for capital appreciation,
is measured initially at cost, including transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition,
investment property is measured at fair value. External valuations are performed on a
triennial basis. Gains or losses arising from changes in the fair value of investment property
are included in the income statement in the period in which they arise.
An investment property is derecognised upon disposal or when the investment property
is permanently withdrawn from use and no future economic benefits are expected from
the disposal. Any gain or loss arising on derecognition of the property (calculated as the
difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset) is
included in the income statement in the period in which the property is derecognised.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
156
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
19. Property, plant and equipment
Group
Company
Freehold
Computer
Freehold
Computer
land and
and other
land and
and other
buildings
equipment
Total
buildings
equipment
Total
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
Cost or valuation
At 1 January 2023
10.1
6.9
17.0
3.8
6.2
10.0
Additions
2.2
2.2
2.1
2.1
Disposals
(1.4)
(1.4)
(1.2)
(1.2)
At 31 December 2023
10.1
7.7
17.8
3.8
7.1
10.9
Additions
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.3
Impairment
(0.4)
(0.4)
At 31 December 2024
9.7
8.2
17.9
3.8
7.4
11.2
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2023
(2.4)
(4.9)
(7.3)
(0.1)
(5.0)
(5.1)
Depreciation charge
(0.1)
(0.8)
(0.9)
(0.1)
(0.5)
(0.6)
Disposals
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.1
At 31 December 2023
(2.5)
(4.5)
(7.0)
(0.2)
(4.4)
(4.6)
Depreciation charge
(0.2)
(0.8)
(1.0)
(0.1)
(0.5)
(0.6)
At 31 December 2024
(2.7)
(5.3)
(8.0)
(0.3)
(4.9)
(5.2)
Net book amount
At 31 December 2023
7.6
3.2
10.8
3.6
2.7
6.3
At 31 December 2024
7.0
2.9
9.9
3.5
2.5
6.0
The Group’s freehold properties, which are occupied by the Group, comprise:
• the Registered Office of the Company;
• One Arleston Way, Solihull B90 4LH; and
• 25 and 26 Neptune Court, Vanguard Way, Cardiff CF24 5PJ.
One Arleston Way was subject to an impairment in the year, which was recognised within other
(losses)/gains in the income statement.
The Company’s freehold property comprises the Registered Office of the Company.
The carrying value of freehold land, which is included in the total carrying value of freehold land
and buildings, and which is not depreciated at 31 December 2024 and 31 December 2023, was
£1.5 million for the Group and £0.8 million for the Company.
Property, plant and equipment accounting policy
Property, plant and equipment is stated at historical cost less any accumulated depreciation
and any accumulated impairment losses. Historical cost includes expenditure that is directly
attributable to the acquisition of the items. Pre-installed computer software licences are
capitalised as part of the computer hardware it is installed on. Depreciation is calculated
using the straight-line method to allocate their cost to their residual values over their
estimated useful lives, which are subject to regular review:
Land
not depreciated
Freehold buildings
50 years
Leasehold improvements
shorter of life of lease or seven years
Computer equipment
three to five years
Other equipment
five to ten years
The above useful economic lives have not changed since the prior year.
Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing proceeds with carrying
amounts. These are included in the income statement.
The Group applies IAS 36 to determine whether property, plant and equipment is impaired.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
157
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
20. Right-of-use assets
Group
Company
Leased
Leased
Leasehold
motor
Leasehold
motor
property
vehicles
Total
property
vehicles
Total
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
Cost
At 1 January 2023
3.1
0.6
3.7
3.1
0.2
3.3
Additions
0.8
0.2
1.0
0.8
0.1
0.9
At 31 December 2023
3.9
0.8
4.7
3.9
0.3
4.2
Additions
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
At 31 December 2024
3.9
1.6
5.5
3.9
0.9
4.8
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2023
(2.0)
(0.2)
(2.2)
(2.0)
(2.0)
Depreciation charge
(0.5)
(0.2)
(0.7)
(0.5)
(0.1)
(0.6)
At 31 December 2023
(2.5)
(0.4)
(2.9)
(2.5)
(0.1)
(2.6)
Depreciation charge
(0.5)
(0.5)
(1.0)
(0.5)
(0.3)
(0.8)
At 31 December 2024
(3.0)
(0.9)
(3.9)
(3.0)
(0.4)
(3.4)
Net book amount
At 31 December 2023
1.4
0.4
1.8
1.4
0.2
1.6
At 31 December 2024
0.9
0.7
1.6
0.9
0.5
1.4
Lessee accounting policy
The Group assesses whether a contract is, or contains, a lease at inception of the contract.
The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability with respect
to all lease arrangements in which it is the lessee, except for short-term leases (defined
as leases with a lease term of 12 months or less) and leases of low-value assets. For these
leases, the Group recognises the lease payments as an operating expense on a straight-
line basis over the term of the lease unless another systematic basis is more representative
of the time pattern in which economic benefits from the leased assets are consumed.
The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the future lease payments,
discounted by using the rate implicit in the lease. If this rate cannot be readily determined,
the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate. It is subsequently measured by increasing
the carrying amount to reflect interest on the lease liability (using the effective interest rate
method) and by reducing the carrying amount to reflect the lease payments made, and is
presented as a separate line in the consolidated statement of financial position.
The right-of-use assets comprise the initial measurement of the corresponding lease
liability, lease payments made at, or before, the commencement day, less any lease
incentives received and any initial direct costs. They are subsequently measured at cost less
accumulated depreciation and impairment charges and are depreciated over the shorter
of the lease term and useful life of the underlying asset. The depreciation starts at the
commencement date of the lease. The right-of-use assets are presented as a separate line
in the consolidated statement of financial position. The Group applies IAS 36 to determine
whether a right-of-use asset is impaired and accounts for any identified impairment loss as
described in the ‘Property, plant and equipment’ policy.
Rentals made under operating leases for less than 12 months in duration, and operating
leases on low-value items, are recognised in the income statement on a straight-line basis
over the term of the lease.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
158
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
21. Intangible assets
Group
Other
Computer
intangible
Goodwill
software
assets
Total
£million
£million
£million
£million
Cost or valuation
At 1 January 2023
1.0
17.2
2.2
20.4
Additions
0.5
0.5
At 31 December 2023
1.0
17.7
2.2
20.9
Additions
0.5
0.5
Disposals
(0.1)
(0.1)
At 31 December 2024
1.0
18.1
2.2
21.3
Accumulated amortisation
At 1 January 2023
(11.6)
(2.2)
(13.8)
Amortisation charge
(1.2)
(1.2)
At 31 December 2023
(12.8)
(2.2)
(15.0)
Amortisation charge
(1.4)
(1.4)
Disposals
0.1
0.1
At 31 December 2024
(14.1)
(2.2)
(16.3)
Net book amount
At 31 December 2023
1.0
4.9
5.9
At 31 December 2024
1.0
4.0
5.0
Goodwill above relates to the V12 cash-generating unit, which is part of the Retail Finance
operating segment.
The recoverable amount of these cash-generating units are determined on a value-in-use
calculation, which uses cash flow projections based on financial forecasts covering a three-
year period, and a discount rate of 8% (2023: 8%). Cash flow projections during the forecast
period are based on the expected rate of new business. A zero growth-based scenario is also
considered. The Directors believe that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions
on which recoverable amount is based would not cause the aggregate carrying amount to
exceed the aggregate recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit. Hence no impairment
has been recognised.
Other intangible assets were recognised as part of the V12 Finance Group acquisition,
which are now fully amortised.
Company
Computer
Goodwill
software
Total
£million
£million
£million
Cost or valuation
At 1 January 2023
0.3
12.5
12.8
Additions
0.1
0.1
At 31 December 2023
0.3
12.6
12.9
Additions
0.5
0.5
At 31 December 2024
0.3
13.1
13.4
Accumulated amortisation
At 1 January 2023
(8.4)
(8.4)
Amortisation charge
(1.0)
(1.0)
At 31 December 2023
(9.4)
(9.4)
Amortisation charge
(1.1)
(1.1)
At 31 December 2024
(10.5)
(10.5)
Net book amount
At 31 December 2023
0.3
3.2
3.5
At 31 December 2024
0.3
2.6
2.9
Goodwill above relates to the Retail Finance operating segment. The recoverable amount is
determined on the same basis as for the Group.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
159
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
21. Intangible assets
continued
Intangible assets accounting policy
(a) Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of the acquisition over the fair value of the
Group’s share of the net identifiable assets acquired at the date of acquisition. Goodwill is
held at cost less accumulated impairment charge and is deemed to have an infinite life.
The Group reviews the goodwill for impairment at least annually or when events or changes
in economic circumstances indicate that impairment may have taken place. An impairment
charge is recognised in the income statement if the carrying amount exceeds the
recoverable amounts.
(b) Computer software
Acquired computer software licences are capitalised on the basis of the costs incurred to
acquire and bring to use the specific software.
Costs associated with developing or maintaining computer software programmes are
recognised as an expense as incurred unless the technical feasibility of the development
has been demonstrated, and it is probable that the expenditure will enable the asset
to generate future economic benefits in excess of its originally assessed standard of
performance, in which case they are capitalised.
These costs are amortised on a straight-line basis over their expected useful lives, which are
between three to 10 years.
(c) Other intangible assets
The acquisition of subsidiaries has been accounted for in accordance with IFRS 3 ‘Business
Combinations’, which requires the recognition of the identifiable assets acquired and
liabilities assumed at their acquisition date fair values. As part of this process,
it was necessary to recognise certain intangible assets that are separately identifiable and
are not included on the acquiree’s balance sheet, which are amortised over their expected
useful lives, as set out above.
The Group applies IAS 36 to determine whether an intangible asset is impaired.
22. Investments in Group undertakings
Company
2024
2023
Cost and net book value
£million
£million
At 1 January
5.9
5.7
Equity contributions to subsidiaries in respect of share options
0.2
0.2
At 31 December
6.1
5.9
Shares in subsidiary undertakings of Secure Trust Bank PLC are stated at cost less any provision
for impairment. All subsidiary undertakings are unlisted and none are banking institutions.
The share capital of the subsidiary undertakings comprises solely of ordinary shares and all are
100% owned by the Company. The subsidiary undertakings were all incorporated in the UK and
wholly owned via ordinary shares. All subsidiary undertakings are included in the consolidated
financial statements and have an accounting reference date of 31 December.
Details are as follows:
Company
number
Principal activity
Owned directly
AppToPay Ltd
11204449
Non-trading
Debt Managers (Services) Limited
08092808
Debt management
Secure Homes Services Limited
01404439
Property rental
STB Leasing Limited
01648384
Non-trading
V12 Finance Group Limited
07498951
Holding company
Owned indirectly via an intermediate holding company
V12 Personal Finance Limited
05418233
Dormant
Sourcing and servicing
V12 Retail Finance Limited
04585692
of unsecured loans
The registered office of the Company, and all subsidiary undertakings, is Yorke House, Arleston
Way, Solihull B90 4LH.
AppToPay Ltd, Debt Managers (Services) Limited, Secure Homes Services Limited, STB Leasing
Limited, V12 Finance Group Limited and V12 Personal Finance Limited are exempt from the
requirements of the Companies Act 2006 relating to the audit of individual accounts by virtue of
s479A, and the Company has given guarantees accordingly under s479C in respect of the year
ended 31 December 2024.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
160
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
23. Deferred taxation
Group
Group
Company
Company
2024
2023
2024
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
Deferred tax assets:
Other short-term timing differences
3.3
4.3
3.3
4.3
At 31 December
3.3
4.3
3.3
4.3
Deferred tax assets:
At 1 January
4.3
5.6
4.3
5.3
Income statement
(0.8)
(1.2)
(0.8)
(0.9)
Other comprehensive income
(0.2)
(0.1)
(0.2)
(0.1)
At 31 December
3.3
4.3
3.3
4.3
Deferred tax accounting policy
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if there is a legally enforceable right to
offset current tax assets and liabilities, and they relate to taxes levied by the same tax
authority on the same taxable entity, or on different tax entities, when they intend to settle
current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis or their tax assets and liabilities will be
realised simultaneously.
Deferred tax assets are recognised where it is probable that future taxable profits will be
available, against which the temporary differences can be utilised.
24. Other assets
Group
Group
Company
Company
2024
2023
2024
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
Gross amounts due from
related companies
4.2
4.8
Less: allowances for impairment of
amounts due from related companies
(1.9)
(2.1)
Amounts due from related companies
2.3
2.7
Other receivables
2.0
2.4
1.7
2.3
Cloud software development prepayment
3.6
4.4
3.6
4.4
Other prepayments and accrued income
6.1
6.1
5.4
5.0
11.7
12.9
13.0
14.4
Cloud software development costs, principally relating to the Group’s Motor Transformation
Programme, do not meet the intangible asset recognition criteria and are, therefore, classified
as a prepayment, which is expensed to the income statement over the useful economic life of
the software.
25. Due to banks
Group and Company
2024
2023
£million
£million
Amounts due under the Bank of England’s liquidity
support operations
Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives
230.0
390.0
for SMEs (‘TFSME’)
Index Long-Term Repos (‘ILTR’)
125.0
Amounts due to other credit institutions
6.9
6.8
TFSME accrued interest
3.2
5.2
ILTR accrued interest
0.7
365.8
402.0
Amounts due under TFSME bear interest at the Bank of England base rate and are due for
repayment during 2025.
The accounting policy for amounts due to banks is included in Note 1.4 Financial assets and
financial liabilities accounting policy.
26. Deposits from customers
Group and Company
2024
2023
£million
£million
Access accounts
805.2
521.3
Fixed term bonds
1,510.0
1,546.6
Notice accounts
72.4
174.3
ISAs
857.3
629.6
3,244.9
2,871.8
The accounting policy for deposits from customers is included in Note 1.4 Financial assets
and financial liabilities accounting policy.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
161
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
27. Lease liabilities
Group
Group
Company
Company
2024
2023
2024
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
At 1 January
2.3
2.1
2.1
1.9
New leases
0.8
1.0
0.6
0.9
Lease termination
Payments
(1.4)
(0.9)
(1.2)
(0.8)
Interest expense
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
At 31 December
1.8
2.3
1.6
2.1
Lease liabilities – Gross
– No later than one year
1.1
0.9
1.0
0.9
– Later than one year but no later
than five years
0.8
1.5
0.7
1.3
1.9
2.4
1.7
2.2
Less: Future finance expense
(0.1)
(0.1)
(0.1)
(0.1)
Lease liabilities – Net
1.8
2.3
1.6
2.1
Lease liabilities – Gross
– No later than one year
1.1
0.9
0.9
0.9
– Later than one year but no later
than five years
0.7
1.4
0.7
1.2
1.8
2.3
1.6
2.1
The accounting policy for lease liabilities is included in Note 20 Lessee accounting policy.
28. Other liabilities
Group
Group
Company
Company
2024
2023
2024
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
Other payables
23.1
25.9
21.1
23.7
Amounts due to related companies
12.5
10.5
Accruals and deferred income
9.4
11.8
7.5
10.5
32.5
37.7
41.1
44.7
29. Provisions for liabilities and charges
Group
Group
ECL allowance
on loan
commitments
Other
Total
£million
£million
£million
Balance at 1 January 2023
1.1
1.4
2.5
(Credit)/charge to income statement
(0.3)
8.5
8.2
Utilised
(4.7)
(4.7)
Balance at 31 December 2023
0.8
5.2
6.0
Charge to income statement
0.1
9.8
9.9
Utilised
(4.6)
(4.6)
Balance at 31 December 2024
0.9
10.4
11.3
Company
Company
ECL allowance
on loan
commitments
Other
Total
£million
£million
£million
Balance at 1 January 2023
1.1
0.9
2.0
(Credit)/charge to income statement
(0.3)
7.2
6.9
Utilised
(3.3)
(3.3)
Balance at 31 December 2023
0.8
4.8
5.6
Charge to income statement
0.1
10.1
10.2
Utilised
(4.5)
(4.5)
Balance at 31 December 2024
0.9
10.4
11.3
ECL allowance on loan commitments
In accordance with the requirements of IFRS 9, the Group holds an ECL allowance against
loans it has committed to lend, but have not yet been drawn. For the Real Estate Finance and
Commercial Finance portfolios, where a loan facility is agreed that includes both drawn and
undrawn elements and the Group cannot identify the ECL on the loan commitment separately,
a combined loss allowance for both drawn and undrawn components of the loan is presented
as a deduction from the gross carrying amount of the drawn component, with any excess of the
loss allowance over the gross drawn amount presented as a provision. At 31 December 2024 and
31 December 2023, no provision was held for losses in excess of drawn amounts.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
162
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
29. Provisions for liabilities and charges
continued
Other
Other includes:
• provision for fraud, which relates to cases where the Group has reasonable evidence
of suspected fraud, but further investigation is required before the cases can be dealt
with appropriately;
• s75 Consumer Credit Act 1974 provision;
• provision for redundancy;
• costs and redress relating to the BiFD Vehicle Finance collections review (see Note 8 for further
details and historical motor commissions, see below for further details); and
• costs and redress relating to further customer redress initiatives.
The Directors expect these provisions to be fully utilised within the next one to two years.
Provisions for liabilities and charges accounting policy
A provision is recognised where there is a present obligation as a result of a past event, it is
probable that the obligation will be settled and it can be reliably estimated.
29.1. Key sources of estimation uncertainty
In January 2024, the FCA launched a review of the historical use of discretionary
commission arrangements (‘DCAs’) in the motor finance industry. The Vehicle Finance
business sometimes operated these arrangements until June 2017, but stopped doing
so well ahead of the FCA banning their use in January 2021. Only 4% (by value) of our
historical motor commissions paid
1
involved these arrangements. The FCA will update firms
on its next steps after the Supreme Court decision (see below).
The October 2024, the Court of Appeal gave judgment in the cases of Hopcraft, Wrench
and Johnson which had wider implications for the legality of both fixed and DCA historical
motor commissions. These cases are now being appealed to the Supreme Court and one
or more could be overturned, partially upheld or fully upheld. Not all of the fact pattern of
these cases is the same as how the Group has operated.
A key feature of the fact pattern in these cases was the linked sale by a dealer of the vehicle
and the direct introduction of the finance by that same dealer. Commission payments
to dealers make up only 20% of our historical motor commission payments
2
, with the
remainder involving brokers and various other introducers, independent of the vehicle
dealer, and with different sales distribution arrangements and customer journeys. In the two
relevant cases considered by the Court of Appeal we did not, unlike that lender in those
cases, have a contractual right of first refusal to provide the lending. We consider that we
complied with the applicable law and regulation at the time. Unless it is overturned, the
Court of Appeal’s judgment gives rise to a disconnect between law and regulation at the
time. The FCA has been given permission to intervene in the Supreme Court appeal and
we expect the FCA to submit that the law should appropriately take into account regulation
and together they should be coherent.
These events could lead to redress being payable to customers and associated operational
costs. Due to the uncertain outcomes (including the nature, extent and timing) of the FCA
review, the Supreme Court appeal and related legal developments, we have undertaken
scenario analysis using different assumptions, which have been probability weighted
to estimate a potential exposure. As a result, the Group has recognised a provision of
£6.4 million. This comprises potential goodwill/redress payments of £5.2 million, and
£1.2 million of associated costs. As and when new information becomes available, our
scenarios and assumptions will be revised and so the provision could be materially higher
or lower.
This provision of £6.4 million has been recognised in addition to £0.5 million costs, totalling
£6.9 million which are treated as exceptional items (see Note 8 for further information).
1.
From February 2009 (when we began our Vehicle Finance business) to June 2017 (when we ceased DCAs).
2.
From February 2009 (when we began our Vehicle Finance business) to October 2024 (until we restarted lending after a short pause
after the Court of Appeal’s judgment).
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
163
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
30. Subordinated liabilities
Group and Company
2024
2023
£million
£million
Notes at par value
90.0
90.0
Unamortised issue costs
(0.7)
(0.9)
Accrued interest
4.0
4.0
93.3
93.1
The Fixed Rate Reset Callable Subordinated Notes due August 2033 are listed on the
International Securities Market of the London Stock Exchange. This issuance is in line with the
Group’s funding strategy and supports the Group’s stated medium-term growth ambitions.
• The notes are redeemable for cash at their principal amount on fixed dates.
• The Company has a call option to redeem the notes early in the event of a ‘tax event’ or a
‘capital disqualification event’, which is at the full discretion of the Company.
• Interest payments are paid at six-monthly intervals and are mandatory.
• The notes give the holders’ rights to the principal amount on the notes, plus any unpaid
interest, on liquidation. Any such claims are subordinated to senior creditors, but rank pari
passu with holders of other subordinated obligations and in priority to holders of share capital.
The above features provide the issuer with a contractual obligation to deliver cash or another
financial asset to the holders, and, therefore, the notes are classified as financial liabilities.
Transaction costs that are directly attributable to the issue of the notes and are deducted from
the financial liability and expensed to the income statement on an effective interest rate basis
over the expected life of the notes.
The notes are treated as Tier 2 regulatory capital, which is used to support the continuing growth
of the business taking into account increases in regulatory capital buffers. The issue of the notes is
part of an ongoing programme to diversify and expand the capital base of the Group.
The Group paid interest of £11.7 million on subordinated liabilities during the period
(2023: £6.7 million), which is included in net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities in the
consolidated and company statement of cash flows.
The accounting policy for subordinated liabilities is included in Note 1.4 – Financial assets
and financial liabilities accounting policy.
31. Contingent liabilities and commitments
31.1. Contingent liabilities
31.1.1. Laws and regulations
As a financial services business, the Group must comply with numerous laws and regulations
that significantly affect the way it does business. Whilst the Group believes there are no material
unidentified areas of failure to comply with these laws and regulations, there can be no guarantee
that all issues have been identified.
31.2. Capital commitments
At 31 December 2024, the Group and Company had no capital commitments (2023: £nil).
31.3. Credit commitments
Group and Company
Commitments to extend credit to customers were as follows:
2024
2023
£million
£million
Consumer Finance
Retail Finance
112.2
91.6
Vehicle Finance
1.2
1.3
Business Finance
Real Estate Finance
39.5
58.9
Commercial Finance
110.3
149.5
263.2
301.3
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
164
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
32. Share capital
Number
£million
At 1 January 2023
18,691,434
7.5
Issued during 2023
326,361
0.1
At 31 December 2023
19,017,795
7.6
Issued during 2024
53,613
At 31 December 2024
19,071,408
7.6
Share capital comprises ordinary shares with a par value of 40 pence each.
Equity instruments accounting policy
Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded at the proceeds received, net of
direct issuance costs. Any amounts received over nominal value are recorded in the share
premium account, net of direct issuance costs. Costs associated with the listing of shares
are expensed immediately.
33. Other reserves
Group
Group
Company
Company
2024
2023
2024
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
Cash flow hedge reserve
(0.3)
(0.3)
Own shares
(2.2)
(1.4)
(2.2)
(1.4)
(2.2)
(1.7)
(2.2)
(1.7)
33.1. Own shares
Nominal
Nominal
value
value
2024
2024
2023
2023
Employee Benefit Trust (‘EBT’)
Number
£million
Number
£million
At 1 January
216,472
0.1
37,501
Shares acquired
312,718
0.1
188,835
0.1
Shares disposed
(94,381)
(9,864)
At 31 December
434,809
0.2
216,472
0.1
Market value (£million)
1.6
1.5
Accounting value (£million)
2.2
1.4
Percentage of called up share capital
2.3%
1.1%
These shares are held in trust for the benefit of employees, who will be exercising their options
under the Group’s share options schemes. The trustee’s expenses are included in the operating
expenses of the Group. The maximum number of shares held by the EBT during the year was
434,809 (2023: 226,336), which had a nominal value of £174,000 (2023: £91,000). Shares were
disposed of during the year for consideration of £37,000 (2023: £4,000).
Own shares accounting policy
The EBT qualifies for ‘look-through’ accounting, under which the EBT is treated as, in
substance, an extension of the sponsoring entity, which is Secure Trust Bank PLC. Own shares
represent the shares of the parent Company, Secure Trust Bank PLC, that are held by the
EBT. Own shares are recorded at cost and deducted from equity.
34. Share-based payments
At 31 December 2024 and 31 December 2023, the Group had four share-based payment
schemes in operation:
• 2017 Long-Term Incentive Plan;
• 2017 Sharesave Plan;
• 2017 Deferred Bonus Plan; and
• ‘Phantom’ Share Option Scheme.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
165
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
34. Share-based payments
continued
A summary of the movements in share options during the year is set out below:
Weighted
average
Weighted
Weighted
remaining
average
average
Forfeited,
contractual
exercise price
exercise price
lapsed and
Vested and
life of options
of options
of options
Outstanding at
Granted
cancelled
Exercised
Outstanding at
exercisable at
outstanding at
outstanding at
outstanding at
1 January
during
during
during
31 December
31 December
31 December
31 December
31 December
2024
the year
the year
the year
2024
2024
Vesting
2024
2024
2023
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
dates
Years
£
£
Equity settled
2017 Long-Term Incentive Plan
718,098
423,111
(189,815)
(58,773)
892,621
10,922
2025–2029
2.3
0.40
0.40
2017 Sharesave Plan
403,913
143,596
(87,559)
(43,450)
416,500
2025–2027
1.9
6.27
5.93
2017 Deferred Bonus Plan
88,533
43,162
(45,771)
85,924
3,338
2025–2027
1.6
0.40
0.40
1,210,544
609,869
(277,374)
(147,994) 1,395,045
14,260
2.1
2.14
2.25
Weighted average exercise price
2.25
1.95
2.28
1.84
2.15
0.40
Cash settled
‘Phantom’ share option scheme
38,000
38,000
38,000
2019
25.00
25.00
Group
Group
Company
Company
2024
2023
2024
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
Expense incurred in relation to share-based payments
2.3
1.1
2.3
0.9
34.1. Long-Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’)
The LTIP was established on 3 May 2017. Two separate awards to a number of participants were
made under this plan during the year, as set out below.
34.1.1. LTIP Restricted share award
During the year, 114,281 (2023: 63,975) options were awarded that were not subject to any
performance conditions. The awards will vest three years from the date of grant. The original
grant date valuation was determined using a Black–Scholes model. Measurement inputs and
assumptions used for the grant date valuation were as follows:
Awarded during
Awarded during
2024
2023
Share price at grant date
£6.90
£6.70
Exercise price
£0.40
£0.40
Expected dividend yield
5.10%
5.20%
Expected stock price volatility
36.72%
42.93%
Risk free interest rate
4.35%
3.44%
Average expected life (years)
3.00
3.00
Original grant date valuation
£5.57
£5.37
34.1.2. LTIP
During the year, 308,830 (2023: 217,307) options were awarded that are subject to four
performance conditions. Details of the performance conditions can be found on page 104.
The awards have a performance term of three years. The awards will vest on the date on which
the Board determines that these conditions have been met.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
166
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
34. Share-based payments
continued
The original grant date valuation was determined using a Black-Scholes model for the return on
average equity, earnings per share and risk management tranches (modified for probability of
outturn), and a Monte Carlo model for the total shareholder return tranche. Measurement inputs
and assumptions used for the grant date valuation were as follows:
Awarded
Awarded
during 2024
Awarded
Awarded
during 2024
Two year
during 2023
during 2023
No holding
holding
No holding
Two year
period
period
period
holding period
Number of shares
136,895
171,935
109,382
107,925
Share price at grant date
£6.90
£6.90
£6.70
£6.70
Exercise price
£0.40
£0.40
£0.40
£0.40
Expected dividend yield
5.10%
5.10%
5.20%
5.20%
Expected stock price volatility
35.00%
35.00%
40.00%
40.00%
Risk free interest rate
4.51%
4.19%
3.49%
3.42%
Average expected life (years)
3.00
5.00
3.00
5.00
Original grant date valuation
£4.40
£3.95
£2.98
£2.69
34.2. Sharesave Plan
The Sharesave Plan was established on 3 May 2017. This plan allows all employees to save for
three years, subject to a maximum monthly amount of £250 (2023: £250), with the option to
buy shares in Secure Trust Bank PLC when the plan matures. Participants cannot change the
amount that they have agreed to save each month, but they can suspend payments for up to
twelve months. Participants can withdraw their savings at any time but, if they do this before
the completion date, they lose the option to buy shares at the Option Price, and in most
circumstances if participants cease to hold plan-related employment before the third anniversary
of the grant date, then the options are also lost. The options ordinarily vest approximately three
years after grant date and are exercisable for a period of six months following vesting.
The original grant date valuation was determined using a Black–Scholes model.
Measurement inputs and assumptions used were as follows:
Awarded
Awarded
during 2024
during 2023
Share price at grant date
£8.14
£6.30
Exercise price
£6.99
£5.43
Expected stock price volatility
37.22%
37.25%
Expected dividend yield
5.10%
5.20%
Risk free interest rate
3.75%
4.52%
Average expected life (years)
3.00
3.00
Original grant date valuation
£2.07
£1.63
34.3. Deferred Bonus Plan
The Deferred Bonus Plan was established on 3 May 2017. In 2024 and 2023, awards were granted
to certain senior managers of the Group. The awards vest in three equal tranches after one, two
and three years following deferral. Accordingly, the following awards remain outstanding under
the plan, entitling the members of the scheme to purchase shares in the Company:
Awards granted
Awards granted
Awards granted
Vesting after
Vesting after
Vesting after
Awards
one year
two years
three years
granted
Number
Number
Number
Total
At 1 January 2023
12,779
17,119
19,909
49,807
Granted
13,315
13,315
13,323
39,953
Exercised
(401)
(826)
(1,227)
At 31 December 2023
25,693
30,434
32,406
88,533
Granted
14,385
14,385
14,392
43,162
Exercised
(23,295)
(16,179)
(6,297)
(45,771)
At 31 December 2024
16,783
28,640
40,501
85,924
Vested and exercisable
2,398
940
3,338
The original grant date valuation was determined using a Black–Scholes model.
Measurement inputs and assumptions used were as follows:
Granted in 2024
Granted in 2024
Granted in 2024
Awards vesting
Awards vesting
Awards vesting
after one year
after two years
after three years
Share price at grant date
£6.90
£6.90
£6.90
Exercise price
£0.40
£0.40
£0.40
Expected dividend yield
5.10%
5.10%
5.10%
Expected stock price volatility
32.51%
38.89%
36.72%
Risk free interest rate
4.78%
4.52%
4.35%
Average expected life (years)
1.00
2.00
3.00
Original grant date valuation
£6.18
£5.87
£5.57
Granted in 2023
Granted in 2023
Granted in 2023
Awards vesting
Awards vesting
Awards vesting
after one years
after two years
after three years
Share price at grant date
£6.70
£6.70
£6.70
Exercise price
£0.40
£0.40
£0.40
Expected dividend yield
5.20%
5.20%
5.20%
Expected stock price volatility
44.41%
38.77%
42.93%
Risk free interest rate
3.97%
3.40%
3.44%
Average expected life (years)
1.00
2.00
3.00
Original grant date valuation
£5.98
£5.66
£5.37
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
167
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
34. Share-based payments
continued
34.4. Cash settled share-based payments
On 16 March 2015, a four-year ‘phantom’ share option scheme was established in order to
provide effective long-term incentive to senior management of the Group. Under the scheme,
no actual shares would be issued by the Company, but those granted awards under the scheme
would be entitled to a cash payment. The amount of the award is calculated by reference to
the increase in the value of an ordinary share in the Company over an initial value set at £25 per
ordinary share, being the price at which the shares resulting from the exercise of the first tranche
of share options under the share option scheme were sold in the market in November 2014.
The options vested during 2019 and are exercisable for a period of 10 years after grant date.
As at 31 December 2024, using any reasonable range of inputs and assumptions, the fair value
of the ‘phantom’ options is £nil (2023: £nil). Accordingly, no liability was recognised in the
consolidated financial statements at 31 December 2024 or 31 December 2023.
For each award granted during the year, expected volatility was determined by calculating the
historical volatility of the Group’s share price over the period equivalent to the expected term
of the options being granted. The expected life used in the model has been adjusted, based
on management’s best estimate, for the effects of non-transferability, exercise restrictions,
and behavioural considerations.
Share-based compensation accounting policy
The fair value of equity settled share-based payment awards are calculated at grant date
and recognised over the period in which the employees become unconditionally entitled
to the awards (the vesting period). The amount is recognised in operating expenses in the
income statement, with a corresponding increase in equity. Further details of the valuation
methodology are set out above.
The fair value of cash settled share-based payments is recognised in operating expenses in
the income statement with a corresponding increase in liabilities over the vesting period.
The liability is remeasured at each reporting date and at the settlement date based on the
fair value of the options granted, with a corresponding adjustment to operating expenses.
35. Cash flow statement
35.1. Cash and cash equivalents
For the purposes of the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents comprise the
following balances with less than three months’ maturity from the date of acquisition.
Group
Group
Company
Company
2024
2023
2024
2023
£million
£million
£million
£million
Cash and Bank of England reserve account
445.0
351.6
445.0
351.6
Loans and advances to banks (Note 13)
24.0
53.7
23.6
53.0
Less:
Cash ratio deposit
(4.8)
(4.8)
Collateral margin account
(0.2)
(0.2)
(5.0)
(5.0)
Cash and cash equivalents
469.0
400.3
468.6
399.6
The Group and Company has no access to the cash ratio deposit or the collateral margin
accounts, so these amounts do not meet the definition of cash and cash equivalents, and
accordingly, they are excluded from cash and cash equivalents.
35.2. Changes in liabilities arising from financing activities
All changes in liabilities arising from financing activities arise from changes in cash flows, apart
from £0.1 million (2023: £0.1 million) of lease liabilities interest expense, as shown in Note 27, and
£0.2 million (2023: £0.2 million) amortisation of issue costs on subordinated liabilities, as shown in
Note 30.
Cash and cash equivalents accounting policy
For the purpose of the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents comprise cash
in hand and demand deposits, and cash equivalents, being highly liquid investments,
which are convertible into cash with an insignificant risk of changes in value with a maturity
of three months or less at the date of acquisition, including certain loans and advances to
banks and short-term highly liquid debt securities.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
168
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
36. Financial risk management strategy
By their nature, the Group’s activities are principally related to the use of financial instruments.
The Directors and senior management of the Group have formally adopted a Group risk appetite
statement that sets out the Board’s attitude to risk and internal controls. Key risks identified by the
Directors are formally reviewed and assessed at least once a year by the Board. In addition, key
business risks are identified, evaluated and managed by operating management on an ongoing
basis by means of procedures, such as physical controls, credit and other authorisation limits and
segregation of duties. The Board also receives regular reports on any risk matters that need to
be brought to its attention. Significant risks identified in connection with the development of new
activities are subject to consideration by the Board. There are budgeting procedures in place and
reports are presented regularly to the Board detailing the results of each principal business unit,
variances against budget and prior year, and other performance data.
A more detailed description of the risk governance structure is contained in the Principal risks and
uncertainties section beginning on page 30.
Included within the principal financial risks inherent in the Group’s business are credit risk (Note
37), market risk (Note 38), liquidity risk (Note 39), and capital risk (Note 40).
37. Credit risk
The Company and Group take on exposure to credit risk, which is the risk that a counterparty
will be unable to satisfy their debt servicing commitments when due. Counterparties include the
consumers to whom the Group lends on a secured and unsecured basis and Small and Medium
size Enterprises (‘SMEs’) to whom the Group primarily lends on a secured basis, as well as the
market counterparties with whom the Group deals.
Impairment provisions are provided for expected credit losses at the statement of financial
position date. Significant changes in the economy could result in losses that are different from
those provided for at the statement of financial position date. Management, therefore, carefully
manages the Group’s exposures to credit risk as it considers this to be the most significant
risk to the business. Disclosures relating to collateral on loans and advances to customers are
disclosed in Note 14.
The Board monitors the ratings of the counterparties in relation to the Group’s loans and
advances to banks. Disclosures of these at the year-end are contained in Note 13. There is no
direct exposure to the Eurozone and peripheral Eurozone countries.
See page 32 for further details on the mitigation and change during the year of credit risk.
Group and Company
With the exception of loans and advances to customers, the carrying amount of financial assets
represents the maximum exposure to credit risk. The maximum exposure to credit risk for loans
and advances to customers by portfolio and IFRS 9 stage without taking account of any collateral
held or other credit enhancements attached was as follows:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total gross
loans and
<= 30 days
> 30 days
advances to
past due
past due
Total
customers
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
31 December 2024
Consumer Finance
Retail Finance
1,324.1
48.1
4.1
52.2
11.6
1,387.9
Vehicle Finance
500.7
40.0
21.0
61.0
65.0
626.7
Business Finance
Real Estate
Finance
1,046.9
209.0
0.1
209.1
97.9
1,353.9
Commercial
Finance
332.9
6.7
6.7
12.2
351.8
Total drawn
exposure
3,204.6
303.8
25.2
329.0
186.7
3,720.3
Off balance sheet
Loan
commitments
262.4
0.8
0.8
263.2
Total gross
exposure
3,467.0
304.6
25.2
329.8
186.7
3,983.5
Less:
Impairment
allowance
(29.6)
(8.6)
(7.3)
(15.9)
(66.3)
(111.8)
Provision for loan
commitments
(0.9)
(0.9)
Total net exposure
3,436.5
296.0
17.9
313.9
120.4
3,870.8
Of collateral in the form of property, £110.1 million (2023: £117.8 million) has been pledged
as security for Real Estate Finance Stage 3 balances of £86.1 million (2023: £84.0 million).
Of collateral in the form of vehicles, £37.4 million (2023: £21.0 million) has been pledged
as security for Vehicle Finance Stage 3 balances of £20.7 million (2023: £14.7 million).
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
169
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
37. Credit risk
continued
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total gross
loans and
<= 30 days
> 30 days
advances to
past due
past due
Total
Total
customers
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
31 December 2023
Consumer Finance
Retail Finance
1,149.2
92.9
4.4
97.3
8.8
1,255.3
Vehicle Finance
420.1
34.3
20.4
54.7
38.3
513.1
Business Finance
Real Estate
Finance
1,024.9
134.4
1.5
135.9
91.0
1,251.8
Commercial
Finance
357.3
9.9
9.9
16.0
383.2
Total drawn
exposure
2,951.5
271.5
26.3
297.8
154.1
3,403.4
Off balance sheet
Loan
commitments
299.1
2.2
2.2
301.3
Total gross
exposure
3,250.6
273.7
26.3
300.0
154.1
3,704.7
Less:
Impairment
allowance
(29.5)
(10.5)
(7.7)
(18.2)
(40.4)
(88.1)
Provision for loan
commitments
(0.8)
(0.8)
Total net exposure
3,220.3
263.2
18.6
281.8
113.7
3,615.8
A reconciliation of opening to closing allowance for impairment of loans and advances to
customers is presented in Note 16.
Company
In addition to the above, counterparties to the Company include subsidiary undertakings.
For the ECL on amounts due from related companies, see Note 24.
37.1. Concentration risk
Management assesses the potential concentration risk from geographic, product and individual
loan concentration. Due to the nature of the Group’s lending operations, the Directors consider
the lending operations of the Group as a whole to be well diversified. Details of the Group’s
loans and advances to customers and loan commitments by product is provided in Notes 3
and 31, respectively.
Geographical concentration
The Group’s Real Estate Finance loan book is secured against UK property only. The geographical
concentration of these business loans and advances to customers, by location of the security, is
as follows:
Group and Company
2024
2023
£million
£million
Central England
113.2
99.5
Greater London
691.5
709.5
Northern England
124.8
89.2
South East England (excl. Greater London)
273.5
233.3
South West England
54.4
40.7
Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland
96.5
79.6
Gross loans and receivables
1,353.9
1,251.8
Allowance for impairment
(12.5)
(8.0)
Total
1,341.4
1,243.8
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
170
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
37. Credit risk
continued
37.2. Forbearance
Consumer Finance
Throughout the year, the Group did not routinely reschedule contractual arrangements where
customers default on their repayments. In cases where it offered the customer the option to
reduce or defer payments for a short period, in line with our responsibilities from a conduct
perspective, the loans retained the normal contractual payment due dates and were treated the
same as any other defaulting cases for impairment purposes. Arrears tracking would continue on
the account, with any impairment charge being based on the original contractual due dates for
all products.
All forbearance arrangements are formally discussed and agreed with the customer in
accordance with regulatory guidance on the support of customers. By offering customers in
financial difficulty the option of forbearance, the Group potentially exposes itself to an increased
level of risk through prolonging the period of non-contractual payment. All forbearance
arrangements are reviewed and monitored regularly to assess the ongoing potential risk,
suitability and sustainability to the Group. As at the year end, the Consumer Finance business
approximately had the following cases (by volume) in forbearance:
• Retail Finance 0.14% (2023: 0.15%); and
• Vehicle Finance: 0.59% (2023: 0.11%).
In respect of Vehicle Finance, where forbearance measures are not possible or are considered
not to be in the customer’s best interests, or where such measures have been tried and the
customer has not adhered to the forbearance terms that have been agreed, the Group will
consider realising its security and taking possession of the vehicle in order to sell it and clear the
outstanding debt. Where the sale of the vehicle does not cover all of the remaining loan, normal
credit collection procedures may be carried out in order to recover the outstanding debt, or the
debt may be sold to a third party debt recovery agent, or in certain circumstances, the debt may
be written off.
Real Estate Finance
Where clients provided evidence of payment difficulties, they were supported by the provision
of extensions to loan maturity dates. A small number of clients, who experienced difficulties
in meeting their financial commitments, were offered concessions (facility restructures or
amendments) that Real Estate Finance would not have provided under normal circumstances.
As at 31 December 2024, 4.9% of accounts were classed as forborne (2023: 9.6%).
Where forbearance measures are not possible, or are considered not to be in the client’s best
interests, or where such measures have been tried and the customer has not adhered to the
forbearance terms that have been agreed, the Group will consider realising its security.
38. Market risk
The Group’s market risk is primarily linked to interest rate risk. Interest rate risk refers to the
exposure of the Group’s financial position to adverse movements in interest rates.
When interest rates change, the present value and timing of future cash flows change. This,
in turn, changes the underlying value of the Group’s assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet
instruments, and hence, its economic value. Changes in interest rates also affect the Group’s
earnings by altering interest-sensitive income and expenses, affecting its net interest income.
The principal currency in which the Group operates is Sterling, although a small number of
transactions are completed in US dollars, Euros and other currencies in the Commercial Finance
business. The Group has no significant exposures to foreign currencies and hedges any residual
currency risks to Sterling. The Group does not operate a trading book.
See page 35 for further details on the mitigation and change during the year of market risk.
Interest rate risk
Group and Company
The Group seeks to ‘match’ interest rate risk between its assets and liabilities in the first instance
and hedges any material residual risks using interest rate derivatives in accordance with the
Group’s risk appetite.
The Group monitors its exposure to interest rate risk on at least a weekly basis, using market
value sensitivity and earnings at risk, which were as follows at 31 December:
   
 
2024
2023
 
£million
£million
Market value sensitivity
   
+200bp parallel shift in yield curve
1.5
2.5
-200bp parallel shift in yield curve
(1.6)
(2.7)
Earnings at risk sensitivity
   
+100bp parallel shift in yield curve
1.5
1.2
-100bp parallel shift in yield curve
(1.5)
(1.2)
The Directors consider that 200bps in the case of market value sensitivity and 100bps in the case
of earnings at risk are a reasonable approximation of possible changes.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
171
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
39. Liquidity and funding risk
Liquidity and funding risk is the risk that the Group is unable to meet its obligations as they fall due or
can only do so at excessive cost. The Group maintains adequate liquidity resources and a prudent,
stable funding profile at all times to cover liabilities as they fall due in normal and stressed conditions.
The Group manages its liquidity in line with internal and regulatory requirements, and at least
annually assesses the robustness of the liquidity requirements as part of the Group’s Internal
Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (‘ILAAP’).
See page 33 for further details on the mitigation and change during the year of liquidity and
funding risk.
The tables below analyse the contractual undiscounted cash flows for financial liabilities into
relevant maturity groupings:
   
       
More than
More than
 
     
Not more
three months
one year but
 
 
Carrying
Gross nominal
than three
but less than
less than five
More than
 
amount
outflow
months
one year
years
five years
 
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
At 31 December 2024
           
Due to banks
365.8
374.1
52.6
321.5
Deposits from customers
3,244.9
3,336.5
2,058.0
674.8
601.0
2.7
Subordinated liabilities
93.3
136.8
11.7
125.1
Lease liabilities
1.8
1.9
0.3
0.8
0.8
Other financial liabilities
23.1
23.1
23.1
 
3,728.9
3,872.4
2,134.0
1,008.8
726.9
2.7
Derivative financial
           
liabilities
10.0
10.2
2.0
3.4
4.8
 
3,738.9
3,882.6
2,136.0
1,012.2
731.7
2.7
             
       
More than
More than
 
     
Not more
three months
one year but
 
 
Carrying
Gross nominal
than three
but less than
less than five
More than
 
amount
outflow
months
one year
years
five years
 
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
At 31 December 2023
           
Due to banks
402.0
435.9
12.1
15.4
408.4
Deposits from customers
2,871.8
2,949.5
1,532.0
806.7
608.9
1.9
Subordinated liabilities
93.1
148.5
5.9
5.9
136.7
Lease liabilities
2.3
2.4
0.2
0.7
1.5
Other financial liabilities
25.9
25.9
25.9
 
3,395.1
3,562.2
1,576.1
828.7
1,155.5
1.9
Derivative financial
           
liabilities
22.0
23.4
2.8
5.6
15.0
 
3,417.1
3,585.6
1,578.9
834.3
1,170.5
1.9
Company
The contractual undiscounted cash flows for financial liabilities of the Company are the same as
above except for the following:
   
       
More than
More than
 
     
Not more
three months
one year but
 
 
Carrying
Gross nominal
than three
but less than
less than five
More than
 
amount
outflow
months
one year
years
five years
 
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
At 31 December 2024
           
Lease liabilities
1.6
1.7
0.3
0.7
0.7
Other financial liabilities
33.6
33.6
33.6
Non-derivative financial
           
liabilities
3,739.2
3,882.7
2,144.5
1,008.7
726.8
2.7
Total
3,749.2
3,892.9
2,146.5
1,012.1
731.6
2.7
         
More than
 
     
Not more
More than three
one year but
 
 
Carrying
Gross nominal
than three
months but less
less than five
More than
 
amount
outflow
months
than one year
years
five years
 
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
£million
At 31 December 2023
           
Lease liabilities
2.1
2.1
0.2
0.7
1.2
Other financial liabilities
34.2
34.2
34.2
Non-derivative financial
           
liabilities
3,403.2
3,570.2
1,584.4
828.7
1,155.2
1.9
Total
3,425.2
3,593.6
1,587.2
834.3
1,170.2
1.9
40. Capital risk (unaudited)
Capital risk is the risk that the Group will have insufficient capital resources to absorb potential
losses. The Group adopts a conservative approach to managing its capital and at least annually
assesses the robustness of the capital requirements as part of the Group’s Internal Capital
Adequacy Assessment Process (‘ICAAP’). The Group has Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital resources,
noting the regulatory adjustments required in the table on the next page.
The following table, which is unaudited and, therefore, not in scope of the Independent Auditor’s
Report, shows the regulatory capital resources for the Group.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
172
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
40. Capital risk (unaudited)
continued
 
2024
2023
 
£million
£million
 
(unaudited)
(unaudited)
Common Equity Tier 1 (‘CET 1’)
   
Share capital
7.6
7.6
Share premium
84.0
83.8
Retained earnings
271.1
254.8
Own shares
(2.2)
(1.4)
IFRS 9 transition adjustment (See below for further details)
0.1
2.1
Goodwill
(1.0)
(1.0)
Intangible assets net of attributable deferred tax
(4.0)
(4.9)
CET 1 capital before foreseeable dividend
355.6
341.0
Foreseeable dividend
(4.2)
(3.1)
CET 1 and Tier 1 capital
351.4
337.9
Tier 2
   
Subordinated liabilities
89.3
89.1
Less ineligible portion
(25.0)
(29.4)
Total Tier 2 capital
1
64.3
59.7
Own funds
415.7
397.6
Reconciliation to total equity:
   
IFRS 9 transition adjustment
(0.1)
(2.1)
Eligible subordinated liabilities
(64.3)
(59.7)
Cash flow hedge reserve
(0.3)
Goodwill and other intangible assets net of attributable deferred tax
5.0
5.9
Foreseeable dividend
4.2
3.1
Total equity
360.5
344.5
1.
Tier 2 capital comprises solely subordinated debt, excluding accrued interest, capped at 25% of the Pillar 1 and 2A requirements as set by
the PRA.
The Group has elected to adopt the IFRS 9 transitional rules. In 2024, this allowed for 25%
(2023: 50%) of increases from 1 January 2020 in provisions on non-defaulted accounts net of
attributable deferred tax, to be added back to eligible capital. This relief ends on 1 January 2025.
The Group’s regulatory capital is divided into:
• CET 1 capital, which comprises shareholders’ funds (excluding employee benefit trust own
shares), after adding back the IFRS 9 transition adjustment and deducting qualifying intangible
assets and prudent valuation adjustments. IFRS 9 transition adjustment and intangible assets
are both net of attributable deferred tax; and
• Tier 2 capital, which is solely subordinated debt net of unamortised issue costs,
capped at 25% of the capital requirement.
The Group operates the standardised approach to credit risk, whereby risk weightings are
applied to the Group’s on and off balance sheet exposures. The weightings applied are those
stipulated in the UK Capital Requirements Regulation.
Further information on capital is included within our Pillar 3 disclosures, which can be found on
the Group’s website (w
ww.securetrustbank.com/pillar3
). See page 34 for further details on the
mitigation and change during the year of capital risk.
The Group is subject to capital requirements imposed by the PRA on all financial services firms.
During the year, the Group complied with these requirements.
41. Classification of financial assets and liabilities
Group
 
Total
   
Total
   
 
carrying
 
Fair value
carrying
 
Fair value
 
amount
Fair value
hierarchy
amount
Fair value
hierarchy
 
£million
£million
level
£million
£million
level
 
2024
2024
2024
2023
2023
2023
Cash and Bank of England
           
reserve account
445.0
445.0
Level 1
351.6
351.6
Level 1
Loans and advances to banks
24.0
24.0
Level 2
53.7
53.7
Level 2
Loans and advances to customers
3,608.5
3,612.3
Level 3
3,315.3
3,279.7
Level 3
Derivative financial instruments
14.3
14.3
Level 2
25.5
25.5
Level 2
Other financial assets
2.0
2.0
Level 3
2.4
2.4
Level 3
 
4,093.8 4,097.6
 
 
3,748.5 3,712.9
 
 
Due to banks
365.8
365.8
Level 2
402.0
402.0
Level 2
Deposits from customers
3,244.9
3,254.0
Level 3
2,871.8
2,850.1
Level 3
Derivative financial instruments
10.0
10.0
Level 2
22.0
22.0
Level 2
Lease liabilities
1.8
1.8
Level 3
2.3
2.3
Level 3
Other financial liabilities
23.1
23.1
Level 3
25.9
25.9
Level 3
Subordinated liabilities
93.3
90.2
Level 2
93.1
94.8
Level 3
 
3,738.9 3,744.9
 
 
3,417.1 3,397.1
 
 
All financial assets and liabilities at 31 December 2024 and 31 December 2023 were carried at
amortised cost, except for derivative financial instruments that are at fair value through profit and
loss. Therefore, for these assets and liabilities, the fair value hierarchy noted above relates to the
disclosure in this note only.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
173
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
41. Classification of financial assets and liabilities
continued
Company
 
Total
   
Total
   
 
carrying
 
Fair value
carrying
 
Fair value
 
amount
Fair value
hierarchy
amount
Fair value
hierarchy
 
£million
£million
level
£million
£million
level
 
2024
2024
2024
2023
2023
2023
At 31 December 2024
           
Cash and Bank of England
           
reserve account
445.0
445.0
Level 1
351.6
351.6
Level 1
Loans and advances to banks
23.6
23.6
Level 2
53.0
53.0
Level 2
Loans and advances to customers
3,608.5
3,612.3
Level 3
3,315.3
3,279.7
Level 3
Derivative financial instruments
14.3
14.3
Level 2
25.5
25.5
Level 2
Other financial assets
4.0
4.0
Level 3
5.0
5.0
Level 3
 
4,095.4 4,099.2
 
 
3,750.4 3,714.8
 
 
Due to banks
365.8
365.8
Level 2
402.0
402.0
Level 2
Deposits from customers
3,244.9
3,254.0
Level 3
2,871.8
2,850.1
Level 3
Derivative financial instruments
10.0
10.0
Level 2
22.0
22.0
Level 2
Lease liabilities
1.6
1.6
Level 3
2.1
2.1
Level 3
Other financial liabilities
33.6
33.6
Level 3
34.2
34.2
Level 3
Subordinated liabilities
93.3
90.2
Level 2
93.1
94.8
Level 3
 
3,749.2 3,755.2
 
 
3,425.2 3,405.2
 
 
All financial assets and liabilities at 31 December 2024 and 31 December 2023 were carried at
amortised cost except for derivative financial instruments that are valued at fair value through
profit and loss. Therefore, for these assets, the fair value hierarchy noted above relates to the
disclosure in this note only.
Fair value classification
The tables above include the fair values and fair value hierarchies of the Group and Company’s
financial assets and liabilities. The Group measures fair value using the following fair value
hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used in making measurements.
• Level 1: Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.
• Level 2: Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the
asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices).
• Level 3: Inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data
(unobservable inputs).
Loans and advances to customers and Deposits from customers
The fair value of the financial assets and liabilities is calculated based upon the present value of
the expected future principal and interest cash flows. The rate used to discount the cash flows
was a market rate of interest at the balance sheet date. For loans and advances to customers,
the same assumptions regarding the risk of default were applied as those used to derive the
carrying value.
Derivative financial instruments
The fair value of derivative financial instruments is calculated based on the present value of the
expected future cash flows of the instruments. The rate used to discount the cash flows was the
SONIA forward curve at the balance sheet date.
Subordinated liabilities
The fair value of subordinated liabilities is calculated based on quoted market prices where
available, or where an active market quote is not available, it is calculated based on the present
value of the expected future cash flows of the instruments. The rate used to discount the cash
flows was the UK Government five year bond plus the initial spread on the instruments.
For all remaining financial assets and liabilities, the fair value of financial assets and liabilities is
calculated to be equivalent to their carrying value due to their short maturity dates.
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
174
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
42. Related party transactions
Related parties of the Company and Group include subsidiaries, key management personnel,
close family members of key management personnel and entities that are controlled, jointly
controlled or significantly influenced, or for which significant voting power is held, by key
management personnel or their close family members.
No transactions greater than £0.1 million were entered into with key management personnel or
their close family members during the current or prior year.
The Company undertook the following transactions with other companies in the Secure Trust
Bank Group:
 
2024
2023
 
£million
£million
Interest income and similar income
(30.3)
(28.8)
Operating expenses
(0.4)
(0.4)
Allowances for impairment of amounts due from related companies
0.2
(2.1)
Investment income
9.5
10.2
 
(21.0)
(21.1)
Equity contribution to subsidiaries re. share-based payments
0.2
0.2
The loans and advances with, and amounts receivable and payable to, related companies are
noted below:
 
Company
Company
 
2024
2023
 
£million
£million
Amounts receivable from subsidiary undertakings
2.3
2.7
Amounts due to subsidiary undertakings
(12.5)
(10.5)
 
(10.2)
(7.8)
All amounts above are repayable on demand and the Company charged interest at a variable
rate on amounts outstanding.
Directors’ remuneration
The Directors’ emoluments (including pension contributions and benefits in kind) for the year are
disclosed in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 101.
At the year-end the ordinary shares held by the Directors, holdings of share options, as well
as details of those share options exercised during the year are disclosed in the Directors’
Remuneration Report on page 105.
43. Immediate parent company and ultimate controlling party
The Company has no immediate parent company or ultimate controlling party.
44. Country-by-Country reporting
The Capital Requirements (Country-by-Country Reporting) Regulations 2013 introduced reporting
obligations for institutions within the scope of CRD V. The requirements aim to give increased
transparency regarding the activities of institutions. The Country-by-Country information is set
out below:
         
Average
   
         
number of
Profit
Tax paid
   
Nature
 
Turnover
FTE
before tax
on profit
 
Name
of activity
Location
£million
employees
£million
£million
 
Secure Trust
Banking
         
31 December 2024
Bank PLC
services
UK
385.2
915
29.2
8.8
 
Secure Trust
Banking
         
31 December 2023
Bank PLC
services
UK
321.3
874
33.4
8.6
45. Post balance sheet events
There have been no significant events between 31 December 2024 and the date of approval
of these financial statements, which would require a change to or additional disclosure in the
financial statements.
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Profit for the year
Continuing operations
Interest and similar income
366.0
304.0
203.0
163.9
173.1
Interest expense and similar charges
(181.1)
(136.5)
(50.4)
(27.7)
(39.4)
Net interest income
184.9
167.5
152.6
136.2
133.7
Net fee and commission income
19.0
17.2
17.0
12.7
10.8
Operating income
203.9
184.7
169.6
148.9
144.5
Net impairment charge on loans and advances
to customers
(61.9)
(43.2)
(38.2)
(5.0)
(41.4)
Other (losses)/gains
(0.3)
0.3
1.1
1.5
(3.1)
Fair value and other gains/(losses) on financial
instruments
1.2
0.5
(0.3)
(0.1)
Operating expenses
(103.8)
(99.7)
(93.2)
(89.4)
(81.8)
Profit before income tax before
exceptional items
39.1
42.6
39.0
55.9
18.2
Exceptional items
(9.9)
(6.5)
Profit before income tax
29.2
36.1
39.0
55.9
18.2
Discontinued operations
(Loss)/profit before income tax
(2.7)
5.0
0.1
0.9
Total profit before income tax
29.2
33.4
44.0
56.0
19.1
Continuing
2024
£million
Continuing
2023
£million
Continuing
2022
£million
Continuing
2021
£million
Continuing
2020
£million
Earnings per share for profit attributable to
the equity holders of the Company during
the year (pence per share)
Basic earnings per ordinary share
103.4
140.8
158.5
244.1
82.7
Five-year summary (unaudited)
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Financial position
Cash and Bank of England reserve account
445.0
351.6
370.1
234.0
181.5
Loans and advances to banks
24.0
53.7
50.5
52.0
63.3
Debt securities
25.0
Loans and advances to customers
3,608.5
3,315.3
2,919.5
2,530.6
2,358.9
Fair value adjustment for portfolio hedged risk
(6.8)
(3.9)
(32.0)
(3.5)
5.7
Derivative financial instruments
14.3
25.5
34.9
3.8
4.8
Other assets
31.7
35.8
36.6
44.0
47.0
Total assets
4,116.7 3,778.0 3,379.6 2,885.9 2,661.2
Due to banks
365.8
402.0
400.5
390.8
276.4
Deposits from customers
3,244.9
2,871.8
2,514.6
2,103.2
1,992.5
Fair value adjustment for portfolio hedged risk
(3.4)
(1.4)
(23.0)
(5.3)
4.7
Derivative financial instruments
10.0
22.0
26.7
6.2
6.1
Subordinated liabilities
93.3
93.1
51.1
50.9
50.8
Other liabilities
45.6
46.0
83.5
37.7
63.1
Total shareholders’ equity
360.5
344.5
326.2
302.4
267.6
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
4,116.7 3,778.0 3,379.6 2,885.9 2,661.2
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
175
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Key performance indicators and other alternative performance measures
All key performance indicators are based on continuing operations and continuing loans and
advances to customers, unless otherwise stated.
(i) Continuing loans and advances to customers
A reconciliation of total loans and advances to customers to continuing operations loans and
advances to customers is set out below:
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
2019
£million
Loans and advances to customers
3,608.5
3,315.3
2,919.5
2,530.6
2,358.9
2,450.1
Assets held for sale
– loan portfolios
1.3
Total loans and advances to
customers
3,608.5
3,315.3
2,919.5
2,531.9
2,358.9
2,450.1
Less discontinued loans and
advances to customers:
Asset Finance
(sold during 2021)
(10.4)
(27.7)
DMS (sold during 2022)
(79.6)
(81.8)
(82.4)
Consumer Mortgages
(sold during 2021)
(77.7)
(105.9)
Other
(1.3)
(4.1)
(7.6)
Total discontinued operations
loans and advances to customers
(80.9)
(174.0)
(223.6)
Continuing loans and
advances to customers
3,608.5
3,315.3
2,919.5
2,451.0
2,184.9
2,226.5
(ii) Net interest margin, net revenue margin and risk adjusted margin ratios
Net interest margin is calculated as net interest income for the financial year as a percentage of
the average loan book. Risk adjusted margin is calculated as risk adjusted income for the financial
year as a percentage of the average loan book. Net revenue margin is calculated as operating
income for the financial year as a percentage of the average loan book. The calculation of the
average loan book is the average of the monthly balance of loans and advances to customers,
net of provisions, over 13 months:
Appendix to the Annual Report (unaudited)
Group
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Net interest income
184.9
167.5
152.6
136.2
133.7
Net fee and commission income
19.0
17.2
17.0
12.7
10.8
Operating income
203.9
184.7
169.6
148.9
144.5
Opening loan book
3,315.3
2,919.5
2,451.0
2,184.9
2,226.5
Closing loan book
3,608.5
3,315.3
2,919.5
2,451.0
2,184.9
Average loan book
3,413.9
3,099.4
2,699.3
2,240.5
2,197.8
Net revenue margin
6.0%
6.0%
6.3%
6.6%
6.6%
Net interest margin
5.4%
5.4%
5.7%
6.1%
6.1%
Retail Finance
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Net interest income
86.8
73.1
61.2
56.1
57.7
Average loan book
1,285.9
1,143.4
898.8
692.9
663.4
Net interest margin
6.8%
6.4%
6.8%
8.1%
8.7%
Net interest income
86.8
73.1
61.2
56.1
57.7
Net fee and commission income
3.2
3.2
3.6
2.6
2.1
Net impairment charge on loans and
advances to customers
(13.3)
(15.9)
(14.8)
(5.0)
(14.5)
Other (losses)/gains: gains/(losses) on
modification of financial assets
0.2
0.4
(0.6)
Risk adjusted income
76.7
60.4
50.2
54.1
44.7
Risk adjusted margin
6.0%
5.3%
5.6%
7.8%
6.7%
Vehicle Finance
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Net interest income
47.6
44.1
38.9
32.2
37.5
Average loan book
505.4
429.6
325.1
245.8
292.1
Net interest margin
9.4%
10.3%
12.0%
13.1%
12.8%
Net interest income
47.6
44.1
38.9
32.2
37.5
Net fee and commission income
0.8
1.8
1.4
1.1
0.6
Net impairment charge on loans and
advances to customers
(38.7)
(14.8)
(21.3)
(0.1)
(20.7)
Other (losses)/gains: gains/(losses) on
modification of financial assets
0.1
0.3
0.9
1.1
(2.5)
Risk adjusted income
9.8
31.4
19.9
34.3
14.9
Risk adjusted margin
1.9%
7.3%
6.1%
14.0%
5.1%
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
176
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Key performance indicators and other alternative performance measures
continued
(ii) Net interest margin, net revenue margin and risk adjusted margin ratios
continued
Real Estate Finance
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Net interest income
32.6
29.7
29.7
31.5
30.4
Net fee and commission income
0.4
0.9
0.2
0.3
Operating income
33.0
30.6
29.9
31.8
30.4
Net impairment charge on loans
and advances to customers
(4.0)
(4.5)
(1.3)
(0.1)
(5.2)
Risk adjusted income
29.0
26.1
28.6
31.7
25.2
Average loan book
1,269.5
1,177.7
1,114.9
1,045.3
1,020.4
Net revenue margin
2.6%
2.6%
2.7%
3.0%
3.0%
Risk adjusted margin
2.3%
2.2%
2.6%
3.0%
2.5%
Commercial Finance
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Net interest income
12.2
13.2
11.4
6.5
4.4
Net fee and commission income
14.5
11.3
11.6
8.4
7.7
Operating income
26.7
24.5
23.0
14.9
12.1
Net impairment (charge)/credit on
loans and advances to customers
(5.9)
(8.0)
(0.8)
0.2
(1.1)
Risk adjusted income
20.8
16.5
22.2
15.1
11.0
Average loan book
353.0
348.8
360.7
259.6
221.9
Net revenue margin
7.6%
7.0%
6.4%
5.7%
5.5%
Risk adjusted margin
5.9%
4.7%
6.2%
5.8%
5.0%
These ratios show the net return on our lending assets, with and without adjusting for cost of risk.
Appendix to the Annual Report (unaudited)
(iii) Return on average equity
Total return on average equity is calculated as the total profit after tax for the previous
12 months as a percentage of average equity. Adjusted return on average equity is calculated
as the adjusted profit after tax for the previous 12 months as a percentage of average equity.
Average equity is calculated as the average of the monthly equity balances.
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Total profit after tax
19.7
24.3
33.7
45.6
15.4
Less:
Loss/(profit) for the year from
discontinued operations
2.1
(4.1)
N/A
N/A
Exceptional items after tax
8.9
5.9
Adjusted profit after tax
28.6
32.3
29.6
N/A
N/A
Opening equity
344.5
326.4
302.2
267.6
252.0
Closing equity
360.5
344.5
326.4
302.2
267.6
Average equity
355.3
334.9
313.4
287.0
261.1
Total return on average equity
5.5%
7.3%
10.8%
15.9%
5.9%
Adjusted return on average equity
8.0%
9.6%
9.4%
N/A
N/A
Return on average equity is a measure of the Group’s ability to generate profit from the equity
available to it.
(iv) Cost to income ratio
Statutory cost to income is calculated as total operating expenses for the financial year as a
percentage of operating income for the financial year. Adjusted cost to income is calculated as
adjusted operating expenses for the financial year as a percentage of operating income for the
financial year.
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Total operating expenses
113.7
106.2
93.2
89.4
81.8
Less: Exceptional items
(9.9)
(6.5)
Adjusted operating expenses
103.8
99.7
93.2
89.4
81.8
Operating income
203.9
184.7
169.6
148.9
144.5
Statutory cost to income ratio
55.8%
57.5%
55.0%
60.0%
56.6%
Adjusted cost to income ratio
50.9%
54.0%
55.0%
60.0%
56.6%
The cost to income ratio measures how efficiently the Group is utilising its cost base to
produce income.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
177
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Key performance indicators and other alternative performance measures
continued
(v) Cost of risk
Cost of risk is calculated as the total of the net impairment charge on loans and advances to
customers and gains and losses on modification of financial assets for the financial year as a
percentage of the average loan book
2024
£million
2023
£million
2022
£million
2021
£million
2020
£million
Net impairment charge on loans and advances
to customers
61.9
43.2
38.2
5.0
41.5
Other (losses)/gains: (gains)/losses on
modification of financial assets
(0.1)
(0.3)
(1.1)
(1.5)
3.1
Total
61.8
42.9
37.1
3.5
44.6
Average loan book
3,413.9
3,099.4
2,699.3
2,240.5
2,197.8
Cost of risk
1.8%
1.4%
1.4%
0.2%
2.0%
The cost of risk measures how effective the Group has been in managing the credit risk of its
lending portfolios.
(vi) Cost of funds
Cost of funds is calculated as the interest expense for the financial year expressed as a
percentage of average loan book.
2024
£million
2023
£million
Interest expense and similar charges
181.1
136.5
Average loan book
3,413.9
3,099.4
Cost of funds
5.3%
4.4%
The cost of funds measures the cost of money being lent to customers.
(vii) Funding ratio and loan to deposit ratio
The funding ratio is calculated as the total funding at the year-end divided by total loans and
advances to customers at the year-end. The loans to deposit ratio is calculated as total loans and
advances to customers at the year-end divided by deposits from customers at the year end:
Appendix to the Annual Report (unaudited)
2024
£million
2023
£million
Deposits from customers
3,244.9
2,871.8
Borrowings under the Bank of England’s liquidity support operations
(including accrued interest)
358.9
395.1
Tier 2 capital (including accrued interest)
93.3
93.1
Equity
360.5
344.5
Total funding
4,057.6
3,704.5
Total loans and advances to customers
3,608.5
3,315.3
Funding ratio
112.4%
111.7%
Loan to deposit ratio
111.2%
115.4%
The funding ratio and loan to deposit ratio measure the Group’s excess of funding that
provides liquidity.
(viii) Profit before tax pre impairments
Profit before tax pre impairments is profit before tax, excluding impairment charges and gains
on modification of financial assets.
2024
£million
2023
£million
Profit before income tax
29.2
36.1
Excluding: net impairment charge on loans
and advances to customers
61.9
43.2
Excluding: Other (losses)/gains: gains on modification of financial
assets
(0.1)
(0.3)
Profit before tax pre impairments
91.0
79.0
Exceptional items
9.9
6.5
Adjusted profit before tax pre impairments
100.9
85.5
Profit before tax pre impairments measures the operational performance of the business.
(ix) Tangible book value per share
Tangible book value per share is calculated as the total equity less intangible assets divided by
the number of shares in issue at the end of the year.
2024
£million
2023
£million
Total equity
360.5
344.5
Less: Intangible assets
(5.0)
(5.9)
Tangible book value
355.5
338.6
Number of shares in issue at the end of the year
19,071,408
19,017,795
Tangible book value per share
£18.64
£17.80
Tangible book value per share is a measure of the Group’s value per share.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
178
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Term
Explanation
ALCO
The Assets and Liabilities Committee.
BiFD
Borrowers in Financial Difficulty.
CET 1 capital
Common Equity Tier 1 capital comprises share capital, share premium,
retained earnings, own shares and regulatory adjustments.
CET 1
capital ratio
The Common Equity Tier 1 capital ratio is the ratio of the bank’s CET 1
capital to its Total Risk Exposure. This signifies a bank’s financial strength. The
CET 1 capital ratio is monitored by regulators and investors because it shows
how well a bank can withstand financial stress and remain solvent.
Capital
requirement
regulation
and CRD V
The revised Capital Requirements Directive and Regulation, commonly
referred to as CRD V and CRR 2, refine and continue to implement Basel III
by the UK, making important amendments in a number of areas, including
large exposures, leverage ratio, liquidity, market risk, counterparty credit risk,
as well as reporting and disclosure requirements.
EAD
Exposure At Default. EAD represents the expected exposure in the event of
a default.
EBT
Employee Benefit Trust. A trust established by a company to hold shares
on behalf of its employees.
ECL
Expected Credit Loss. ECL is the probability-weighted estimate of credit
losses over the expected life of a financial instrument.
EIR
Effective Interest Rate. EIR is the rate that exactly discounts the estimated
future cash flows to the gross carrying amount of a financial asset
or amortised cost of a financial liability.
EPS
Earnings Per Share.
Feefo
Feefo collects independent reviews from the customers of businesses across
many sectors, including financial services.
Financial
Conduct
Authority
The Financial Conduct Authority is the conduct regulator for financial
services firms and financial markets in the UK. Its aims are to protect
consumers, enhance market integrity and promote competition.
FVOCI
Fair Value Through Other Comprehensive Income. One of three classification
categories for financial assets under IFRS 9.
FVTPL
Fair Value Through Profit or Loss. One of three classification categories for
financial assets under IFRS 9.
Glossary
Term
Explanation
High Quality
Liquid Assets
High Quality Liquid Assets are assets with a high potential to be converted
easily and quickly into cash. This comprises cash, the Bank of England
reserve account and Treasury Bills.
ICAAP
Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process. A firm must carry out an
ICAAP in accordance with the PRA’s rules. They include requirements on
the firm to undertake a regular assessment of the amounts, types and
distribution of capital that it considers adequate to cover the level and nature
of the risks to which it is or might be exposed.
IFRS
International Financial Reporting Standards.
ILAAP
The Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process allows firms to assess
the level of liquidity and funding that adequately supports all relevant current
and future liquidity risks in their business. In undertaking this process, a firm
should be able to ensure that it has appropriate processes in place to ensure
compliance with the CRD. This requires firms to develop and use appropriate
risk and liquidity management techniques.
ILTR
Index Long-Term Repos. One of the Bank of England’s regular market-wide
sterling operations. It allows market participants to borrow central bank
reserves (cash) for a six-month period in exchange for other, less liquid
assets (collateral).
LCR
The Liquidity Coverage Ratio regime requires management of net 30-day
cash outflows as a proportion of High Quality Liquid Assets. The Group has
set a more prudent internal limit than that set by the regulator.
LGD
Loss Given Default. Estimated loss when a borrower defaults on a loan.
LTIP
Long-Term Incentive Plan. A delayed compensation scheme used to
motivate participating employees over a defined time-period.
OIS
Overnight Indexed Swap.
OLAR
The Overall Liquidity Adequacy Rule is the Board’s own view of the Group’s
liquidity needs, as set out in the Board-approved ILAAP.
Pillar 1, Pillar 2
and Pillar 3
Basel III uses a ‘three pillars’ concept: (1) Pillar 1 – minimum capital
requirements (addressing risk) using a standardised approach for credit,
market and operational risk; (2) Pillar 2 – supervisory review process; and (3)
Pillar 3 – market discipline and enhanced disclosures.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
179
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Term
Explanation
PD
Probability of Default. The likelihood that a borrower will default on their
debt obligation.
POCI
Purchased or Originated Credit-Impaired financial assets. Financial assets
that are already impaired when they are purchased or originated.
PRA
The Prudential Regulation Authority is a part of the Bank of England
and responsible for the prudential regulation and supervision of banks,
building societies, credit unions, insurers and major investment firms.
It sets standards and supervises financial institutions at the level of the
individual firm. The PRA’s objectives are set out in the Financial Services
and Markets Act 2000, but the main objective is to promote the safety
and soundness of the firms it regulates.
RoAE
Return On Average Equity. A financial ratio that measures performance by
comparing profit after tax to average shareholders’ equity.
SME
Small to Medium-sized Enterprises.
SPPI
Solely Payments of Principal and Interest. Cash flows from a financial asset
that are solely payments of principal and interest on the outstanding
principal amount.
TFSME
Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs. The TFSME
was launched in March 2020 as part of measures to respond to the
economic shock from COVID-19. The scheme is designed to incentivise
eligible participants to provide credit to businesses and households to
bridge through the current period of economic disruption, with additional
incentives to provide credit to SMEs.
This scheme allowed access to four-year funding at rates very close to Bank
of England Base Rate, allowing eligible participants to borrow central bank
reserves in exchange for eligible collateral and is due for repayment in 2025.
Glossary
Term
Explanation
Tier 2 capital
Tier 2 capital is the secondary component of bank capital, in addition to
Tier 1 capital, and is composed of subordinated liabilities, net of issue costs.
Total Capital
Requirement
Guidance given to a firm about the amount and quality of capital resources
that the PRA considers that the firm should hold at all times under the overall
financial adequacy rule as it applies on a solo level or a consolidated level.
Total Risk
Exposure
Total Risk Exposure is the total of the Group’s risk-weighted assets.
TSR
Total Shareholder Return. A financial metric that measures the performance
of a share over time.
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
180
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Corporate contacts and advisers
Secretary and Registered Office
Lisa Daniels ACIS
Yorke House
Arleston Way
Solihull
B90 4LH
T 0121 693 9100
F 0121 693 9124
Independent Auditor
Deloitte LLP
Four Brindleyplace
Birmingham
B1 2HZ
Bankers
Barclays Bank PLC
NatWest Bank PLC
Stockbrokers
Investec
30 Gresham Street
London
EC2V 7QN
Shore Capital Stockbrokers
57 St James’s Street
London
SW1A 1LD
Registrar
MUFG Corporate Markets
(formerly Link Group)
Central Square
29 Wellington Street
Leeds
LS1 4DL
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
181
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Notes
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Annual Report & Accounts 2024
182
Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
Financial Statements
Other Information
Designed and produced by Radley Yeldar
www.ry.com
Printed in the UK by Pureprint using vegetable inks and their
environmental printing technology
Pureprint is a CarbonNeutral company. Both Manufacturing
mill and the printer are registered to the Environmental
Management System ISO14001 and are Forest Stewardship
Council (FSC) chain-of-custody certified
Secure Trust Bank PLC
Yorke House
Arleston Way
Solihull B90 4LH
T 0121 693 9100
Registration No. 00541132
www.securetrustbank.com